Vole 6 1911-13 Gerd ees an ay ita” Nitin ; Ny BULEETFIN FROM THE LABORATORIES OF NATURAL HISTORY OF THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA ee VOLUME VI. PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY IOWA CITY, IOWA 1911-1913, Fey TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME VI Each number paged separately No. 1 The hydroids of the West Coast of North America C. M. FRASER No. 2 A list of the Coleoptera of Iowa H. F. WicKHAM Iowa Discomycetes FRED J. SEAVER A fossil burrowing sponge from the Iowa Devonian A. O. THOMAS The prairies B. SHIMEK No. 3 A report on some recent collections of fossil Coleoptera from the Miocene Shales of Florissant H. F. WickKHAM Notes on New England hydroids C. M. FRASER Notes on Cleridae from North and Central America H. F. WicKHAM and A. B. WoLcorTtT No. 4 Fossil Coleoptera from the Wilson ranch near Florissant, Colorado H. F. WicKHAM A new Succinea B. SHIMEK An artificial prairie B. SHIMEK A long-stalked Elodea flower R. B. WYLIE PAGE Oo 41 169 Gs 39 49 Oo BULLETIN OF THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA 'NEW SERIES No. 28 MAY 13, 1911 BULLETIN FROM THE LABORATORIES OF NATURAL HISTORY THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA VOLUME VI NO.1 PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY — eee a bitches One Tres DURING THE ACADEMIC YEAR; MONTHLY a pes a NUARY, WEEKLY FROM FEBRUARY TO JUNE. ENTERED AT THE OFFICE IN Iowa CITY AS SECOND CLASS MAIL MATTER BULLETIN OF THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA NEW SERIES NO. 28 MAY 13, 1911 a IN THE SERIES OF RESEARCH BULLETINS OF oil UNIVERSITY f BULLETIN FROM THE LABORATORIES OF NATURAL HISTORY OF THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA EDITORIAL STAFF SAMUEL Carvin, Geology Tuomas H. MacpripeE, Botany Cuar.es C. Nuttine, Zoology ee VI NUMBER 1 THE HYDROIDS LIBRARY offihe NEW YORK BOTANICAL WEST COAST OF NORTH AMERICA GARDEN. With special reference to those of the Vancouver Island region with a map and eight plates C. McLEAN FRASER PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY ee IssuED TWENTY-ONE TIMES DURING THE ACADEMIC YEAR; MONTHLY FROM OCTOBER To. JANUARY, WEEKLY FROM FEBRUARY TO JUNE. ENTERED AT THE Post OFFICE IN Iowa Ciry As SEcoND CLAss Matt MATTER THE HYDROIDS OF THE WEST COAST OF NORTH AMERICA INTRODUCTION The new material examined in connection with the prepara- tion of this paper has been collected from various localities in the Vancouver Island Region. In the summer of 1903 I spent some time at the Minnesota Seaside Station at Port Renfrew on the West Coast of Vancouver Island at the entrance of the Strait of Juan de Fuca. There was no provision made for dredging, con- sequently all the specimens obtained were shore forms. In 1908 and again in 1909 I spent some time at the Dominion Biological Station at Departure Bay, five miles from the City of Nanaimo on the East Coast of the Island. Here I collected shore speci- mens and obtained others by dredging, seldom in water more than 25 fathoms deep. The best locality for dredging was in Northumberland Strait, between Gabriola Island and other smaller Islands, at the mouth of Dodd’s Narrows, a narrow chan- nel between two small islands, about ten miles southeast of the Station. Besides the specimens that I collected while there, sev- eral others were handed over to me by Rev. G. W. Taylor, the curator of the Station. These were obtained at various times from various points along the coast from Rose Spit on Graham Island in the Queen Charlotte Archipelago, southward as far as Victoria, and many of these were very fine specimens. In 1909 ’ Prof. John Macoun, Curator of the Dominion Museum at Ottawa, MAY 1 6 1911 with two assistants, Messrs. Spreadborough and Young, spent four months collecting off Amphitrite Point at the entrance to the Alberni Canal on the West Coast, making the village of Ucluelet their working base. Through the kindness of Prof. Macoun, I received the Hydroids of the Collection for examina- tion. During that same season, Dr. A. G. Huntsman went over to Ucluelet from Departure Bay, to collect for the University of Toronto. He brought back some Hydroids that helped to sup- plement the material from Prof. Macoun’s collection. The speci- 4 C. McLEAN FRASER mens from Ucluelet were collected along the shore and from dredging in shallow water up to 30 fathoms. When I came to the University of Iowa last September, Prof. C. C. Nutting placed at my disposal two collections from San Juan Archipelago, not previously examined, the one made by Mr. H. Moon, a graduate of the University of lowa, and the other by Prof. T. Kincaid of the University of Washington, Seattle. The collection belonging to the University and Prof. Nutting’s own collection, both extensive, have been available for reference and comparison. A collection made at Canso, Nova Scotia, under the supervision of Prof. R. Ramsay Wright, while connected with the University of Toronto, was also of value in comparing the West Coast forms with those on the Atlantic Coast. These col- lections, then, form the basis for the work set forth in this paper. As so many contributions to Hydroid Literature were at hand, on the advice of Prof. Nutting, I decided to extend the work to include all the references to Hydroid distribution on the West Coast up to the present time. The paper, therefore, is intended to serve two purposes, (1) To give a list of all the species found in the new material from the Vancouver Island Region, with the description of any new species found or any new points of in- terest observed in connection with forms already described. (2) To give a full list of species known to exist on the West Coast of North America, with the full recorded distribution of each species along this coast. The Hydroid history of the Coast as far as collecting is con- cerned, up until 1901, has been given by Prof. Nutting in his paper on the Harriman Hydroids. Since that time he has ex- tended the list of Sertularians in his monographic work of 1904. Dr. Torrey reported several new species and extended the range of many others, chiefly along the California Coast, by his paper on Pacifie Hydroids in 1902, and that on San Diego Hydroids in 1904. In 1907, E. Jaderholm in his paper ‘‘Zur Kenntnis der Hydroiden-fauna des Beringsmeeres’’, reported several other species from the Bering Sea, two of which, Haleciwm telescop- icum and Stegopoma plicatile, had not previously been reported from the West Coast. Although I have added but seven new species and ten more that had not been reported from the Coast previously, the closer connection made between the Alaskan and Californian forms by WEST COAST HYDROIDS 5 the identification of species new to the Vancouver Island Region, serves as a slight addition to our too scant knowledge of the fauna of the Pacific. That no doubt may exist as to the exact location of the points _most commonly mentioned, I have appended an outline map of the Vancouver Island Region, extending far enough north to in- elude all the localities mentioned in the paper in connection with the new material examined. It might be well to say a few words with regard to the nature of the coast at the various localities. In general it may be said that the whole West Coast is rocky, tending in many places to be precipitous. The sandy reaches are comparatively few and peb- bly beaches just as rare. At Port Renfrew the Station is situated on a projecting point between San Juan Harbor and the open Pacific. The rock is a slate formation with an extensive dip, cov- ered with sandstone and conglomerate. On the ocean side the swell rolls in with the strata and the covering is well worn, oft with the force of the waves so there is little chance for attach- ment to the smooth rocks. On the harbor side, the swell strikes against the strata so that the slate breaks off with ragged edges. In many cases the underlying strata may be worn out more than those above and the latter are left overhanging, making perfect feeding ground for numerous animal forms. The sandstone above becomes worn into potholes and as the water in them is re- plenished with each flow of the tide they make excellent salt wa- ter aquaria. At Ucluelet the conditions are much different, as Amphitrite Point is low-lying, much of it covered at high tide, and the depth of the water increases more gradually than usually on this coast, but here also there is an exposed and a sheltered side. At Departure Bay, the bay itself is almost land-locked so ' that little wave action is noticeable though the variation in the tide is greater than usual. Eel grass and seaweed are plentiful but they are covered so much with diatoms and other similar forms that the Hydroids found on them are not very readily ex- amined. On the lee side of some of the islands at the entrance, where there are overhanging rocks, the conditions are more fa- vorable. Most of the bay is less than 25 fathoms in depth but several species were obtained by dredging, among them the inter- esting new forms, Crypta huntsmani and Hydractinia aggregata. In Northumberland Strait at the mouth of Dodd’s Narrows there is a powerful tide-rip at the change of the tide, which cannot fail 6 C. McLEAN FRASER to bring a good food supply to the animals that are near enough to reap the benefit. In the San Juan Archipelago the conditions are very much as those already described. The shores of the va- rious islands are in general not very well adapted to collecting, though there are some favored spots. The numerous channels between the islands give a variety of current and plenty of inter- change to make good feeding grounds for such forms as Hydroids. As the Archipelago is in the direct path of the current through the Strait of Juan de Fuca, these conditions are accentuated. The base for work in this vicinity is at Friday Harbor, on the Eastern or sheltered side of San Juan Island, at which there is now a regular Biological Station under the direction of Prof. T. Kineaid of the University of Washington. My thanks are especially due to Prof. C. C. Nutting, who has given so much advice and assistance and supplied so many con- veniences for advancing the work. The list of papers available for consultation has been extended through the kindness of the Librarian of the John Crerar Library, Chicago, who, through Mr. M. G. Wyer, the University Librarian, loaned some rare and im- portant papers. I wish also to express my obligation to Rev. G. W. Taylor, Prof. John Macoun and Dr. A. G. Huntsman for eol- lections of material, to Prof. Josephine E. Tilden and Prof. Con- way MacMillan for their courtesy and assistance at the Minnesota Seaside Station, and to my wife who has contributed to the work by making the pen drawings for the plates from camera-lucida drawings supplhed. GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION In 1876 Dr. 8. F. Clark reported 24 species of Hydroids from the Pacific Coast, south of Vancouver Island and later in the same year 42 species from Alaskan waters. Taking these reports as a basis he concluded that since he found only one species, Lafa@a dumosa, in the two regions, there must be a distinct break in dis- tribution between the two regions. Investigations since that time have shown that no such generalization should be made on so small an amount of data. The more the group is studied and the greater the number of locations for examination included, the more reason there is for believing that there are no sudden, nor even comparatively sudden, breaks in distribution along the en- tire West Coast, though naturally certain species gradually dis- WEST COAST HYDROIDS 7 appear and others as gradually come in. At the present time, out of a total of 196 species, there is record of 155 species from the Vancouver Island Region and north of it, and 88 south of that region. No less than 47 or 24% of the whole number are common to the two, these being divided up as follows: Gymnoblastic forms 9, Campanularians (here used in the broad sense of all hydrothecate forms except Sertularians and Plumularians) 20, Sertularians 11 and Plumularians 7. Furthermore, 22 species that are found north of Vancouver Island, are found in the Van- couver Island Region as well as in the Region south of it. Referring again to Dr. Clark’s paper’, he says ‘‘There is little doubt that when the fauna has been more thoroughly investigat- ed, the number of Hydroids may be at least doubled. Such a variety as exists on the New England Coast can hardly be ex- pected from our Pacific shores south of Vancouver Island, for the waters there do not afford the same diversity of temperature.’’ The basis for this latter conclusion was rather insufficient also. Since that time, the work that has been done south of Cape F lat- tery, has been limited almost entirely to the work of Dr. Torrey, which, however excellent it has been, has been largely confined to the vicinity of San Francisco and San Diego with some inter- mediate points, and a little dredging by the ‘‘ Albatross’’, report- ed as yet only so far as the Sertularians and Plumularians are concerned, yet the number of species has increased from 24 to 88, and as far as I can see, if the waters off shore from Cape Flattery to San Francisco are carefully worked, there is no reason to sup- pose that the latter number might not be doubled, or that it might not favorably compare with an equal amount of Coast-line on the Atlantic side of the continent. However that may be with regard to the coast south of Cape Flattery, there is no stretch of the Atlantic Coast equal in extent to that of the Pacific Coast to the north of Cape Flattery that can offer such variety of favorable conditions for Hydroid growth as there is to be found in that region. The broken nature of the out- line, the presence of innumerable islands, large and small, throughout the entire length, in many cases separated by great depths of water, making a variety of currents and tide-waves, and a wide range of temperature, though the cold, which the Hydroid usually prefers, is predominant. The profusion of plant life everywhere evident, is a good indication of the variety in 1 Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 251. 8 C. McLEAN FRASER ~ animal life that may be found along the shores and in the depths and among the forms of animal life there is every reason to be- lieve that the Hydroid is well represented. When the little col- lecting that has been done, has brought to light 111 species in the Vancouver Island Region and 101 species north of the Island, what may we expect when the whole coast has been carefully ex- amined ? In examining the distribution of the species along the Coast, I have prepared two tables: one, a table of distribution showing the number of species in various areas along the Coast, as well as to some extent, their general distribution, though this is not intend- ed to be exhaustive, the other, a table of comparisons in number of species in various areas. An analysis of these tables shows several interesting points. Before going into the general discussion, it might be well to note that Dr. Clark was hardly justified in making the statement that there is a distinct break at Shumagin Islands any more than at any other point along the Coast. Of 57 species that have been reported from Bering Sea and the Aleutian Islands, distributed as follows: Gym. 5, Camp. 11, Sert. 39 and Plum. 2, 38 or 67%, Gym. 3, Camp. 8, Sert. 26, Plum. 1, have been found farther Hast and South along the Coast, the various groups supplying propor- tionate numbers. It is also interesting that, in proportion to the number of species obtained in the two cases, the species found on the West Coast of Vancouver Island bear a quite similar relation to those north and south of the Island, as do those on the Hast Coast. Of the 36 species found on the West Coast of Vancouver Island, 21 have been found north of the Island, i. e. 58% and 22 south of the Island or 61%. This may be tabulated as follows: Total Gym. Camp. Sert. Plum. IVES eect tat aee 36 4 14 14 4 Common to North,.. ‘21 2 8 10 1 Common to South,.. 22 3 7 8 4 IBTASIB AC aes Gus atom aie nee ag 101 8 5D 31 i Common to North,.. 52 1 29 25 1 Common to South,.. 38 4 20 §) 5 Of the 101 species on the East Coast 52 or 51% are also found to the North and 38 or 38% are also found to the South. The affini- ties of the species on the East side of the Island show a tendency towards the North rather than the South, somewhat more so than WEST COAST HYDROIDS 9 those on the West side. It is rather gratifying to find that only four species are found common to the north and the south of Vancouver Island that are not found in the Vancouver Island ‘Region, because this indicates that however scanty the collection is, it must be fairly representative of the whole coast. Since the number of species has become more extensive, the conclusions of some earlier authors that for a great number of species, the distribution occurs along meridional lines from a cif- cumpolar centre, seem to be more fully corroborated. Of the 45 species common to the East and West Coasts of North America, no less than 40 or 89% are also found either in Europe or in the Arctic Regions generally, distributed as follows: Total 45, Gym. 7, Camp. 23, Sert. 18, Plum. 2; Common 40, Gym. 6, Camp. 21, Sert. 12, Plum. 1, while the total number of species common to the West Coast and the South Pacific is inconsiderable. Taking up a more particular comparison of forms along the Coast itself, though there is a fairly general distribution in the different groups, the centre of distribution for the coast varies to a large extent. Of the Gymnoblastic forms 31 have been found along the whole coast, but the distribution is much scattered. This may be ac- counted for by the fact that most of the collecting has been done by men that are not hydroid systematists and the soft yielding nature of the Gymnoblastic forms makes them less noticeable to such collectors, than the more rigid, and in general more con- spicuous, Calyptoblastic forms. Corroboration is given to this from the number of Gymnoblastic forms reported by Dr. Torrey from the California Coast. He, being familiar with such forms, was able to find a relatively large number. No one species has been found over a large area, although some are quite abundant in certain localities. Cape Flattery divides the group quite ac- curately into two equal parts. 20 species have been found north of that point and 20 south of it. 11 are restricted to the north and 11 to the south. Those to the north are evenly divided be- tween the Vancouver Island Region and north of it. 9 are found in the Vancouver Island Region and not north of it and 8 are found north of that Region that are not found in it. 3 are com- mon to the two regions. 12 species are circumpolar but none are found common to the South Pacific. Among the Campanularian forms, in the Family Campanular- 10 C. McLEAN FRASER ide itself, Campanularia verticillata and Obelia dichotoma ap- pear at the greatest number of points in quantity. Next to Obelia geniculata, they have the widest general distribution of any species found on the West Coast, but Obelia geniculata has been reported only from the California Coast on the West, up to the present time. Campanularia volubilis is also quite common. Among, the Campanulinide, a family represented by very few species, Calycella pygmea and Calycella syringa are the only widely-distributed forms. No equal area so little investigated as far as I have been able to find out, possesses so great a variety in the Family Halecidew, which with the exception of Dr. Tor- rey’s one species, Campalecium medusiferum, is restricted to one genus. 18 species are reported, 11 of which are found in the Vancouver Island Region. Only 6 have been reported elsewhere and strangely enough 3 of these are from the Australian Region. In the Lafwide 3 species of Lafw@a, dumosa, gracillima, and frutt- cosa are particularly abundant, but they are all cosmopolitan forms. As far as mass of material is concerned, these three spe- cies supply a greater amount than any other three species on the Coast. The number of Campanularians is quite extensive. The col- onies of many of them are large and much branched so that they are easily detected. More of them are very small, even micro- scopic, but they use the other larger colonies of Hydroids for their hosts and thus are collected with them. The distribution of the group differs from the Gymnoblastic group, the centre of distribution being moved to the northward. Of the 78 species found along the Coast, 68 or 87% are found in the Vancouver Island Region or north of it, while only 38 or 48% have been reported to the south. 48 species are restricted to Vancouver Island Region and the north, 13 of these to the north of Van- couver Island alone, and only 10 are restricted to the south. 55 are found in the Vancouver Island Region, 70% of the whole number. 36 or 46% are circumpolar. In the Sertularide, Abietinaria abietina and Sertularella tri- cuspidata, here as in general distribution, cannot be approached for number by any other species: Abietinaria variabilis, Abietin- aria amphora, Abietinaria anguina and Abietinaria traski, the last three being restricted to the Coast, have a wide range. Se- laginopsis cylindrica, Selaginopsis mirabilis, Thuiaria dalli and WEST COAST HYDROIDS or i | Thuiaria similis are very plentiful in the Vancouver Island Re- gion and the north. In this group the centre of distribution is still farther to the northward. Out of a total of 68 species, 57 or 83% are found north of Cape Flattery, 49 or 72% being found north of Vancouver Island, and only 22 or 32% to the south. 46 are restricted to the north and only 11 to the south. 36 or 53% are found in the Vancouver Island Region and 26 or 38% are circumpolar. In the Plumularide only two, Aglaophenia struthionides and Plumularia lagenifera, are at all wide-spread, but these two are very abundant. Many species are reported only from a single locality. The centre of distribution for the family, if one can speak of such when the distribution is so scattered, is south of Cape Flattery. This is natural as the family is especially a tropical one. Out of a total of 19 species only 10 or 53% are found in the north, while 16 or 84% are found in the south. Only 3 are found north of Vancouver Island. One of these, the only representative of a genus, is reported only from the Aleutian Islands. 12 species or 63% are restricted to the West Coast. The 7 that are found elsewhere have practically nothing in com- mon in their distribution. Aglaophenia latirostris, reported from Brazil, was found off the Oregon Coast and in the San Juan Archipelago. Aglaophenia pluma, reported from Great Britain, Southern Europe and South Africa, was found off the California Coast. Diplocheilus allmani, reported from the Japan Coast, was found off the Coast of California. Plumularia corrugata, re- ported from Brazil and the Hawaiian Islands, was found in the San Juan Archipelago. Plumularia echinulata, reported from the British Coast, was found in Puget Sound. Plumularia meg- alocephala, reported off Georgia, was found off the California Coast. Plumularia setacea, reported from Europe and Florida, was found off the California Coast. From such an incongruous list it is impossible to generalize as to distribution. It would seem either, that these species represent the ragged ends of lines of distribution from a centre not yet discovered, or that the con- nections are made along lines in deep water, where up to the present they have not been reached. I have very little accurate information concerning bathymet- - rical distribution and still less concerning temperature, not enough in either case to form a basis for general discussion. GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE HypDROIDS FOUND West Coast or NortH AMERICA Clava leptostyla Crypta huntsmani Coryne brachiata Syncoryne eximia Syneoryne mirabilis Garveia annulata Garveia formosa Garvela nutans Bimeria franciscana Bimeria gracilis Bimeria robusta Bougainvillia glorietta Bougainvillia mertensi Perigonimus repens Eudendrium ealifornicum Eudendrium eapillare Eudendrium rameum Eudendrium ramosum Eudendrium vaginatum Hydractinia aggregata Hydractinia californica Hydractinia milleri Corymorpha carnea Corymorpha palma Tubularia borealis Tubularia crocea Tubularia harrimani Tubularia indivisa Tubularia larynx Tubularia marina Tubularia tubularoides Campanularia denticulata Campanularia exigua Campanularia fusiformis Campanularia groenlandica Campanularia hesperia Campanularia hincksi Campanularia integra Campanularia kineaidi Campanularia occidentalis Campanularia pacifica Campanularia raridenta Campanularia regia Campanularia rigida Campanularia ritteri Bering Sea tp + + Aleutian Islands + + East of Aleutian Is. to Sitka + + ++ + + a Sle £25) Be |e s( |e" Eslee|"=|£ (bel22 |" q+ ae + a as bee oee gigs |a. ob + + ee + t a +} -F} + -++ + +)+4 + Baie ee — zs ala =. = S08 a al +) |+]+ E + ote + + “Ee 2 pel eu + aR ce 5 Sale + OFF THE South Pacific East Coast of North America Europe Arctic Regions -+- = “+ ++4++4+ 4+ ++ Bering Sea Is. to Sitka From Sitka to Vancouver I. San Juan Archipelago Puget Sound Region West Coast of South of Aleutian Islands San Francisco East of Aleutian East Coast of Vancouver I. Vancouver Ti From ©. Flattery to San Francisco Sonth Pacifie Fast Coast of North America Europe Campanularia speciosa Campanularia urceolata Campanularia verticillata Campanularia volubilis Clytia attenuata Clytia bakeri Clytia edwardsi Clytia hendersoni Clytia johnstoni Clytia universitatis Eucopella caliculata Eucopella compressa Eucopella everta Gonothyrea clarki Gonothyrea inornata Obelia borealis Obelia commissuralis Obelia corona Obelia dichotoma Obelia dubia Obelia fragilis Obelia gelatinosa Obelia geniculata Obelia gracilis Obelia griffini Obelia longissima Obelia plicata Obelia sureularis Thaumantias inconspicua Calycella pygmea Calycella syringa Campanulina forskalea Campanulina rugosa Cuspidella humilis Lovenella producta Stegopoma plicatile Campalecium medusiferum Halecium annulatum Halecium balei Halecium corrugatum Halecium densum Halecium halecinum Halecium kofoidi Halecium muricatum Halecium ornatum Halecium pygmeum - Halecium reversum Halecium robustum Halecium scutum Halecium speciosum + + + +++ 4+ +++ +44 _ + -|- a +} ++ -|- -}- -}- +++ 44+ + + +++++ ++ +4 + + + ++ ++++ ++ 4+ iar ++ ++++ ++ + + + -f- +] Aretie Regions ++ 14 ++ Halecium telescopicum Halecium tenellum Halecium washingtoni Halecium wilsoni Filellum expansum Filellum serpens Grammaria immersa Hebella pocillum Lafcea adherens Lafcea dumosa Lafcea fruticosa Lafcea gracillima Lafcea grandis Lictorella carolina Abietinaria abietina Abietinaria alexanderi Abietinaria amphora Abietinaria anguina Abietinaria annulata Abietinaria costata Abietinaria filicula Abietinaria gigantea Abietinaria gracilis Abietinaria greenei Abietinaria inconstans Abietinaria rigida Abietinaria traski Abietinaria turgida Abietinaria variabilis Dictyocladium flabellum Diphasia clarz Diphasia corniculata Diphasia kineaidi Diphasia pulchra Hydrallmania distans Hydrallmania franciscana Selaginopsis cedrina Selaginopsis cylindrica Selaginopsis hartlaubi Selaginopsis mirabilis Selaginopsis obsoleta Selaginopsis ornata Selaginopsis pinaster Selaginopsis pinnata Selaginopsis plumiformis Selaginopsis triserialis Sertularella albida Sertularella clarki Sertularella complexa Sertularella conica Bering Sea Aleutian Islands East of Aleutian Is. to Sitka From Sitka to Vancouver I. East Coast of Vancouver I. 4. : -|- aan a 4 fot ++ + + + fp + a + + ++ + +44 +++ 4. + +- a po aa + + + + + + + + a + $++ $4444 oe + ge/iely clo slac| S Ze] A | 2 “sis jpele4) ga \ael |g + = pelea is | cee Ae Sahai: a amen + -+|FHlae tae + < +\+|+ -+]-+]-+/-F]-6/=r lalate eis see +]-H\-++] 1-5) 4E Ile + Plas +-|--|--|-4 ele sper sa eeliaklar o> shale cae. + a sae a eal + Flo lela “ celeste es a ae ab ~ + aalatal -/- nee + = He +]-+]+ + -+ + ~~ ee Sertularella dentifera Sertularella elegans Sertularella fusiformis Sertularella levinseni Sertularella magna Sertularella minuta Sertularella pinnata Sertularella polyzonias _ Sertularella rugosa Sertularella tanneri Sertularella tenella Sertularella tricuspidata Sertularella turgida Sertularia cornicina Sertularia desmoides Sertularia furcata Sertularia gracilis Sertularia pedrensis Sertularia pumila Synthecium eylindricum Thuiaria alba Thuiaria argentea Thuiaria dalli Thuiaria elegans Thuiaria fabricii Thuiaria kurile Thuiaria plumosa Thuiaria robusta Thuiaria similis Thuiaria tenera Thuiaria thuiarioides Thuiaria thuja Aglaophenia diegensis Aglaophenia inconspicua Aglaophenia latirostris Aglaophenia octocarpa Aglaophenia pluma Aglaophenia struthionides Antenella avalonia Diplocheilus allmani Nuditheea dalli Plumularia alicia Plumularia corrugata Plumularia echinulata Plumularia goodei Plumularia lagenifera Plumularia megalocephala Plumularia palmeri Plumularia plumularoides Plumularia setacea Plumularia virginiz S| 3 |Sa|eeleeles|se(eelc sie=| S les] a] 2 =e td aed id 2d Be Ro Asia B\|se = "| 2\2 eRe] <5 Peles ale ie) | 3 — 3 Facile tt a — os ha — “ats an a ee bak =F ais 3 om be oh sie re A rir aaaies (Seer pa eC Fh ee ee paieioed Fs ek a a ol Oi it =) ck a5 oa — +) ele a6 +} |+|+ — a3 We oh ao “she a ae zi = A le Ate Salles ad dal ol ual ks ai — + He oi a9 ae oe cmistiaeta (epee eek te can es oa = aa “ 3) SL et ec Na sid fous — — als ri — + Sal al oi) Le (a a — + _ 55 , a a 9 Oe es Seer ise hte Cire eae rzMa So aie fe aftente — a A seehalst oy er kas — a C. McLEAN FRASER A COMPARATIVE DISTRIBUTION -TABLE Total Number of species from the entire Coast 196 Number of new. species i Number of species new to the Coast Me Number of species north of Vancouver Is. 101 Number in V. J. Region and north of it 155 Number south of Vancouver Island Region 88 Number common to these two divisions 47 Number restricted to Northern Division 108 Number restricted to Southern Division 41 Number in the Vancouver Island Region 111 Number north of V. I. not in V. I. Region 44 Number in V. I. Region and not north of it 54 Number common to V. I. Region and north of it 57 Number in V. I. Region and south of it 156 Number in V. I. Region and not south of it 68 Number south and not in V. I. Region 45 Number common to V. I. Region and to the south of it 43 Number not in V. I. Region but common to north and south 4 Number common to East and West Coasts of North America 45 Number common to Europe and West Coast of North America 59 Number common to Arctic Regions and West Coast 52 Number common to South Pacific and West Coast of North America 18 Number restricted to West Coast of N. A. ill 19 ularian forms Campan- 12 39 a gS 68 19 on, a ee 49 3 57 “ith 22) aii 1 AG: "ee 11, - oe 362 06 21 =e ee | Pc ea | 47 18 Dota 11 10: Ly 0 at 13) 15 Ses 21 Aig 6.) mS AY aa ob ae Q / b Point a? oe a S F °, ¢ “SP 5 z OO ay SCALE Sn Rie SOU ees Nea R. Blah OF ANCOUVER ISLAND RECION ye’ \ Roa r=) r Ps . Sy 7 | ha dinsiitstie Se ws pa ect of hs) NCOUVE PA Westinh gh “ Wi Ol 18 _ C. McLEAN FRASER SYSTEMATIC DISCUSSION In the nomenclature used in this paper no new departures have been made from that in most general use by other authors. Other things being equal, that used by authors who have done the great- est amount of work in the field, has been followed. ’Tis true that sometimes there is no little disagreement among these on certain points, but in all cases a position has been adopted such that any- one who is familiar with Hydroid Literature, will be able to trace with ease the relation of any species, and that is the chief use for nomenclature. In case any particular author is followed in any family or group, it is indicated in the special discussion at the point where the family or group is taken up. Where no author is followed in entirety, the characteristics of the family or group are given as used. Except in special cases no authors’ names are given ex- cept in connection with the species. I have made no endeavor to indicate all the changes in syn- onymy, as that is necessary only in monographic work. I have tried in every case to give the original binomial designation with its reference and at least the majority of references made by authors who have dealt with the Hydroids of the West Coast. Further references can readily be obtained from the works of such authors as Nutting, Broch and Jaderholm. GYMNOBLASTHA In taking up the gymnoblastie hydroids, I have followed All- man’s classification? almost entirely, at least as far as the Families are concerned. For that reason I shall not give the characters of each family, simply taking these given by Allman as the basis. I do this because, while I think it makes very little difference how the classification is made as long as the species referred to, is made evident, there certainly is nothing gained in clearness by grouping as much as some authors do, even where intergrading takes place, as it is always lable to do. Allman has not gone so far in the other direction as to make confusion by division into smaller groups. In any ease his classification 2 Monograph of Gymnoblastic Hydroids, Ray Society, 1871. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 19 will answer the purpose in this paper, and it is unnecessary to discuss it further. The shore and shallow water forms have been carefully investi- gated in only a few localities on the West Coast, and for that reason the number of representatives of the Gymnoblastea re- ported, is not very large, but those obtained show sufficient va- riety to have several families represented. CLAVID A Genus CLAVA Trophosome.—Hydrocaulus rudimental; hydrorhiza of creep- ing tubes; both invested with perisare. Hydranths club-shaped. Gonosome.—Sporosacs on the body of the hydranth, prox- imal to the tentacles. CLAVA LEPTOSTYLA Agassiz Clava leptostyla AGAssiz, Cont. Nat. Hist. U. S., 1862, p. 218. Clava leptostyla ToRREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 30. Distribution—San Francisco Bay, Cal. (Torrey). TURRID 45 Genus CRYPTA new genus Trophosome.—Hydrorhiza of small fibres or almost entirely degenerated. Hydrocaulus not strongly developed. The per- isare which envelopes the hydrocaulus also unites one with the others, this connection being in the nature of a very thin en- erustation. Hydranths claviform. Gonosome.—Gonophores producing free meduse. CRYPTA HUNTSMANTI new species Pl. I, Figs. 1-5 Trophosome.—Hydrocaulus tubular, up to 8 mm. in height in adult forms. Perisare so thin as to be a mere pellicle. That which forms the basal expansion is also very thin and trans- parent. The hydrorhiza consists, in the young colony, of a net- work of fine fibrils, but these appear to degenerate in the older forms, so that when a single animal is separated from the colony it pulls out like a fungus with a portion of the mycelium at- tached. The hydranth appears much darker than the hydro- caulus. It is usually club-shaped but seems to have much mo- bility, so that its appearance differs much at different times. In some eases the tentacles, which appear to be made up of a a 20 C. McLEAN FRASER series of joints, seem to be arranged in fairly definite rows, but more commonly there seems to be no regularity in their arrange- ment; they are simply scattered over the hydranth surface. In the young forms they may be very few in number but as de- velopment proceeds the number is increased, until as many as 24 may be present. Gonosome.—Gonophores, from 1 to 3, are developed a short distance below the tentacles. From each of these a single medusa with 4 marginal tentacles is developed. Distribution.—Departure Bay. I am indebted to Dr. A. G. Huntsman for the pleasure of studying this rather unique species. It is found in the branchial basket of several species of simple Ascidians, dredged from 5 to 20 fathoms and if it had not been that Dr. Huntsman was dis- secting one of these Ascidians while I was studying hydroids near him, I should never have come across the species. After he handed over the first specimens I was able to procure a good supply, as the Ascidians were common and many of them were hydroid hosts. Though it is a common occurrence to find hydroids growing on the surface of ascidians, ordinarily one would scarce think of looking for specimens inside. It is evident that such a position is not accidental when the majority of the ascidians possess at least a few hydranths. The hydroids must thrive well in such a habitation, as presumably they get their food from the water current in the branchial basket without re- ceiving any detrimental effect from their position. In two or three cases, instead of these hydroids, I found free-swimming copepods, females with egg-sacs turgid with eggs. It may be that these copepods were in the same locality for the purpose of using the hydroids as food, but there was no direct evidence that such was the case. It seemed a very easy matter to find all the developmental stages of the hydroid until the period was reached for the forma- tion of the gonophores but there were not many specimens with these present. As I saw no free meduse I can only surmise that the radial canals are as those in other genera of the Family. There is no doubt as to the four marginal tentacles as in some cases these were plainly visible. In its generic characters there are rather distinct differences from other genera of the Family, yet the resemblances seem sufficient to retain the genus in the Family Turride. WEST COAST HYDROIDS A | CORYNIDZ Genus CORYNE Trophosome.—Hydrocaulus simple or branching. Hydrorhiza of creeping filiform tubes. Both invested with perisare. Hydranths club-shaped with scattered capitate tentacles. Gonosome.—Sporosacs developed from the body of the hy- dranth among, or just proximal to, the tentacles. CORYNE BRACHIATA Nutting Coryne brachiata NuTTING, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 165. Coryne brachiata Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 8. Distribution.—Yakutat Bay, Alaska (Nutting). SYNCORYNID Genus SYNCORYNE Trophosome.—Hydrocaulus branched or unbranched; hydro- rhiza of filiform tubes; both invested with perisare. Hydranths club-shaped with scattered capitate tentacles. Gonosome.—Gonophores bearing free medusex, arising from the body of the hydranth. Meduse with four marginal tentacles which are bulbous and ocellate at the base. SYNCORYNE EXIMIA (Allman) Coryne eximia ALLMAN, Ann. and Mag. N. H., 3rd. Ser. 4, 1859, p. 141. Syncoryne eximia NutTTING, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 166. Syncoryne eximia TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacifie Coast, 1902, p. 31. Distribution—Juneau, Alaska (Nutting) ; Pacific Grove, Cal. (Torrey). SYNCORYNE MIRABILIS (Agassiz) Coryne mirabilis AGAssiz, Cont. Nat. Hist. U. S. IV, 1862, p. 185. Coryne rosaria A. AGAssiz, Ill. Cat. 1865, p. 176. Syncoryne rosaria CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 250. Syncoryne rosaria FEWKES, New Invert. from Cal. Coast, 1889, p. 4. Syncoryne mirabilis NuTTING, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Coryne mirabilis CALKINS, Some Hydroids from Puget Sound, 1899, p. 336. Syncoryne mirabilis HaRTLAUB, Hydroiden aus dem Stillen Ocean, 1901, p. 356. Syncoryne mirabilis TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 31. Distribution—San Francisco, Gulf of Georgia (A. Agassiz) ; Santa Barbara (Fewkes); Puget Sound (Calkins); Bare Island (Hartlaub); San Francisco Bay (Torrey); San Juan Archipelago. 99 C. McLEAN FRASER BIMERIDA4# ATRACTYLOIDES FORMOSA Fewkes Atractyloides formosa FEWKES, New Invert. from Cal. Coast, 1889, p. 5. This species, when it was described by Fewkes, was given a new generic as well as a new specific name. As he did not give the generic characters separately, I have referred to it among the species only. Genus BIMERIA Trophosome.—Colony branched, invested with a conspicuous. perisare. Hydranth fusiform, hypostome conical. Perisare cov- ering the base of the tentacles. Gonosome.—Sporosaes, covered with perisare, arising from the stem or branches. BIMERIA FRANCISCANA Torrey Bimeria franciscana TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 28- Distribution—San Francisco Bay (Torrey). BIMERIA GRACILIS Clark Bimeria gracilis CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 252. Bimeria gracilis Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 8. Distribution.—San Diego (Clark). BIMERIA ROBUSTA Torrey Bimeria robusta Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 29. Distribution.San Pedro, Cal. (Torrey); San Juan Archi- pelago. Some fragments in the San Juan material answer to the de- scription given by Dr. Torrey, but as in his material, there were no gonosomes present. The perisare extended well up on the base of the tentacles in all cases. Genus GARVEIA Trophosome.—Colony branched. Perisare conspicuous. Hy- dranths fusiform. Gonosome.—Sporosacs borne on distinct branchlets, more or less invested with perisare, which regularly is confined to the branchlets only. GARVEIA ANNULATA Nutting Garveia annulata NutTtinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 166.. Bimeria annulata Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacifie Coast, 1902, p. 28. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 23 Distribution —Yakutat and Sitka, Alaska (Nutting); Santa Catalina Island, San Francisco, Cal. (Torrey); Port Renfrew, Ucluelet. In this case, as in many other cases later in the work, I have followed the principle that because two species or two genera intergrade, it does not follow that the two should be combined under one name. Dr. Torrey has often taken the opposite view, and has here combined Garveia and Bimeria, both genera insti- tuted by Wright and used by most authors since that time, under the name Bimeria. Even if some of the sporosacs of this species are entirely covered with chitin, it does not necessarily follow, that hence the whole genus Garveia should be combined with the genus Bimeria. ?GARVEIA FORMOSA (Fewkes) Perigonimus formosus FEWKES, New Invert. of Cal. Coast, 1889, p. 6. Bimeria formosa Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 8. Distribution—Santa Cruz, Cal. (Fewkes). Fewkes’ description of this is not sufficiently clear to decide very definitely as to the genus to which it belongs. It is evidently not a Perigonimus. Torrey in his list has placed it with Bimeria, but he includes Garveia with Bimeria in any ease. It seems to me that it is probably a Garveia, and I have so placed it. GARVEIA NUTANS Wright Garveia nutans WRIGHT, Edin. New Phil. Jour., 1859, p. 109. Garveia nutans NuTTING, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 166. Distribution—Berg Inlet, Glacier Bay, Alaska (Nutting). BOUGAINVILLIDA Genus BOUGAINVILLIA Trophosome.—Colony branching. Hydranths fusiform, hy- postome conical. Gonosome.—Gonophores arising from the stem or branches, producing free meduse. Meduse when liberated bell-shaped with four radial canals and eight tentacles, each with an ocellus at the base. BOUGAINVILLIA GLORIETTA Torrey Bougainvillia glorietta Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 7. Distribution.—San Diego, Cal. (Torrey). 24 C. McLEAN FRASER BOUGAINVILLIA MERTENSI Agassiz Bougainvillia mertensii AGASsIz, Cont. Nat. Hist. U. S., IV, 1862, p. 344. Bougainvillia mertensti A. AGAssIz, N. A, Acalephe, 1865, p. 152. Bougainvillia mertensi TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 1. Distribution.—Bering Sea, Gulf of Georgia, San Francisco (A. Agassiz) ; Oakland (Torrey). Genus PERIGONIMUS Trophosome.—Colony branched or unbranched. Hydranths fusiform with conical proboscis. Gonosome.—Gonophores arising from the hydrorhiza, bearing medusze that when liberated have 2 to 4 marginal tentacles but no ocelli. PERIGONIMUS REPENS (Wright) Eudendrium pusillum WRiGHT, Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., 1857, p. 231. Atractylis repens WRIGHT, Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., 1858, p. 450. Perigonimus repens ALLMAN, Ann. and Mag. N. H., 3rd Ser. 13, 1864, p. 365. Perigonimus repens CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 339. Perigonimus repens TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacifie Coast, 1902, p. 29. Distribution——Townshend Harbor (Calkins) ; Sausalito, Cal. (Torrey) ; Departure Bay. EUDENDRIDA& Genus EUDENDRIUM Trophosome.—Colony branching. Hydranths with hypostomes somewhat trumpet-shaped. Gonosome.—Sporosacs developed from the hydranth just be- low the tentacles. EUDENDRIUM CALIFORNICUM Torrey Eudendrium californicum Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 32. ‘ Distribution.—San Francisco Bay, Tomales Bay, Pacific Grove, Cal. (Torrey) ; Santa Cruz, Monterey Bay, Cal. (Clark) ; Port Renfrew, Ucluelet. EUDENDRIUM CAPILLARE Alder Eudendrium capillare ALDER, Trans. Tyne. F. C. III, 1857, p. 105. Eudendrium capillare HincKs, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 84. Distribution—San Juan Archipelago. There were only two or three specimens of this Eudendrium, WEST COAST HYDROIDS 25 but these had gonophores present that are similar to those of Eudendrium capillare as is the trophosome as well. Though the species has not hitherto been reported from this coast, I have no doubt that the specimens belong to the species. EUDENDRIUM RAMEUM (Pallas) Tubularia ramea PALLAS, Elench. Zooph., 1766, p. 83. Eudendrium rameum TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 33. Eudendrium rameum Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 8. Distribution—San Pedro, Cal. (Torrey). EUDENDRIUM RAMOSUM (Linneus) Tubularia ramosa LINNZUS, Systema Nature, 1767, p. 1302. Eudendrium ramosum TorRREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 34. Eudendrium ramosum Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 8. Distribution.—Pacific Grove, San Diego, Cal. (Torrey). EUDENDRIUM VAGINATUM Allman Eudendrium vaginatum ALLMAN, Ann. and Mag. N. H., 3rd Ser. 11, 1863, p. 10. Eudendrium pygmeum CuaRkK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 232. Eudendrium vaginatum NutTtTiInGc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p: 167. Distribution—Akutan Pass, Alaska (Clark); Sitka Harbor and Yakutat, Alaska (Nutting). HYDRACTINIDZ Genus HYDRKACTINIA Trophosome.—Hydranths club-shaped, developed from a basal ccenosare. Proboscis conical. Gonosome.—Sporosacs developed on special zooids with few or no tentacles, often provided with thread-cells. HYDRACTINIA AGGREGATA new species Pl. II, Figs. 1-4 Trophosome.—The nutritive zooid of this species appears much stouter near the distal end than Hydractinia polyclina. Part of this stoutness may be due to contraction in the preserved speci- men, but in comparing with preserved specimens of H. polyclina the difference is still evident. As in other species, the number of tentacles increases during development, the number in the adult being 20-24. Gonosome.—The generative zooids develop sporosacs while still very young. In the early stages there may be as many as 10 or 26 C. McLEAN FRASER 12 tentacles, but these tend to degenerate. Though I found no specimen entirely without them, the number in some cases was reduced to 3 or 4. A mouth appears to be present in all cases. The female sporosaes become of large size and remain quite glob- ular. Each contains a large number of ova. The male sporosacs are not nearly so large as the female and are oval in shape. In some cases at least nematocysts are present, but instead of being definitely grouped, they are somewhat irregularly scattered over the surface both distal and proximal to the tentacles. I did not find any of these on the young forms with the numerous tentacles, and it may be that they are not developed until the tentacles are to some extent degenerated. Distribution.—Departure Bay, San Juan Archipelago. The generative and nutritive zooids are not scattered promis- ecuously. Each kind has its own definite locality with no inter- mixing except at or near the limit where the areas meet. All specimens were found on gastropod shells, inhabited by hermit. erabs. The nutritive zooids are restricted to an area extending some distance from the inner border of the lip, while the gener- ative zooids occupy the remainder of the surface of the shell, and hence are many times as numerous as the nutritive zooids. The conical spines arising from the common basal expansion have a very extensive development. They may appear with the regular conical shape, common to Hydractinia polyclina, they may retain their diameter throughout to form columns or they may appear as a ridge continuous for some distance. These ridges may even join to form a network over a large portion of the surface of the shell. The ridges instead of being simply jagged, are in the ma- jority of cases provided with small sharp-pointed spines. When a network of ridges is formed, it provides a very efficient protec- tion for the developing zooids that are packed so closely together that one can scarcely see through to the ccenosare at any point. This is especially noticeable when the sporosacs are developing on the generative zooids. Though I have examined a large amount of material, I have seen no indication of dactylozooids. It may be possible that as Bergh says in regard to H. carica® that none are present in any case. This might account for the strong development of the protective spines. 3 Goplepolyper fra Kara Havet, 1887, p. 331. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 27 HYDRACTINIA CALIFORNICA Torrey Hydractinia californica Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 9. Distribution—San Diego, Cal. (Torrey). HYDRACTINIA MILLERI Torrey Hydractinia milleri Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 34. Distribution—San Francisco, Tomales Bay, Cal. (Torrey) ; Port Renfrew. CORY MORPHID_® Genus CORYMORPHA _Trophosome.——Hydranths solitary, flask-shaped. Proximal tentacles long, in one whorl, distal shorter, in several whorls. Hypostome conical. Perisare very thin. Gonosome.—Gonophores borne on body of hydranth, between proximal and distal tentacles. Meduse deep bell-shaped with one or more tentacles which may be rudimentary. CORYMORPHA CARNEA (Clark) Rhizonema carnea CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 233. Corymorpha carnea TorRREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 9. Distribution Norton Sound, Alaska (Clark). CORYMORPHA PALMA Torrey Corymorpha palma Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacifie Coast, 1902, p. 37. Corymorpha palma Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 9. Distribution—San Pedro, San Diego, Cal. (Torrey). TUBULARIDZX Genus TUBULARIA Trophosome.—lLarge hydranths usually unbranched. Prox- imal set of tentacles longer than distal set. Proboscis conical. Gonosome.—Gonophores borne in clusters from the hydranths, distal to the proximal tentacles. These produce actinule. TUBULARIA BOREALIS Clark Tubularia borealis CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 231. Tubularia borealis Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 9. Distribution —Hagmeister Island, Alaska (Clark). TUBULARIA CROCEA (Agassiz) Parypha crocea AGAssiz, Cont. Nat. Hist. U. S., IV, 1862, p. 249. Parypha crocea A. AGAssiz, Il. Cat., 1865, p. 195. 28 C. McLEAN FRASER Parypha macrocephala A. Acassiz, Ill. Cat., 1865, p. 195. Tubularia elegans CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 253. Tubularia crocea TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 43. Tubularia crocea TORREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 10. Distribution—San Francisco (A. Agassiz); San Francisco Bay, San Pedro, San Diego, Cal. (Torrey) ; Port Simpson, B. C. I believe that Dr. Torrey is correct in considering Tubularia elegans Clark as synonymous with 7’. crocea. I examined several specimens of 7. crocea from the Atlantic Coast. In many in- stances the tentacles on the gonophore are so reduced as to be not much more than nodules. If Clark’s specimen was in poor con- dition the reduction would be all the more pronounced. The number of tentacles in the distal row is a usual number and in the proximal row the number is not so much too great that ‘fabout’’ would not cover the discrepancy. TUBULARIA INDIVISA Linneus Tubularia indivisa LINNZUS, Systema Nature, 1767, p. 1301. Tubularia indivisa CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 232. Distribution.—St. Michael’s, Norton Sound, Alaska (Clark). TUBULARIA LARYNX Ellis & Solander — Tubularia larynx EvLis & SOLANDER, Nat. Hist. Zooph., 1786, p. 31. Tubularia larynx CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 335. Tubularia larynx Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 9. Distribution.—Port Townshend (Calkins). TUBULARIA HARRIMANI Nutting Tubularia harrimani Nurrine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 168, Distribution.—Orea, Prince William Sound, Alaska (Nutting) ; Port Renfrew. TUBULARIA MARINA Torrey Tubularia marina TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 46. Distribution—tTrinidad, San Francisco, Pacific Grove, Cal. (Torrey). TUBULARIA TUBULAROIDES (A. Agassiz) Thamnocnidia tubularoides A, AGAssiz, Il]. Cat. 1865, p. 196. Tubularia tubularoides TorrEy, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 9. Distribution.—San Francisco (A. Agassiz). CALYPTOBLASTEHA In taking up the Calyptoblastea I shall not undertake any def- inite discussion, except a limited one in the cases of the Sertu- WEST COAST HYDROIDS 29 laride and Plumularidex, chiefly because there has been no mono- graphic work of recent date except for these families, and in fact as far as American forms are concerned, there has never been such a work. Since this is the case there has been much diver- sity in classification, though the majority of authors have fol- lowed more or less closely, the classification used by Hincks in his classic work on hydroids*. This I shall do also, though in domg so, I must of necessity differ with some authors in some respects, since there is this diversity. In the Sertularide and Plumularide, as later stated, I have used as a basis Prof. Nutting’s classification as given in his Mono- graph of American Hydroids, Volumes I and II. We must look forward to the time when the third volume, at which he is now working, will help to clear up some of the difficulties in the Campanularian species, as well. The constant features of the Calyptoblastea are these: Hydroids in which the hydranths are protected by hydro- thecz and the gonophores by gonothece. CAMPANULARIDA Trophosome.—Hydrothece campanulate, pedicellate, non-oper- culate. A septum, which partly shuts off the hydrothecal cavity from the cavity of the stem, is present in each. Hydranth with a long trumpet-shaped proboscis, and a single row of filiform tentacles. Gonosome.—Gonophores producing planule or free meduse. In this family the trophosome affords no features of much taxonomic value, thus the gonosome is the main basis for classi- fication into genera. Specific differences appear in both tropho- some and gonosome. Genus CAMPANULARIA Trophosome.—Colony unbranched or regularly branched ; stem simple or fascicled; hydrotheca campanulate. Gonosome.—Gonophores containing fixed sporosacs from which planul are produced. CAMPANULARIA DENTICULATA Clark Campanularia denticulata CLarK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 213. Campanularia denticulata Nuttinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, pe Lak 4 British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868. 30 C. McLEAN FRASER Campanularia denticulata Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacifie Coast, 1902, p. ol. Distribution.—Port Etches, Alaska (Clark); Orca, Alaska (Nutting) ; San Pedro, Cal. (Torrey) ; Departure Bay, San Juan Archipelago. This species bears much resemblance to the unbranched form of Clytia edwardsi (Nutting). The hydrotheca of C. edwardsi is, in general larger than that of C. denticulata, but judging from Clark’s figures there is much variation in the latter, as there is in the former. Clark found no gonosome, nor did Nutting, who later identified this species. Laura R. Thornely has reported a species from the Red Sea’, on specimens of which she found gonosomes. This she takes to be the same as C. denticulata Clark, basing her opinion on Torrey’s description of this species*®, but later Torrey observed that what he took to be C. denticulata, was a fragment of a large much-fascicled form which he name Clytia universitatis’, a form very distinct from C. denticulata. If C. denticulata is characteristically an unbranched form, the Red Sea specimens cannot belong to that species. If it is synonymous with Clytia edwardsi, they might do so. There is resemblance in the mode of branching and to a certain extent in the shape of the hydrotheea, but the gonosome is different to that which I have found in C. edwardsi. As I have not sufficient proof to state def- initely that the two species Campanularia denticulata and Clytia edwardsi are synonymous, I retain both of them in this work. CAMPANULARIA EXIGUA (Sars) Laomedea exigua Sars, Middelhavet’s Littoral Fauna, 1857, p. 50. Campanularia exigua HINcKS, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 172. Campanularia exigua CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 353. Distribution.—Pt. Townshend (Calkins) ; Ucluelet. CAMPANULARIA FUSIFORMIS Clark Campanularia fusiformis CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 254. Campanularia fusiformis Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacifie Coast, 1904, p. 52. 5 Reports of Marine Biol, of the Sudanese Red Sea, Jour. Linn. Soe., 1908, p. 82. 6 Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 51. 7 Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 19. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 31 Distribution —Vancouver Island (Clark) ; Point Reyes Penin- sula and Dillon’s, Cal. (Torrey). CAMPANULARIA GRANLANDICA Levinsen Campanularia granlandica LEVINSEN, Meduser, Ctenopher og Hydroider fra Grenland’s Vestkyst, 1893, p. 26. Campanularia lineata NuttTinc, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 744. Campanularia lineata Nuttine, Hydroids from the Harriman Ex., 1901, 1 Ore Ry Distribution—Puget Sound (Nutting); Berg Inlet, Glacier Bay, Alaska (Nutting) ; Port Renfrew. I found but one specimen of this species, growing on Lafea gracillima. CAMPANULARIA HESPERIA Torrey Campanularia hesperia TorREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 12. Distribution.—La Jolla, Cal. (Torrey). CAMPANULARIA HINCKSI Alder Campanularia hincksii ALDER, Trans. Tynes. Field Club, 1857, p. 37. Campanularia hincksii Hincks, British Hydroid Zoophtyes, 1868, p. 162. Campanularia hincksi Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 53. Campanularia hincksi TorrEy, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 13. Distribution —San Diego, Cal. (Torrey). CAMPANULARIA INTEGRA MacGillivray Campanularia integra MAcCGILLIVRAY, Ann, and Mag., 2nd Ser. 9, 1842, p. 465. Campanularia integra CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 215. Campanularia integra CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1599, p. 352. Distribution —Lituya Bay and Shumagin Islands, Alaska (Clark) ; Pt. Wilson, Pt. Townshend and Bremerton, Wash. (Calkins) ; Bering Sea (Jaderholm) ; San Juan Archipelago. CAMPANULARIA KINCAIDI Nutting Campanularia kincaidi Nutrinc, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 743. Distribution—Puget Sound (Nutting) ; Dodd’s Narrows. The single specimen of this species that has come under my notice, was making use of a rather unusual support. It was at- tached to the side of a hydrotheca of Lovenella producta. 39 C. McLEAN FRASER CAMPANULARIA OCCIDENTALIS Fewkes Campanularia occidentalis FEwKES, New Invert. from the Coast of Cal., 1899, p. 4. Distribution—Santa Barbara, Cal. (Fewkes). The description of this species is so very meagre, that no one unless the author himself, can tell if it has been described under some other name since he found it. I simply put it in the list for the sake of completeness. CAMPANULARIA PACIFICA (A. Agassiz) Laomedea pacifica A, AGAssiz, Ill. Cat. Mus. Comp. Zool., IIT, 1865, p. 94. Campanularia pacifica Torrey, Hydroida from the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 53. Distribution—Gulf of Georgia and San Francisco (A. Agas- siz) ; San Francisco Bay (Torrey) ; San Juan Archipelago. This species was found quite plentifully in the material from San Juan Archipelago. The trophosome bears much resemblance to that of Obelia gelatinosa (Pallas), but the hydrothece are rel- atively much longer than those of O. gelatinosa.. I did not find any gonosomes but Torrey, who has found these, shows conclu- sively that the species does not belong to the genus Obelia. CAMPANULARIA RARIDENTATA Alder Campanularia raridentata AtpER, Ann. and Mag. 3rd Ser. 9, 1862, p. 315. Campanularia raridentata HiNcKs, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, DaelnGe Distribution—Departure Bay, Queen Charlotte Islands. This species, of which several colonies were found appears to be quite distinct from Thaumantias inconspicua Forbes. Further reference is made to it in connection with that species. CAMPANULARIA REGIA Nutting Cmpanularia regia Nutrinc, Hydroids from the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 172. Distribution.—Orea, Prince William Sound, Alaska (Nutting). CAMPANULARIA RIGIDA (A. Agassiz) Laomedea rigida A, Acassiz, Ill. Cat. Mus. Comp. Zool., II, 1865, p, 93. Laomedea rigida CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacifie Coast, 1876, p. 251. Campanularia rigida TorrEY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 11. Distribution.—San Francisco (A. Agassiz). A. Agassiz reported this species but his description contains so little detail, that it might apply to several forms. As he gives no WEST COAST HYDROIDS 33 figures there is no means of deciding even to what genus it be- longs. Torrey has placed it with Campanularia and that seems to be the most probable position for it. As the San Francisco region has been explored to some extent since, this may corre- spond to some of the later species. CAMPANULARIA RITTERI Nutting Campanularia ritteri NuTTING, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 171. Distribution — Juneau, Alaska (Nutting). CAMPANULARIA SPECIOSA Clark Campanularia speciosa CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 214. Campanularia speciosa NUTTING, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. bya Distribution—Shumagin Islands, Alaska (Clark) ; Orca, Alas- ka (Nutting) ; Friday Harbor, San Juan Island. I found but one specimen of this species, but it was in excellent condition. It was growing on a stem of Abietinaria amphora. CAMPANULARIA URCEOLATA Clark Campanularia urceolata CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 215. Campanularia cylindrica CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p-. 254. Campanularia turgida CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 213. Campanularia urceolata NutTtTInGc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 172. € Campanularia reduplicata Nuttinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p- 172. Campanularia turgida HARTLAUB, Hydroiden aus dem Stillen Ocean, 1901, p- 350. - Campanularia urceolata ToRREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 54. Distribution—Port Etches, Lituya Bay, Alaska (Clark) ; San- ta Cruz, Cal. (Clark) ; Yakutat (Nutting); Bare Island (Hart- laub); San Francisco, Tomales Bay, Pacific Grove, Cal. (Tor- rey); Queen Charlotte Islands, Dodd’s Narrows, San Juan Archipelago. This rather ubiquitous form has been mentioned under many specific names. In examining material where it appears abund- antly one can readily conclude that one species is represented. In any case Dr. Torrey’s many figures are quite convincing. CAMPANULARIA VERTICILLATA (Linneus) Sertularia verticillata LINNzZUs, Systema Nature, 1758, p. 811. Campanularia circula CLARK, Alaskan. Hydroids, 1876, p. 213. 3 34 ; C. McLEAN FRASER Campanularia verticillata Nutrinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, Blab P Campanularia fascia TorrREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 52. Distribution.—Port Eteches, Alaska (Clark); Puget Sound (Nutting) ; Kadiak, Alaska (Nutting); San Diego (Torrey) ; Bering Strait and Bering Island (Jaiderholm) ; Queen Charlotte Islands, Dodd’s Narrows, San Juan Archipelago. CAMPANULARIA VOLUBILIS (Linneus) Sertularia volubilis LINNZUS, Systema Nature, 1767, p. 1311. Campanularia volubilis HarTLAUB, Hydroiden aus dem Stillen Ocean, 1901, p. 350. Campanularia volubilis TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 54. Campanularia volubilis TorREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 13. Distribution.—Bare Island (Hartlaub) ; San Pedro, Tomales Bay, San Diego, Cal. (Torrey); Banks Island, Ucluelet, San Juan Archipelago. Genus CLYTIA Trophosome.—Stems unbranched or irregularly branched; hydrothece of the usual campanulate form. Gonosome.—Reproduction with free medusex, these with four tentacles and four radial canals at time of liberation. CLYTIA ATTENUATA (Calkins) Campanularia attenuata CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p- 350. Distribution.—Port Townshend (Calkins); San Juan Archi- pelago. CLYTIA BAKERI Torrey Clytia bakeri TorREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 16. Distribution.—Pacifiec Beach, San Diego, Cal. (Torrey). CLYTIA EDWARDSI (Nutting) Pl. III, Figs. 1-2. Campanularia gracilis CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 350. Campanularia edwardsi NutTtTinc, Hydroids of Wood’s Hole, 1901, p. 346. Campanulari edwardsi Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 11. Distribution.—Port Townshend (Calkins); San Diego (Tor- rey) ; San Juan Archipelago, Departure Bay. . This species, found very abundantly at Departure Bay, shows a great variation in mode of growth. While commonly it is WEST COAST HYDROIDS 35 found unbranched or but slightly branched, in some eases the branching is quite extensive though irregular, and the whole col- ony may reach the height of an inch. In the former case the - stolon is spread widely over the surface of Fucus and is much anastomosed. When the stem is unbranched the pedicels vary in length, are generally annulated for some distance at the base and below the ealyx, or they may be annulated throughout the great- er part of their length. When forms appear with only one branch, this branch is usually much longer than the remainder of the main stem, is annulated similarly and has a distinct flex- ure near its origin, so that it passes out often closely applied to the main stem as shown in Nutting’s figure... The hydrothece vary much in size but in all cases the typical shape is fairly well retained. Torrey refers to this difference in size® and gives meas- urements to verify. The simple forms resemble Clytia johnstont Alder, but the teeth in the hydrothece are relatively longer and much more slender than in that species. The resemblance is carried farther than the trophosome as the gonosomes are quite similar. In both they have their origin either from the stolon or from the pedicel and they are strongly annulated. In the branched forms the calyces are usually much larger, but apart from this each branch corresponds to a simple form. The gonangia appear in the axils, or they may appear anywhere along the stem. They vary much in size and the number of their rings, which may be as few as five or as many as twelve. These branched forms correspond to those found by Torrey and Nutting but as they found no gono- some the species was supposed to belong to the genus Campanu- laria. Apparently this is the form which Calkins has described as Campanularia gracilis, supposing it to be the same as Gonothyrea gracilis Allman. The trophosomes of the two are much alike, but the extra-capsular gonosome of Gonothyrea gracilis is very dif- ferent from that figured by him,?° this evidently being a Clytia. CLYTIA HENDERSONTIT Torrey Clytia hendersoni Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 16. 8 Hydroids of the Wood’s Hole Region, 1901, p. 346. 9 Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 11. 10 Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 350, Pl. 2, Fig. 10. 36 C. McLEAN FRASER Distribution —San Diego, Cal. (Torrey). CLYTIA JOHNSTONI (Alder) Campanularia johnstoni ALDER, Trans. Tynes. F. C., 1857, p. 36. Clytia johnstoni CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 212. Campanularia johnston CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 348. Clytia bicophora Torrry, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 1. Distribution—Port Etches, Alaska (Clark); Puget Sound (Calkins) ; Oakland Creek, Cal. (Torrey). Both Clark and Calkins, in reporting this species, do so with doubt as to their identification. Clark’s figures would serve very well for one of the varieties of Campanularia urceolata, and Calkins’ are not unlike the unbranched forms of Clytia edwardst. Torrey’s reference to it is very meagre, as it occurs only in a foot-note. CLYTIA UNIVERSITATIS Torrey Campanularia denticulata TorrEy, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, pe ol: Clytia wniversitatis TORREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 19. Distribution—San Diego, San Pedro, Cal. (Torrey). Genus HUCOPELLA Trophosome.—Stem unbranched arising, from an anastomosing stolon; hydrothece with very thick walls and smooth margins. Gonosome.—Gonophores produce large medusoid structures, never more than two, one large and one very small in a gonangi- um at the same time. They are of an elongated dome shape. They differ from ordinary meduse in not being provided with mouth or digestive cavity. EUCOPELLA CALICULATA (Hincks) Campanularia caliculata HincKxs, Ann. and Mag. N. H., 3rd Ser. XI, 1863,. p. 178. Campanularia caliculata CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. dol. Clytia caliculata Nutrine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 170. Distribution —Pt. Wilson, Pt. Townshend, Bremerton (Calk- ins) ; Yakutat, Alaska (Nutting) ; San Juan Archipelago. Specimens of this species show very well the typical Eucopella gonosome, but as these gonosomes have been figured by Calkins. to bring out the features in an excellent manner, it is not neces- sary to refer to them further. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 37 EUCOPELLA COMPRESSA (Clark) Campanularia compressa CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 214. Clytia compressa NuTTING, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 170. Clytia compressa TORREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 58. Clytia compressa ToRREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 17. Distribution —Shumagin Islands, Alaska (Clark) ; Orea, Alas- ka (Nutting) ; San Diego, San Pedro, Cal. (Torrey). EUCOPELLA EVERTA (Clark) Campanularia everta CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 253. Campanularia everta TorrEY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 51. Campanularia everta Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 12. Distribution—San Diego, Cal., Vancouver Island (Clark) ; Catalina Island, San Diego, Pacific Grove, Cal. (Torrey) ; Port Renfrew, Departure Bay. Genus GONOTHYREA Trophosome.—Stem branched; hydrothece campanulate with thin walls. Gonosome.—Reproduction by fixed medusiform sporosacs fur- nished with tentacles, that at maturity become extra-capsular, re- maining attached until their contents are discharged. GONOTHYR#A CLARKI (Marktanner-Turneretscher) Gonothyrea hyalina CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 215. Laomedea (Gonothyraea) clarkii MARKTANNER-TURNERETSCHER, Hydroiden von Ostspitzbergen, 1895, p. 408. Gonothyrea hyalina HarTLAuB, Hydroiden aus dem Stillen Ocean, 1901, p. 350. Gonothyraa clarki TorrREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 55. Distribution—Semidi Islands to Nunivak Island (Clark) ; Bare Island (Hartlaub); Oakland, Cal. (Torrey) ; Departure Bay, San Juan Archipelago. Marktanner-Turneretscher in 1895, believing that Gonothyrea hyalina Clark was not the same as G. hyalina Hincks, renamed it after Clark. Torrey in 1902, on examining specimens of appar- ently the same species, without having seen Marktanner’s paper, came to similar conclusions, and also renamed it after Clark, con- sidering he was giving it a new name. GONOTHYRAA INORNATA Nutting Gonothyrea inornata NuTtTinG, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 175. Distribution —Y akutat, Alaska (Nutting). 38 _ C. McLEAN FRASER Genus OBELIA Trophosome.—Stem branched, simple or fascicled; hydro- thece with thin walls. Gonosome.—Reproduction by means of free meduse, that when liberated, possess more than eight marginal tentacles but no mouth tentacles. Eight interradial lithocysts are present. OBELIA BOREALIS Nutting Obelia borealis NuttTiInG, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 174. Distribution.—Y akutat, Alaska (Nutting) ; Ucluelet, San Juan Archipelago. OBELIA COMMISSURALIS McCready Obelia commissuralis McCreaby, Gymno. Charleston Har., 1858, p. 95. Obelia commissuralis TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 56. Distribution.—San Francisco Bay (Torrey). OBELIA CORONA Torrey Obelia corona TorRrEY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 14. Distribution.—San Diego (Torrey) ; San Juan Archipelago. OBELIA DICHOTOMA (Linneus) Sertularia dichotoma LINN&US, Systema Nature, 1756, p. 812. Obelia dichotoma CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Obelia dichotoma Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 173. Obelia dichotoma Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 57. Obelia dichotoma Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 15. Distribution.—Bremerton (Calkins) ; Sitka, Berg Inlet, Orea, Alaska (Nutting); San Pedro to Coronado Islands, San Diego, Cal. (Torrey) ; Departure Bay, San Juan Archipelago. OBELIA DUBIA Nutting Pl. II, Figs. 3-4 Obelia dubia Nuttinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 174, Distribution —Orea, Alaska (Nutting); Departure Bay, Dodd’s Narrows, Ucluelet, San Juan Archipelago. The gonosome of this species has not, hitherto, been described. In the majority of specimens examined there were no gonosomes present, but where they were present, there was one in the axil of each of the lower pedicels or branches. The pedicels which supported them are annulated throughout, varying in length but never very long. The gonangium is pear-shaped and is provided WEST COAST HYDROIDS 39 with from one to five rings. The rim of the opening is raised on a distinct collar, with diameter very much less than that of the part of the gonangium that supports it. OBELIA FRAGILIS Calkins Obelia fragilis CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 355, Distribution—Port Townshend (Calkins). OBELIA GELATINOSA (Pallas) Sertularia gelatinosa PALLAS, Elenchus Zoophytorum, 1766, p. 116. Obelia gelatinosa HinckKs, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 151. Obelia gelatinosa CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 357. Distribution.—Discovery Bay, Wash. (Calkins). OBELIA GENICULATA (Linneus) Sertularia geniculata LINNZUS, Systema Nature, 1767, p. 1312. Obelia geniculata TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 58. Obelia geniculata Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 15. Distribution—San Francisco, Catalina Island, Coronado Is- land (Torrey). OBELIA GRACILIS Calkins Obelia gracilis CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 353. Distribution—sSecow Bay, Port Townshend, Wash. (Calkins) ; San Juan Archipelago. OBELIA GRIFFINI Calkins Obelia grifini CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 357. Distribution —Puget Sound (Calkins) ; Departure Bay. OBELIA LONGISSIMA (Pallas) Sertularia longissima PAaLLas, Elenchus Zoophytorum, 1766, p. 119. Obelia longissima CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 212. Distribution—wUnalaska (Clark); Banks Island, Departure Bay, Dodd’s Narrows, San Juan Archipelago. OBELIA PLICATA Hincks Obelia plicata H1ncks, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 159. Obelia plicata Nuttine, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p- 741. Obelia plicata CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 357. Obelia plicata Nuttinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 173. Distribution—Puget Sound (Nutting); Puget Sound (Calk- ins) ; Orea, Alaska (Nutting) ; Departure Bay, San Juan Archi- pelago. 40 é C. McLEAN FRASER OBELIA SURCULARIS Calkins Obelia surcularis CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 355. Distribution—Seow Bay, Port Townshend, Wash. (Calkins). Genus THAUMANTIAS Trophosome.—Stem unbranched, arising from a much branched stolon. Gonosome.—‘ Reproduction by free meduse. Umbrella hemi- spheric; manubrium 4-lipped; radiating canals 4; marginal ten- tacles numerous; sporosacs in the course of the radiating canals; lithocysts wanting.’’ (Hincks). THAUMANTIAS INCONSPICUA Forbes Thaumantias imeonspicua FoRBES, Monograph of the British Naked-eyed Meduse, 1848, p. 52. Thaumantias inconspicua WRIGHT, Quarterly Jour. Micr. Se., 1862, p. 221. Campanularia inconspicua CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 349. Distribution.—Puget Sound (Calkins) ; San Juan Archipelago. Dr. J. Strethill Wright, in experimenting with Thauwmantias inconspicua Forbes, managed-to grow some hydroids which he de- scribes" but unfortunately does not figure. A form which cor- responds perfectly to his description was found by Calkins in Puget Sound, though he named it Campanularia inconspicua. I have found specimens from the San Juan Archipelago in both Prof. Kinecaid’s and Mr. Moon’s Collections. What serves to substantiate the opinion that it is the same as that described by Wright is that it has the meduse of the regular Thawmantias type as is shown by Calkins’ figure,’? quite different from that found in other Campanularian forms. It has been considered by some investigators to be synonymous with Campanularia rari- dentata Hincks, but I have found several specimens of a species which bears an exact resemblance to Hincks’ figure’ of this species, very different indeed from Calkins’ type, as can readily be seen from the figures. CAMPANULINIDA Trophosome.—Colonies branched or unbranched; hydrothece pedicellate or sessile, always operculate, the operculum being 11 Quarterly Jour. Mier. Sc., 1862, p. 221. 12 Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, Pl. 2, Fig. 8c. 13 British Hydroid Zoophytes, Pl. XXVI, Figs. 2 and 2a. WEST COAST HYDROIDS Al formed of converging segments. Hydranths with a conical pro- boscis. Gonosome.—Gonophores producing planule or free meduse. Genus CALYCELLA Trophosome.—Stem a creeping rootstock; hydrothece tubular, borne on ringed pedicels. A distinct margin appears where the segmented operculum joins the hydrotheca proper. Gonosome.—Gonangia oval, borne on the rootstock, producing acrocysts. CALYCELLA PYGMAA Hincks PL CE Mir. 5 Lafaa pygmaa Hincks, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 205. Calycella pygmaa Hixcks, Ann. and Mag. N. H., 4th Ser. 13, 1874, p. 149. Calycella syringa CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 217. Calycella syringa CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 358. Distribution—Coal Harbor, Shumagin Islands, Alaska (Clark) ; Port Townshend (Calkins); Departure Bay, Dodd’s Narrows, San Juan Archipelago. Hincks ascribed this species to Alder, but as Alder described it only in manuscript, he can scarcely be credited with it. There seems to be much confusion in relation to this species. Hincks in his first description places it with Lafwa, but mentions the evi- dence ofan operculum. Later he figures what he considers to be the same species under the name Calycella pygmea, showing a distinct segmented operculum. Since that time some authors have found the operculate form and retained the name Calycella pygmea, while others have found non-operculate forms similar in shape which they have either called Lafwa pygmea or have substituted the generic name Hebella instituted by Allman,** though in this genus one of the characters is the presence of a septum, separating the hydrothecal cavity from the cavity of the pedicel. In colonies of Calycella pygmea one often comes across individuals in which the operculum has disappeared, so that the rim of the hydrotheca looks that of a Laf@a and it is just pos- sible that specimens supposed to be Lafewa pygmea are such as these. If the hydrothecal partition or septum has really been seen in specimens of such a form it would be a good indication that a Hebella has been found. It would be a hard matter to de- 14 Challenger Hydroids Part II, 1883, p. 29. 42 _ C. McLEAN FRASER cide if there are the three species very much alike, one in each genus, unless one had samples of the three so described. In any case there appears to be but the one on the West coast, conse- quently, the matter does not need to be settled here. Confusion arises in a very different way as well. Many authors have made no distinction between Calycella syringa and Calycella pygmea but have called every Calycella that would answer to either type, Calycella syringa. It seems to me that there are two distinct types, as shown by Hincks’ figures,?° though as in the case of many other closely allied species there may be intergradations. Of the west coast investigators, Clark and Calkins only have shown drawings to scale. These drawings indicate the smaller form, and it may be that the other cases reported are similar, though there is no means of knowing. It is quite possible, there- fore, that Calycella pygmea and not Calycella syringa, is the common species on the Pacific Coast. CALYCELLA SYRINGA (Linneus) Jed h IME doevers Xe Sertularia syringa LINN&ZUS, Systema Nature, 1867, p. 1811. Calycella syringa Hincxks, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 206. _ Calycella syringa Nuttinc, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Calycella syringa Nuvtine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 177. Calycella syringa-TorReEY, Hydroida,of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 59. Distribution.—Puget Sound (Nutting); Bare Island (Hart- laub) ; Berg Inlet, Kadiak, Alaska (Nutting) ; San Diego (Tor- rey); Queen Charlotte Islands, Banks Island, San Juan Archi- pelago. Genus CAMPANULINA Trophosome.—Colony branched or unbranched, Hydrothece oval or ovate; margin indistinct; teeth of operculum long and slender. Gonosome.—‘Gonangia producing bell-shaped meduse, with four radial canals, two to four marginal tentacles, and eight litho- cysts.’’ (Nutting). 15 Ann. and Mag. N. H., 4th Ser. 13, 1874, Pl. VII, fig. 15 and Pl. VIII, fig. 24. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 43 ? CAMPANULINA FORSKALEA Peron et Lesueur Pl. III, Figs. 11-13. Ajquorea forskalea PERON ET LESUEUR, Ann. Mus. Nat. Hist., Tome 14, 1809, p. 336. AEquorea vitrina WRIGHT, Jour. Mier. Se., Vol. III, New Series, p. 45. Zygodactyla vitrina Hincks, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 192. Trophosome.—Stem unbranched or slightly branched. Hydro- thece oval or oblong, contracting abruptly at the base, so that the base forms almost a right angle with the side, terminating above in about 12 converging segments. Hydranths with 12 tentacles. Gonosome unknown. Distribution—San Juan Archipelago. Dr. T. S. Wright, having secured specimens of the medusa ASquorea vitrina Gosse, succeeded in hatching the ova, and con- tinuing the development until hydroids were produced, these corresponding in character to a species of Campanulina. Hincks refers to this but calls the species Zygodactyla vitrina. Neither before nor since, as far as I can make out, has this hydroid been reported as appearing in its own habitat, though the medusa is found widely distributed, at least we must believe so if we are to credit Mayer who has recently produced a large two volume mon- ograph on the Hydromeduse, as under the common name 4’ quo- rea forskalea Peron et Lesueur, he includes those that have been named quorea vitrina as well as Hquorea cerulescens of the Pacific Coast and many others.1* An A’quorea, which in all like- lihood is this same species, is very abundant in the Vancouver Island Region and consequently I have very little doubt but that the hydroid I have obtained is of the same species as that reared * by Wright from this Hquorea. As such investigators as Nutting "and Mayer have given up the idea of an entire coincidence of nomenclature between the hydroids and the hydromeduse in the present state of knowledge, I think it better to use the hydroid generic name Campanulina, than the medusa name 4 quorea. All the specimens examined with one exception are un- branched; that one had one hydrotheea growing by means of a pedicel from what might be called the main stem and on the op- posite side one seemed to have been broken off. The pedicels were wavy or annulated throughout. They arise from a quite 16 A. G. Mayer, The Hydromeduse, 1910, p. 325. 44 C. McLEAN FRASER regular net-work of tubes that form the stolon. Their minute- ness corresponds very well with Wright’s description, as even the branched specimen was less than 1 mm. long and the un- branched ones were little more than half that. CAMPANULINA RUGOSA Nutting Campanulina rugosa NuTTING, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 176. Distribution—Juneau Alaska (Nutting); West Seattle, in Prof. Kineaid’s Collection. Genus CUSPIDELLA Trophosome.—Hydrothece tubular, sessile on a creeping root- stock. Gonosome.—Unknown. CUSPIDELLA HUMILIS (Alder) Campanularia humilis ALDER, Trans. Tyne. F. C. V., 1862, p. 239. Cuspidella humilis Hincks, Ann. and Mag. N. H., 3rd Ser. 18, 1866, p, 298. Cuspidella humilis HINCKs, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 209. Distribution.—Departure Bay, San Juan Archipelago. This species has generally been credited to Hincks, who seems to have used it in manuscript before Alder did in a published work. As manuscript is not eenerally recognized, I have used Alder’s name instead of Hincks’. Genus LOVENELLA Trophosome.—Colony unbranched or slightly branched. Hy- drothece turbinate. Margin more distinct than in any other genus of the family. Gonosome.—Gonophores producing bell-shaped meduse with eight tentacles and four lithocysts. LOVENELLA PRODUCTA (Sars) PP wigs. 710 Calycella producta Sars, Norges Hydroider, 1873, p. 30. Calycella producta H1incKxs, Ann. and Mag. N. H., 4th Ser. 13, 1874, p. 134. Lovenella producta JADERHOLM, Northern and Arctic Invert., 1909, p. 73. Distribution.—Dodd’s Narrows, San Juan Archipelago. Although this species has been reported by Hincks, Verrill, Bonnevie, Broch and Jiiderholm since it was first described by Sars, no very definite description has been given. On that ac- WEST COAST HYDROIDS 45 count, and because it has not been reported previous to this time from the Pacific Coast, it might be well to give here the substance of Sars’ general description from the type specimen. Polyps always growing from an irregularly branched stolon, which firmly adheres to some foreign support. From this sup- port the numerous pedicellate hydrothece radiate in all direc- tions, often quite densely aggregated. The sub-erect pedicels, slightly annulated at the base, vary much in length, some of them being quite long. They pass almost imperceptibly into the tubu- lar somewhat obconic hydrothece, the apertures of which are circular. The operculum consists of about twelve converging segments, which may be extended above the rim of the hydro- theca, or be retracted within it. The portion of the hydrotheca near the margin may be slightly ribbed longitudinally. Gonosome unknown. Color, grayish-white. Height of the hy- drotheca with pedicel up to 6 mm. Found attached to the stems of Tubularia indivisa and to calcareous serpulid tubes. The specimens I have examined answer to this description very well, except that the pedicels are not so long. According to Sars’ figures, in his specimens the variation is from 2 mm. to 6 mm. In specimens from Dodd’s Narrows the longest is not more than 2 mm., and in the San Juan material many of them are little more than 1 mm., but as they agree in every other respect, I do not hesi- tate to put them with this species. Genus STEGOPOMA Trophosome.—Hydrotheca with an operculum formed of two membranes, folded lengthwise, and which, roof-like, come to- gether with their long edges. Each of these is separated from the remainder of the hydrotheca by a curved line. At each side, the hydrothecal wall forms a triangular gable-like structure be- ' tween the two opercular membranes. I have not seen specimens of this genus. Levinsen in institut- ing the genus gives no characters of the gonosome.** Later authors who have used the genus, have described the gonangia in some species but have not described the contents thereof. STEGOPOMA PLICATILE (Sars) Lafea plicatile Sars, Vidensk. Selsk. Forhandl., 1862, p. 31. Stegopoma plicatile LEVINSEN, Meduser, Ctenophorer og Hydroider, 1893, p. 36. 17 Meduser, Ctenophorer og Hydroider fra Greenlands Vestkyst, 1893, p. 34. AG C. McLEAN FRASER Stegopoma plicatile JADERHOLM, Der Hydroidenfauna des Beringsmeeres, ASO Deas Distribution.—Bering Sea (Jiaderholm). HALECIDA Trophosome.—Hy drothece arranged alternately ; shallow saue- er-shaped, not deep enough to contain the contracted hydranths ; margins even, often duplicated. Hydranths with conical pro- boscis, surrounded by a single whorl of filiform tentacles. Gonosome.—Gonophores producing planule, (or medusoids, if we are to include Dr. Torrey’s genus Campalecium) usually dif- ferent in the two sexes. Genus CAMPALECIUM ‘“Trophosome.—As in Halecium. ‘“Gonosome.—Gonothece, each with a blastostyle bearing sev- eral medusoid gonophores’’. (Torrey). I have seen no type of this genus that Dr. Torrey has instituted, nor has any other so far as I know. Dr. Torrey himself, has given no more recent reference to it, but if his conclusions are correct, it would seem that the characters are sufficient te make a new genus. CAMPALECIUM MEDUSIFERUM Torrey Campalecium medusiferum Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 43. Distribution.—Long Beach, Cal. (Torrey). Genus HALECIUM Characteristics as given for the family. HALECIUM ANNULATUM Torrey Halecium annulatum Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 49. Halecium annulatum Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 10. Distribution—Coronado, Cal. (Torrey); Coronado Island, Mexico (Torrey) ; Port Renfrew, Ucluelet, Dodd’s Narrows. HALECIUM BALEIT new name Halecium gracile BALE, Proc. Linn. Soe. N. 8. W., 1888, p. 759. Halecium parvulum Baek, Proce. Linn. Soc. N. 8. W, 1888, p. 760. Halecium gracile CLARK, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, Vol. XXV, No. 6, 1894, p. 74. Distribution—San Juan Archipelago. WEST COAST HYDROIDS AT Bale described this species in 1888 under the name, Halecioum gracile. This name has later been used for the same species by Clark, Jiderholm'’ and Billard,!® but the name was preoccupied by Verrill?° in 1874, and later used by Fewkes** and Nutting.” In consequence I have taken the liberty of using Bale’s name in the substitution. HALECIUM CORRUGATUM Nutting Halecium corrugatum Nutrine, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 745. Distribution —Puget Sound (Nutting). HALECIUM DENSUM Calkins Halecium densum CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 343. Distribution—Bremerton (Calkins) ; Port Renfrew, Ucluelet, San Juan Archipelago. HALECIUM HALECINUM (Linneus) Sertularia halecina LINN&ZUS, Systema Nature, 1767, p. 1308. Halecium halecinum Nutting, Hydroids of Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Halecium halecinum Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 179. Distribution—Puget Sound (Nutting) ; Kadiak, Alaska (Nut- ting) ; Ucluelet. HALECIUM KOFOIDI Torrey Halecium kofoidi Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 49. Halecium kofoidi Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 11. Distribution —San Diego, Catalina Island, Cal. (Torrey) ; Cor- onado Island, Mexico (Torrey) ; San Juan Archipelago. HALECIUM MURICATUM (Ellis & Solander) Sertularia muricata ELLIs & SOLANDER, Nat. Hist. Zooph., 1786, p. 59. Halecium muricatum CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 217. Halecium muricatum Nurtine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 180. Distribution —Unalaska (Clark) ; Orea, Alaska (Nutting). 18 Aussereuropaische Hydroiden, 1903, p. 266. 19 Ex. du Travailleur et du Talisman, 1907, p. 163. 20 Invertebrated Animals of Vineyard Sound, 1874, p. 729. 21 Guide to a Collector, 1891, p. 36. 22 Hydroids of Wood’s Hole, 1901, p. 358. 48 C. McLEAN FRASER HALECIUM ORNATUM Nutting Halecium ornatum NuttineG, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 181. Distribution.—Berg Inlet, Glacier Bay, Alaska (Nutting). HALECIUM PYGMAIUM new species Pl. IV, Figs. 1-2 Trophosome.—Colony minute, largest specimen reaching a. height of 2.5 mm. The stolon, creeping on kelp, anastomoses to- such an extent that a dense net-work is produced. The stem most. commonly consists of but one pedicel about .5 mm. long, but may consist of a series of these pedicels, each giving origin to another pedicel just below its hydrophore. Not more than five were found in any one series. In rare instances, branches consisting of one or two of these pedicels, were also given off. The pedicels thus take the place of stem joints bending alternately to one side and the other, but as they are not all in the same plane, the trophosome seems somewhat spirally twisted. The annulations are not very well marked ; there may be one or two near the base of each pedi- eel. The hydrophores are large with expanded margins, either not everted or but slightly so. Gonosome.—Only the female gonosomes were found. In these the gonangia are borne on short pedicels, attached immediately below the hydrophore. In a case where a trophosome consists of a single pedicel, the gonangium extends beyond and overtops: the hydrotheca. There is only one gonangium on each of the stems, with one or more than one pedicel. The shape is obovate with a projection on one side near the top immediately over the opening which is shaped like a half-moon. The ova are of large size, Six to eight in each gonangium. Distribution—San Juan Archipelago in Prof. Kineaid’s col- lection. HALECIUM REVERSUM Nutting Halecium reversum Nurtine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 180. Distribution—Juneau, Alaska (Nutting). HALECIUM ROBUSTUM Nutting Halecium robustum Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 182. Distribution —Berg Inlet, Glacier Bay, Alaska (Nutting). WEST COAST HYDROIDS 49 HALECIUM SCUTUM Clark Halecium scutum CuarK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 218. Halecium scutum Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 180. Distribution—Semidi Islands to Unalaska (Clark) ; Berg In- let and Yakutat (Nutting) ; San Juan Archipelago. HALECIUM SPECIOSUM Nutting Halecium speciosum Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 181. Distribution —Yakutat, Alaska (Nutting). HALECIUM TELESCOPICUM Allman Halecium telescopicum ALLMAN, Challenger Report, Part II, 1888, p. 10. Halecium telescopicum JADERHOLM, Hydroidenfauna der Beringsmeeres, 1907, p. 4. Distribution—Bering Sea (Jaderholm). HALECIUM TENELLUM Hincks Halecium tenellum Hincxks, Ann. and Mag. N. H., 3rd Ser. 8, 1861, p. 252. Halecium tenellum Cuark, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 225. Distribution—San Diego, Cal. (Clark); San Juan Archi- pelago. HALECIUM WILSONT Calkins Halecium wilsoni CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 343. Halecium wilsoni HartLausB, Hydroiden aus dem Stillen Ocean, 1901, p. 350. Distribution—Bremerton (Calkins) ; Bare Island (Hartlaub) ; Ucluelet, San Juan Archipelago. Besides finding specimens of this species with the male gono- some similar to that described and figured by Calkins, I found others to which the same description of the trophosome applies but with female gonosomes. The gonangia of these are shaped like the male gonangia of the species and have the openings simi- lar and similarly placed. When the ova are within the gonangia, they appear to be very irregularly arranged, but when they are extruded into the globular acrocyst, the cause is evident. There is the same irregular branching from the spadix as in the male, giving the whole gonosome a fantastic appearance when viewed from the exterior. The fact that this female gonosome is smaller than the male, though unusual, will scarcely make it doubtful! that it belongs to the same species. 4 50 C. McLEAN FRASER HALECIUM WASHINGTONI Nutting Halecium geniculatum Nuttine, Hydroids of Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 744. Halecium nuttingi Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Goan 1902, p. 50. Halecium washingtoni NutTrine, Am. Nat., XXXV, 1901, p. 789. Halecium washingtoni TorREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 11. Distribution.—Puget Sound (Nutting) ; San Diego (Torrey) ; Dodd’s Narrows, San Juan Archipelago. LAF GID As Trophosome.—Hydrothece tubular, margins even, opercula absent. The hydrothecal cavity is not divided from the stem cavity by a partial septum, except in the genus Hebella. Hy- dranth with a conical hypostome. Gonosome.—‘Gonangia forming a ‘Coppinia’ mass.’’ (Nut- ting). Genus FILELLUM Trophosome.—Stem a slender rootstock, parasitic on other hydroids. Hydrothece partly adherent, curved outward at the point of separation. Gonosome.—A ‘Coppinia’ mass. FILELLUM EXPANSUM Levinsen Filellum expansum LEVINSEN, Hydroider fra Gronland’s Vestkyst, 1893, p.- 30. Distribution—Deer Harbor, San Juan, in Prof. Kineaid’s Collection. FILELLUM SERPENS (Hassell) Campanularia serpens HASSELL, Trans. Micro. Soe., ITI, 1852, p. 163. Filellum serpens Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 179. Distribution—Juneau, Alaska (Nutting); San Juan Archi- pelago. Genus GRAMMARIA Trophosome.—Stem fascicled, consisting of a hydrothecate axial tube surrounded by a certain number of peripheral, non- hydrothecate tubes. The hydrothece are partly adherent. Gonosome.—A ‘Coppinia’ mass. GRAMMARIA IMMERSA Nutting Grammaria immersa NurtinG, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 178. Distribution—St. Paul’s Harbor, Kadiak, Alaska (Nutting) ; ~ WEST COAST HYDROIDS 51 Bering Sea, N. W. of St. Lawrence Island (Jaderholm) ; Dodd’s Narrows. Genus HEBELLA **Trophosome.—Pedicels arising from a creeping rootstock, very short. Hydrothece tubular, with entire margins, without opercula, and having their cavities separated from those of the stem by a partial septum. Hydranths with a conical proboscis.’’ (Nutting). This genus has been moved around from one family to another and really does not properly belong to any of the families de- scribed up to the present. On account of its hydrothecal sep- tum, it has been placed with the Campanularide, but the tubular hydrotheca and more especially the conical hypostome makes it very unsuitable for such a home. The only difficulty there is in putting it in the Lafwide arises from the presence of the hydro- thecal septum. As this paper is intended to be largely a work on distribution, I do not feel justified in making a new family for the genus. As it seems to have the closest affinities to the La- faeide I have placed it with, rather than in, that family. HEBELLA POCILLUM (Hincks) Lafea pocillum Hixcxks, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 204. Lafea pocillum Cuark, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 215. Hebella pocillum NutTtTING, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 175. Distribution—Nunivak Island, Alaska (Clark); Kadiak, Alaska (Nutting). Genus LAFCG@A Trophosome.—Stem fascicled throughout the greater part of its length in a mature form. Hydrothece generally free from the stem, though sometimes slightly immersed in it. Gonosome.—A ‘Coppinia’ mass. LAF@A ADHERENS Nutting Lafaa adherens Nuttinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 178. Distribution —Kadiak, Alaska (Nutting). LAFGA DUMOSA (Fleming) Sertularia dumosa FLEMING, Edin. Phil. Jour. IT, 1828, p. 83. Lafewa dumosa Cuark, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 210. Lafea dumosa Nuttinc, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. 52 CU. McLEAN FRASER Lafea dumosa Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 177. Lafwa dumosa TorrEy, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 59. Distribution.—Port Etches, Alaska (Clark); Puget Sound (Nutting) ; Juneau, Berg Inlet, Orca, Alaska (Nutting) ; Port Orchard, Puget Sound (Torrey) ; Banks Island, Departure Bay, Dodd’s Narrows, Ucluelet, Port Renfrew, San Juan Archipelago. LAF@A FRUTICOSA Sars Lafea fruticosa Sars, Norske Hydroider, Vid. Selsk. Forh., 1862, p. 30. Lafea fruticosa CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 216. Lafea fruticosa NuttIne, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex. 1901, p. 178. Distribution—Shumagin Island to Kyska Island, Alaska (Clark); Puget Sound (Nutting); Juneau, Berg Inlet, Orca, Alaska (Nutting); Bering Sea (Jaderholm) ; San Juan Archi- pelago. : LAFG@A GRACILLIMA (Alder) Campanularia gracillima ALDER, Trans. Tynes. Field Club, 1857, p. 39. Lafea gracillima CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 216. Lafea gracillima Nurtine, Hydroids of Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Lafea gracillima Nurtine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 177. Lafa@a gracillima Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 60. Distribution—Sitka Harbor to Shumagin Islands, Alaska (Clark); Bare Island (Hartlaub); Puget Sound (Nutting) ; Juneau, Berg Inlet, Orca, Alaska (Nutting) ; San Pedro, Cal., Puget Sound (Torrey) ; Departure Bay, Dodd’s Narrows, Uclue- let, Port Renfrew, San Juan Archipelago. LAF@A GRANDIS Hincks Lafea grandis Hincxs, Ann. and Mag. N. H., 4th Ser. XIII, 1874, p. 148. Distribution—San Juan Archipelago. Only a fragment of this species appeared in the San Juan ma- terial but it was in very good condition. LICTORELLA Trophosome.—Stem polysiphoniec, with ultimate branches mon- osiphonice and bilateral. Hydrothece never sessile. Thin dia- phragm present. Nematophores may be present, usually on the branch at the base of the hydrothece. : Gonosome.—‘‘Gonangia aggregated, with curious protuberant ‘shoulders’ on one or two sides of the distal end. These are horn- WEST COAST HYDROIDS 53 like processes which may curve upward, or downward, or be di- rected straight outward, according to the species’’ (Nutting). As nematocysts are found in many species of the Lafwide group, I do not see any necessity of the genus Zygophylaz that Quelch has instituted. Even in Lictorella pinnata (Sars), they are commonly present, though they seem to have been generally overlooked, probably because they are so easily broken off. E. T. Browne, in describing LD. pinnata,* is the only one who has called attention to them directly, as far as I know, without putting the species in another genus, while Broch** in calling attention to this reference, remarks that if the species has nematocysts, it must belong to the genus Zygophylax. Nutting in his Hawaiian Island paper,”° when defining the genus Lictorella, mentions the frequency with which nematocysts are found in this genus. LICTORELLA CAROLINA new species Pl. IV, Figs. 3-5 Trophosome.—The only specimen of this species, 2.5 em. in length, was found detached, so that it may or may not have been a complete specimen. The main stem is polysiphonic, with com- paratively few hydrothece, and was probably erect. The branches coming off from the main stem are also polysiphonie, but the tubes are much reduced in number, gradually disappear- ing until in the secondary branches there is but a single tube. An appearance of dichotomy is produced in most cases by a hydrotheca from one tube originating in such a way that it seems to come from the axil formed by the branching of another tube. The ultimate branches are divided into internodes of almost equal length by deep constrictions. From each internode, nearly midway between the nodes a single hydrotheca is given off. These hydrothece alternate on successive internodes but are all in the same plane. At the origin of each of these there is a dis- tinct shoulder on the branch, which is divided by a deep con- striction from the base of the hydrotheca. On this shoulder there are two nematocysts present, which are deeply cup-shaped and supported by a two-ringed pedicel. Evidently they are very easily broken off, as I could find very few perfect ones, but the 23 Hydroids collected by the ‘‘Huxley’’, 1906, p. 27. 24 Hydroiduntersuchungen II, 1909, p. 201. 25 Hydroids of the Hawaiian Islands, 1905, p. 945. 54 C. McLEAN FRASER holes in the shoulder indicate the places where they had been. The hydrotheca widens gradually and symmetrically until it reaches the diaphragm. From this point the under surface passes out almost in a straight line, while the upper surface is. convex for some distance, after which it passes out parallel to the lower side. The margin is but slightly flarmg. It is com- monly duplicated. Gonosome.—Unknown. Distribution—San Juan Archipelago in Prof. Kineaid’s Col- lection. In some respects this species resembles Lictorella pinnata (Sars), or Lictorella halecioides Allman, which I presume is the same thing. The hydrotheca especially resembles that figured by Sars,°° so much so that if I had not had the opportunity of ex- amining some fine specimens of L. pinnata from the Hawaiian Is- lands, identified by Prof. Nutting,°* I should have hesitated in placing the Puget Sound specimen in a new species. One of the most marked differences is shown in the pronounced and regular division into internodes, which is not present in the Hawaiian Island forms, nor is it shown in any figures of L. pinnata that I have seen. The tendency towards dichotomy in the arrangement of the branches, and the presence of secondary branches, make the appearance of the specimen quite different from the some- what stiffly-pinnate arrangement found in L. pinnata. This species also resembles Zygophylax biarmata Billard, as described and figured by Billard,?® differing from it in much the same way as from L. pinnata. Whether this species of Billard’s is the same as L. pinnata or not, it is not necessary to discuss. SERTULARIDA In taking up this family of Hydroids, I have followed the ex- ample of the majority of those who have written since 1904 in using as a basis, the classification given by Prof. C. C. Nutting in his monograph of that year. Of his 12 genera I have found only 7 represented in the new material I have examined, viz., Abietinaria, Diphasia, Hydrall- mania, Selaginopsis, Sertularella, Sertularia and Thwaria. To 26 Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydroider, 1873, Tab. IV, figs. 27, 28.. 27 Hydroids of the Hawaiian Islands, 1905, p. 946. 28 Expeditions du Travailleur et du Talisman, 1907, p, 180. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 55 ’ these 7 there has been little objection made. Hartlaub,?? War- ren,*® Billard* and Ritchie,*? who have made large contributions, and others who have made smaller contributions, have used this classification as it is, for these genera. Jaiderholm* has included Abietinaria with Diphasia, but otherwise has not departed from the classification. In each of these the operculum consists of a single adeauline flap, but the shape of the hydrothece and the mode of growth are different. In species of Diphasia, where the gonosome has been found, it is widely different from that which is found in species of Abietinaria. Broch and Torrey are the only notable exceptions whose pa- pers I have seen. Broch** has cut down the 7 genera to 5, but has introduced a number of sub-genera, so that the main di- visions are more numerous than in Nutting’s classification. Very little can be gained by combining Diphasia and Abietinaria into the one genus Diphasia, and then dividing the genus into the sub- genera, Diphasia and Abietinaria. It would seem to be more satisfactory to combine them and leave them that way, as Jader- holm has done, than to separate them thus. His treatment of Selaginopsis is rather unfortunate, when two forms that have as much resemblance to each other as S. mirabilis and S. obsoleta, are put in two genera, while at the same time, such unlike forms as S. mirabilis and Sertularia pumila are placed in the same genus. He has placed much emphasis on the trophosome as far as its individual components go, and none whatever on the gen- eral appearance, mode of growth and the features of the gono- some. Torrey prefers to follow the grouping method of Schneider,* but no other systematist since his last paper appeared, seems to take this method of classification into serious account. He gives 29 Die Hydroiden der Magalhaenischen Region, 1905. 30 On a Collection of Hydroids mostly from the Natal Coast, 1908. 31 Hydroides du ‘‘ Travailleur’’ et du ‘‘Talisman’’, 1907 and Hydroides du British Museum, 1910. 32 Hydroids of the Scottish Antarctic Expedition, 1907 and its Supple- ment, 1909. 33 Northern and Arctie Invertebrata in the Swedish Museum, Sect. IV, Hydroiden, 1909. 34 Die Hydroiden der Arktischen Meere, 1909. 35 Hydropolypen from Rovigno, 1897. 56 C. McLEAN FRASER as his reason for adopting this method, that these groups ‘‘dis- courage the growth of synonyms, offer no awkward bars to the free passage of any species from one group to nearer relatives’’. He evidently is consistent with this statement, as he uses the same generic name, Sertularia, in two different groups, while in the same paper,** he uses the two generic names, Dynamena and Sertularia, for two species almost as much allied as it is possible to find. It seems to me that it is a fair test of classification into genera, if one who has examined a good supply of material, which has included species of the allied genera of a group, can take a typ- ical form that he has not already seen and without hesitation, place it in the genus in which it belongs, without necessarily go- ing over all the points of distinction. This test will apply to these 7 genera of the Sertularide, consequently, they may be ac- cepted as satisfactory. This by no means excludes the possibility of intergrading forms, as these are found here as well as else- where. This is particularly true among the lower marine forms. Of the other 5 genera, Dictyocladium, Pasythea, Staurotheca, Synthecitum and Thecocladium, only two, Dictyocladium and Synthecium, are reported from this Coast. As far as the genus Dictyocladium is concerned, I have seen no exception to it ex- cept from Billard,** who would place it with Selaginopsis, but as he gives no indication that he has seen any specimen that would be included under this genus, the features of the genus which Allman** and Nutting*® point out would, necessarily, not come under his observation. To the genus Synthecium Torrey takes great exception, in both Hydroid papers, but especially the latter. He claims that the species*® described by Nutting as Synthecium cylindricum, should be considered a Sertularella, which he calls S. halecina. His argument is this. In his material he has found specimens, some of which have gonangia springing from the hydrothece, as is required for Synthecium, but he has also found them extra- 86 Hydroids of San Diego, 1904. 87 Hydroides du Travailleur et du Talisman, 1907, p. 183. 88 Challenger Report, The Hydroida, Part II, 1888, p. 76. 39 American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 105. 40 Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 21. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 57 thecal, viz. on the stolon. In some eases he finds branches spring- ing from the hydrothece, which would qualify the species for the genus Thecocladium. MHartlaub*: in referring to this dis- cussion, cites an interesting laboratory experiment, where, in a colony of Obelia, the hydranths disappeared from the ecalyces, and gonophores later appeared to take their place, though they were attenuated, and otherwise differed from the type. He con- cludes that the entire nourishment is used in this case to produce the gonosome, that the species may be perpetuated. In his dis- cussion, however, he offers no opinion on the merits of the two sides of the question, but in the same paper, he later uses the genus Synthecium, showing that he is not satisfied that the genus should be eliminated. It does not follow that because Torrey has found these varia- tions in this species, that on this alone the genus Syntheciwm should be discarded. As I have already stated, there are and must be intergradations between any two allied genera, as well as between two nearly allied species, and evidently this is a good case in point, but that does not signify that the genus must on that account be left out. This is evidently the stand that most authors, who have met with species of this genus since Allman instituted it, have taken, as it has been used by them without hesitation. With regard to this particular species, there must remain some doubt as to where to place it, until a large amount of material has been examined, so that the typical form may be decided upon. As the only specimens I have seen are Prof. Nutting’s type specimens, and as I have followed his classifica- tion throughout in this group, I shall continue to do so in this ease, though I am perfectly free to admit that my opinion might be changed if I had the opportunity to examine a large amount of material. Genus ABIETINARIA ABIETINARIA ABIETINA (Linneus) Sertularia abietina LINNz&UuS, Systema Nature. 1758, p. 808. Sertularia anguina var. robusta CLARK, Hydroids of Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 255. Abietinaria abietina Nurtine, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 114. Abietinaria anguina Nurtine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 119. Distribution—Alaska, Bering Sea, Albatross collections off 41 Die Hydroiden der Magalhaenischen Region, 1905, pp. 615-627. 58 C. McLEAN FRASER Washington; Albatross Station, 2864, N. 48° 22’, W. 122° 51’, 48 fathoms; Station 3159, N. 87° 47’ 20”, W. 123° 10’, 27 fath- oms; Station 3443, N. 48° 13’ 30”, W. 123° 11’ 20”, 97 fathoms; Station 3546, N. 54° 12’, W. 165° 42’, 36 fathoms; Station 3552, N. 56° 28’, W. 169° 28’, 54 fathoms; Station 2842, N. 54° 15’, W. 166° 03’, 72 fathoms; Station 3230, N. 58° 31’ 30”, W. 157° 13’ 30”, 30 fathoms; Station 3599,.N. 52° 05’, EH. 177° 40’, 55 fathoms (Nutting) ; San Juan Archipelago, Ucluelet, Departure Bay, Dodd’s Narrows, Banks Island. ABIETINARIA ALEXANDERI Nutting Abietinaria alexanderi NutTTiInG, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 120. Distribution.—Albatross Station 28417 N. 54° 18’, W. 165° 55’ 56”, 56 fathoms; Station 3599, N. 52° 05’, E. 177° 40’, 55 fathoms (Nutting). ABIETINARIA AMPHORA Nutting Abietinaria amphora NurtinG, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 119. Distribution.—Albatross Station 2841, N. 54° 18’, W. 165° 55” 56”, 56 fathoms; Station 2866, N. 48° 09’, W. 125° 03’, 171 fath- oms; Whidley Island, Puget Sound (Nutting); Port Renfrew, Ucluelet, Dodd’s Narrows. ABIETINARIA ANGUINA (Trask) Sertularia anguina TRASK, Proe. Cal. Acad. Se., Vol. 1, W857, pe aaize Sertularia labrata Murray, Ann, and Mag., 3rd Series, V, 1860, p. 250. Sertularia anguina CLARK, Hydroids of Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 255. Abietinaria labiata KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 34. Thuiara coei Nuvrine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 185. Abietinaria coei Nurtine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 117. Distribution—San Diego, Cal. (Hemphill); Monterey Bay (Anderson); Vancouver Island (Dawson); San Francisco. (Trask) ; Dutch Harbor, Alaska, Tledis Village near Susk, B. C. (Nutting) ; Port Renfrew, Ucluelet. The species Abietinaria anguina (Trask), described by Prof. Nutting,*? which evidently is the same as S. anguina var. robusta Clark, appears to me to be identical with A. abietina (Linneus). I have examined a large amount of material and have found all phases of gradation in the size of the hydrotheca, from those that. 42 American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 119. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 59 are almost half immersed, to those even longer than the figures would indicate. I have compared these specimens with others from the Atlantic Coast and can see no reason for considering this a separate species. Moreover, on the same colony there ap- pear gonangia as smooth and as elongated as those figured for A. anguina, and others as stout and as much annulated as that fig- ured by Hincks** for A. abietina. In all of them the border is turned in to form a somewhat funnel-shaped portion, like an in- verted collar. The border is ornamented with a ring of sharp teeth. The name, Abietinaria anguina, should be retained for the species originally described as Sertularia anguina by Trask. It would have been much easier to trace his species if he had seen any gonangia, but by making a series of comparisons it is pos- sible to trace it to A. coei Nutting, as distinct from Sertularia filicula, with which Dr. Torrey associates it. Trask’s fig. 1, Pl. V, is evidently the same as that figured by Murray, in fig. 2a, Pl. XI, as S. labrata. Fig. 2 showing this in natural size, corresponds with A. coei Nutting in its definitely pinnate arrangement, and decidedly geniculate stem above the first pinna, while A. filicula is branched many times, so that the pinnate arrangement is obliterated. This latter figure agrees with the natural size fig. 5 in table 14, given by Kirchenpauer for A. labiata. The figs. 5a, 5b and 5c in the same table, repre- sent gonangia similar to those figured in plate XX XIII, for A. coet Nutting, these being quite different from those of A. filicula, which are well figured by Hincks,** in fig. 3b, Pl. LIII, and by Ellis and Solander,* in fig. C, Pl. 6. It is probable that it is on account of its mode of growth that Trask speaks of its resemblance to S. fallax Johnston, because in its definitely pinnate arrangement, it more nearly resembles S. fallax that Johnston has figured in Pl. XI,** than it does the loose arrangement of S. filicula as figured in P]. XIV of the same work. Clark in one of his papers*’ describes S. anguina and mentions 43 British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, Pl. LV. 44 British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868. 45 Natural History of Zoophytes, 1786. 46 British Zoophytes, 1847. 47 Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 255. 60 C. McLEAN FRASER its resemblance to A. filicula, while in another paper published in the same year,** he includes S. filicula. Therefore, though he states that their trophosomes are quite similar, he evidently con- siders that there are the two separate species. ABIETINARIA ANNULATA (Kirchenpauer) Thuiaria annulata KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 26. Abietinaria annulata NuTTInc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 122. Distribution.—A lbatross Station 3546, N. 54° 12’, W. 165° 42’, 36 fathoms (Nutting). ABIETINARIA COSTATA (Nutting) Thuiaria costata NuTTING, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 187. Abietinaria costata NuTTING, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 122. Distribution.—Y akutat, Alaska (Nutting). ABIETINARIA FILICULA (Ellis and Solander) Sertularia filicula E. & S., Nat. Hist. Zoophytes, 1786, p. 57. Sertularia filicula CLark, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 219. Sertularia filicula Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 68. Abietinaria filicula NutTtTine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 117. Distribution.—Alaska, Albatross Station 2865, N. 48° 12’, W. 122° 49’, 40 fathoms (Nutting); San Juan Archipelago, Vic- toria, Dodd’s Narrows. The specimen described by Dr. Torrey, evidently belongs to this species, if one is to judge from his drawing, of the gonangia, but that it is the same species as S. anguina Trask, is an opinion with which I cannot agree, as explained in connection with the note on A. angwina. ABIETINARIA GIGANTEA (Clark) Thuaria gigantea CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 230. Thuiaria gigantea Nutrinc, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Thuiaria gigantea NuTTING, Hydroids of the: Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 186. Abietinaria gigantea NuTrTinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 123. Distribution.—Alaskan Shores and Aleutian Islands, Bering Sea, Hagmeister Island, Akutan Pass, Kyska Harbor, Orea, Kadiak, Belkoffsky, Albatross Station 3464, N. 48° 14’, W. 123° 20’ 40”, 40 fathoms; Station, 3546, N. 54° 12’, W. 162° 42’, 36 fathoms; Station 3557, N. 57° 04’, W. 170° 24’, 26 fathoms (Nutting) ; Bering Sea (Jaderholm). 48 Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 219. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 61 ABIETINARIA GRACILIS Nutting -Abietinaria gracilis NuTTING, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 120. Distribution.—Albatross Station 2873, N. 48° 30’, W. 124° 57’, 40 fathoms; Station 3480, N. 52° 06’, W. 171° 45’, 283 fath- oms; Station 3599, N. 52° 05’, E. 177° 40’, 55 fathoms (Nutting). ABIETINARIA GREENET (Murray) Sertularia greenei Murray, Ann. and Mag. 3rd Ser. V, 1860, p. 504. Sertularia greenei CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 257. Sertularia greenei ToRREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 69. Abietinaria greenei NUTTING, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 121. Distribution—Tomales Point, Monterey, Punta Reyes, San Francisco, Port Renfrew, Vancouver Island (Nutting); San Juan Archipelago, Dodd’s Narrows, Departure Bay, Port Ren- frew, Ucluelet. ABIETINARIA INCONSTANS (Clark) Sertularia inconstans CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 222. Abietinaria inconstans NUTTING, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 116. Distribution —Unalaska (Nutting). ABIETINARIA RIGIDA, new species Pl. V, Figs. 1-3 Trophosome.—Largest colony obtained reaches a height of 4 inches. The main stem is coarse, rigid and but slightly flexuose, with annulations at the base, but with little indication of being regularly divided into internodes. Some specimens over 2 inches in length are entirely unbranched. When the branches are pres- ent they have usually a regular alternate arrangement, each branch making a wide angle with the stem. As the branches also, are rigid, the whole colony has a coarse stiff appearance. The number of hydrothece between two successive branches on the same side of the main stem is by no means constant, but is com- monly three. At the junction with the main stem, the branch is much constricted, so that it readily breaks off at that point. The branches have at most one or two nodal rings, in many eases there appears to be none present. The hydrothece on the main stem and on the branches have a regular arrangement, but on the branches they are somewhat more closely placed. They are stout, - narrowing gradually but slightly, towards the circular opening, the margin of which is perfectly smooth, lying parallel to the 62 ; C. McLEAN FRASER axis of the stem or branch. In some cases there is a slight indica- ~ tion of flaring, but this is seldom noticeable. The hydrothece are immersed to a large extent, less than one-fourth being free. The operculum consists of a single adcauline flap. Gonosome.—The gonangia are borne on the upper surface of the branches. The shape is an elongated oval, with a distinctly narrowed pedicel. At the distal end it narrows suddenly to form a narrow collar which is double, on account of the margin being turned in. A finely-toothed ornamentation appears on the col- lar. The gonangia are very similar to some of those found on A. abietina. Distribution—Alhbatross Station 2865, N. 48° 12’, W. 122° 51’, 48 fathoms (in collection of the State University of Iowa); San Juan Archipelago. This species resembles to some extent, one of the varieties that Clark includes under Sertularia variabilis,*® but in this species he has included forms resembling such greatly differing species as Abietinaria traski and Abietinaria abietina. It seems to me that even if there are intergrading forms, such distinct typical forms should be treated as specifically distinct. It is a common experience in examining a large amount of material, to find many specimens showing such intergradation between two allied spe- cies, that it is difficult to decide to which they belong. As such is the case, distinct types must be treated as specifically distinct, no matter how much intergradation there may be, if we are going to have any classification. The indications are that if it were possible to get even a fairly complete collection of hydroids, or of any of the lower marine groups, the whole group would be a series of gradations, and not only that, but the groups them- selves would scarcely be delimited. Even in the higher land forms, where isolation has had the best chance to produce dis- tinct species, disagreement among systematists as to the position of a specimen, often occurs. This type is plentiful in the San Juan Archipelago, and is so characteristic, that it can readily be picked out from a hydroid mass, without the aid of a lens. Since this is the case, even if intergradations may be or have been found between it and other forms, it seems best to distinguish it specifically. 49 Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 221. EE WEST COAST HYDROIDS 63 ABIETINARIA TRASKEI (Torrey) Sertularia traski Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 69. Abietinaria traski NuTTING, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 118. Distribution—San Pedro, Cal. (Torrey); Albatross Station, 2861, N. 51° 14’, W. 129° 50’, 204 fathoms; Station 2873, N. 48° 30’, W. 124° 57’, 40 fathoms; Station 2886, N. 43° 59’, W. 124° 56’ 30”, 50 fathoms; Station 3192, N. 35° 33’ 40”, W. 121° 15’, 101 fathoms (Nutting); San Juan Archipelago, Dodd’s Nar- rows, Departure Bay. ABIETINARIA TURGIDA (Clark) Thuiaria turgida CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 229. Thuiaria turgida NuttTInc, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Thuiaria turgida NuttiInc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 186. Abietinaria turgida NutTtine, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 123. Distribution Alaskan Coasts, Aleutian Islands and Bering Sea (Nutting) ; Orea, Alaska, Collection of H. Moon. ABIETINARIA VARIABILIS (Clark) Sertularia variabilis CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 221. Sertularia variabilis NutTinc, Hydroids of Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, e741. 4 Thuiaria variabilis Nuttinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Expedition, 1901, . 185. ; Abietinaria variabilis NuTTING, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 115. Distribution— Alaskan Coasts, Aleutian Islands, Bering Sea, San Miguel Island, California; Albatross Station 2857, N. 58° 05’, W. 150° 46’, 51 fathoms; Station 2864, N. 48° 22’, W. 122° 51’, 48 fathoms; Station 2866, N. 48° 09’, W. 125° 03’, 171 fath- oms; Station 2886, N. 43° 59’, W. 124° 56’ 30”, 50 fathoms; Station 3231, N. 58° 35’, W. 157° 28’ 50”, 12 fathoms; Station 3465, N. 48° 21’, W. 123° 14’, 48 fathoms; Station 3599, N. 52° 05’, E. 177° 40’, 55 fathoms; Puget Sound (Nutting) ; Bering Sea (Jiaiderholm) ; Queen Charlotte Islands. Genus DICTYOCLADIUM DICTYOCLADIUM FLABELLUM Nutting Dictyocladium flabellum Nuttine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 105. Distribution—Albatross Station 2842, N. 54° 15’, W. 166° 03’, 72 fathoms; Station 2874, N. 48° 30’, W. 124° 57’, 27 fath- oms (Nutting). 64 C. McLEAN FRASER Genus DIPHASIA DIPHASIA CLARA, new species PL Wve al! Trophosome.—The colony is small and delicate, not half an inch in length, parasitic on Abietinaria abietina and other coarse forms. It is dichotomously branched, with a hydrotheca in the angle in each case. A quite regular division into internodes takes place, with rarely more than*one hydrotheca to an inter- node. The hydrothece are alternately arranged, the two in suc- cession being quite distant from each other. Each has the regu- lar Diphasia form, with but a sight narrowing from the base to the aperture. The margin of the aperture is also typical, being shaped like the rim of a pitcher, with the adcauline operculum of a single flap, shaped to fit. The hydrotheca is less than half immersed. Gonosome.—Unknown. Distribution—On Abietinaria abietina and other large hy- droid colonies, San Juan Archipelago; Queen Charlotte Islands. DIPHASIA CORNICULATA (Murray) Sertularia corniculata Murray, Ann. and Mag., 3rd Ser., V, 1860, p. 251. Sertularia corniculata CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacifie Coast, 1876, p. 251. Diphasia corniculata Nurtinc, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 112. Distribution—Bay of San Francisco (Murray). DIPHASIA KINCAIDI (Nutting) Thuiara elegans NuttiIne, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 187. Thuiaria kincaidi Nutrtine, American Naturalist, Sept., 1901, p. 789. Thuiaria elegans TorrEY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 14. Diphasia kincaidi Nutr1nc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 112. Distribution—Berg Inlet and Dutch Harbor, Alaska (Nut- ting). ? DIPHASIA PULCHRA Nutting Diphasia pulechra Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 111. Distribution —Albatross Station 2863, N. 48° 58’, W. 123° 10’, 67 fathoms (Nutting). I have seen no specimens of this species except Prof. Nutting’s types, and no description except the one that he gives, conse- quently, I can only place it in this genus provisionally, as he has done. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 65 Genus HYDRALLMANTIA HYDRALLMANIA DISTANS Nutting Hydrallmania falcata CALKINS, Hydroids from Puget Sound, 1899, p. 362. Hydrallmania distans NutTtTinc, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 746. Hydrallmania distans NutTInc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 126. Distribution—Puget Sound (Calkins); Puget Sound (Nut- ting) ; San Juan Archipelago, Ucluelet, Dodd’s Narrows, Queen Charlotte Islands. Calkins’ type slides show that what he named H. falcata is the same as H. distans Nutting. Consequently there is at present no indication that H. falcata has been found on the Pacific Coast of North America. HYDRALLMANIA FRANCISCANA (Trask) Plumularia franciscana TRASK, Proce. Cal. Acad. Se., Vol. I, 1857, p. 1138. Hydrallmania franciscana CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p- 260. Hydrallmania franciscana Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p- 13. Hydrallmania franciscana Nuvrine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 126. Distribution —San Francisco Bay (Trask and Murray). Genus SELAGINOPSIS SELAGINOPSIS CEDRINA (Linneus) Sertularia cedrina LINNZUS, Systema Nature, 1758, p. 814. Selaginopsis pacifica MERESCHKOWSKyY, Ann. and Mag., 5th Ser., IT, 1878, p. 438. Selaginopsis cedrina KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 8. Selaginopsis cedrina NutTtTinG, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 130. Distribution.Bering Sea (Kirchenpauer). SELAGINOPSIS CLYINDRICA (Clark) Thuiaria cylindrica, CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 226. Selaginopsis cylindrica CALKINS, Some Hydroids from Puget Sound, 1899, . a62. 4 Selaginopsis cylindrica Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 131. . Distribution.—Port Moller, Alaska, Hagmeister Island, Bering Sea, Chirikoff Island, Chiachi Islands (Clark); Puget Sound (Calkins) ; Bristol Bay, Alaska (Nutting) ; St. Lawrence Island, lotte Islands. Bering Sea (Jiderholm) ; San Juan Archipelago, Queen Char- 5 66 C. McLEAN FRASER SELAGINOPSIS HARTLAUBI Nutting Selaginopsis hartlaubi Nurrine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 133. Distribution—Albatross Station 3560, N. 56° 40’, W. 169° 20’, 43 fathoms (Nutting) ; San Juan Archipelago. SELAGINOPSIS MIRABILIS (Verrill) Diphasia mirabilis VERRILL, Amer. Jour. Science, 3rd Ser., V, 1872, p. 9. Diphasia mirabilis CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 219. Selaginopsis mirabilis Nurrine, Hydroids of Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Selaginopsis mirabilis TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 70. Selaginopsis mirabilis Nurtinc, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 128. Distribution—Hagmeister Island, Bering Sea, Popoff Strait, Shumagin Islands (Clark); Puget Sound, Albatross Station 2865, N. 48° 12’, W. 122° 49’, 40 fathoms (Nutting) ; San Juan Archipelago, Dodd’s Narrows. SELAGINOPSIS OBSOLETA (Lepechin) Sertularia obsoleta LepecHin, Acta Acad. Petropol. II, 1778, Pt. 2, p. 137. Selaginopsis hincksti MERESCHOWSKy, Ann. and Mag., 5th Ser., II, 1878, p. 444. Selaginopsis obseleta KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 10. Selaginopsis obsoleta Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 132. Distribution—St. Paul’s Island, Bering Sea (A. and A. Krause). Albatross Station 3508, N. 58° 33’, W. 164° 49’, 23 fathoms (Nutting). SELAGINOPSIS ORNATA Nutting Selaginopsis ornata Nuttine, American Hydroids Part II, 1904, p. 131. Distribution —Albatross Station 2843, N. 53° 56’, W. 165° 56’, 45 fathoms (Nutting). SELAGINOPSIS PINASTER (Lepechin) Sertularia pinaster LEPECHIN, Acta Acad. Petropol., 1783, p. 223. Sertularia pinus KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 11. Selaginopsis pinaster Nuvtrinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 128. Distribution.—St. Paul’s Island (A. and A. Krause). SELAGINOPSIS PINNATA Mereschkowsky Selaginopsis pinnata MERESCHOWSKy, Ann. and Mag., 5th Ser., II, 1878, p. 436. Selaginopsis pinnata KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 14. Selaginopsis pinnata NuttTine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 130. Distribution —Port Ajan (M. Wosnessensky) ; St. Paul’s Is- WEST COAST HYDROIDS 67 land, 23 fathoms (Kirchenpauer) ; Albatross Station 3558, N. 56° 58’, W. 170° 09’, 25 fathoms (Nutting) ; San Juan Archi- pelago, Queen Charlotte Islands. SELAGINOPSIS PLUMIFORMIS Nutting Selaginopsis plumiformis NutTtiInc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 129. ?Selaginopsis cylindrica CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 226. Distribution.—N. 60° 22’, W. 168° 45’ (Nutting). I have not been able to satisfy myself that this species is dis- tinct from 8S. cylindrica Clark, as I have found a number of speci- mens of what I take to be S. cylindrica, with a woody main stem and large primary branches, with secondary branches, similar to Prof. Nutting’s type specimen. It appears that the reason that they are not often found in this way is, that the primary branches break off from the main stem, taking the annulated portion with the branch. Consequently what appears as a main stem in an ordinary specimen, is really a primary branch, and what appears as a primary branch is really a secondary branch. This would explain what Clark says, ‘‘occasionally a large branch occurs which resembles the main stem in every particular’’.°° With re- gard to the branching he says, ‘‘branches, cylindrical or polyg- onal, arranged alternately, bearing from one to three branchlets near the base, which are of equal size and of nearly equal length with the branches, or unbranched’’. I have found that this ac- curately describes the specimens that I have examined. This branching of the branches gives a close resemblance to Meresch- kowsky’s figure of S. pacifica,** corresponding to the agreement Prof. Nutting finds between S. plumiformis and S. pacifica. SELAGINOPSIS TRISERIALIS Mereschkowsky Selaginopsis triserialis MERESCHKOWSKy, Ann. and Mag., 5th Ser., II, 1878, p. 435. Selaginopsis triserialis KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 14 Sertularia incongrua TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacifie Coast, 1902, p. 69. Selaginopsis triserialis NuTTING, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 129. Distribution—San Pedro, Cal. (Torrey); Albatross Station 2908, N. 34° 25’ 25”, W. 120° 20’, 31 fathoms (Nutting). 50 Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 227. 51 Ann. and Mag., Vol. 2, 5th Ser., 1878, Pl. 16, fig. 5. 68 C. McLEAN FRASER Genus SERTULARELLA SERTULARELLA ALBIDA Kirchenpauer Sertularella robusta CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 225. Sertularella albida KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 42. Sertularella albida Nutrine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 86. Distribution—Yukon Harbor, Big’ Koniushi, Shumagin Is- lands, 6 to 20 fathoms (Clark). SERTULARELLA CLARKIT Mereschkowsky Sertularella clarkii MeRESCHKOWSKY, Ann. and Mag., 5th Ser., II, 1878. p. 447. Sertularella clarkii Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 102. Distribution.—Unalaska (M. Petelin), 1847. SERTULARELLA COMPLEXA Nutting Sertularella complexa Nurvinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 94. Distribution.—Albatross Station 2843, N. 538° 56’, W. 165° 56’, 45 fathoms; Station 2853, N. 56°, W. 154° 20’, 159 fathoms ; Station 2858, N. 58° 17’, W. 148° 36’, 230 fathoms; Station 3500, N. 56° 02’, W. 169° 30’, 121 fathoms (Nutting). SERTULARELLA CONICA Allman Pl. Vi, Bigs. 2-4 Sertularella conica ALLMAN, Hydroids of the Gulf Stream, 1877, p. 21. Sertularella conica CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 359. Sertularella conica Nuttinec, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 79. Distribution.—Townshend Harbor (Calkins); San Juan Archipelago, Port Renfrew, Ucluelet. Prof. Nutting is doubtful if S. conica:Calkins, is really the same as 8S. conica Allman. I have found many specimens in the ‘ Puget Sound material as well as in the material from Port Ren- frew and Ucluelet that have the four-flapped operculum, and seemingly all the other characteristics of S. conica Allman, con- sequently, I believe that the diagnosis was correct. In the Port Renfrew material I found gonangia, which as far as I know, have not yet been described. They resemble the gonangia of S. poly- zonias, but they are not nearly so large. They are peculiar in that they have their origin directly from the stolon, from which the unbranched stems arise. Sometimes they appear singly, but sometimes several of them are grouped together. They are formed, evidently, while the colony is very young, as in the same: WEST COAST HYDROIDS 69 specimens in which they were present, there were stems with only one hydrotheca, some with two, and none with more than three or four. The figures showing the development, were ob- tained from the same specimen as that showing the gonangium. ?SERTULARELLA DENTIFERA Torrey Sertularella dentifera TorREy, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 61. Sertularella dentifera Nuttine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 100. Distribution—San Pedro, Cal. (Torrey). I have found specimens of S. tricuspidata with reduplications in the margin of the hydrothecex, in some cases even more marked than Dr. Torrey shows in his figure, and at the same time they resemble his figure in every other respect except that I have not found any in which the branches arise from the lumen of the hydrothecx. In the figure one branch is shown to have its origin in that way, while the other has not. If the former is the normal condition, the species, as he says, should belong to the genus Thecocladium; if the latter it is a Sertularella, and would more likely be an abnormal specimen of S. tricuspidata, than of 8. tropica as Prof. Nutting suggests, because S. tricuspidata is very common along the whole Pacific Coast, and S. tropica has not been reported. In a later paper®? Prof. Nutting recognizes the species, but his figure of the gonangium gives the further evi- dence that was needed to show that it is really S. tricuspidata. SERTULARELLA ELEGANS Nutting Sertularella elegans Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 98. Distribution— Albatross Station 2842, N. 54° 15’, W. 166° 03’, 72 fathoms (Nutting). SERTULARELLA FUSIFORMIS (Hincks) Sertularia fusiformis Hrxcks, Ann. and Mag., 3rd Ser., VITT, 1861, p. 253. Sertularella fusiformis Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 61. Sertularella fusiformis NutTriInc, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 89. Distribution—San Francisco, Cal. (Torrey). SERTULARELLA LEVINSENI Nutting Sertularella levinseni Nurtinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 100. Distribution.—Albatross Station 2842, N. 54° 15’, W. 166°- 03’, 72 fathoms (Nutting). 52 Hydroids of the Hawaiian Islands, 1905, p. 948. 70 C. McLEAN FRASER SERTULARELLA MAGNA Nutting Sertularella magna Nuttine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 103. Distribution.—Albatross Station 3480, N. 52° 06’, W. 171° 45’, 283 fathoms (Nutting). SERTULARELLA MINUTA Nutting Sertularella minuta Nuttine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 99. Distribution—Albatross Station 3480, N. 52° 06’, W. 171° 45’, 283 fathoms (Nutting). SERTULARELLA PEDRENSIS Torrey Sertularella pedrensis TorREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 27. Distribution—San Pedro, Cal. (Torrey) ; Santa Barbara, Cal., in collection of the State University of Iowa (collected by Mrs. V. B. Gibbs). SERTULARELLA PINNATA Clark Sertularella pinnata CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 226. Sertularella pinnata Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 94. Distribution —Unalaska, Coal Harbor, Shumagin Islands, Lit- uya Bay, 112 fathoms (Clark) ; San Juan Archipelago. SERTULARELLA POLYZONIAS (Linneus) Sertularia polyzonias LINNZXUS, Systema Nature, 1758, p. 813. Sertularella polyzonias CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 224. Sertularella polyzonias Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 183. Sertularella polyzonias Nuttine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 90. Distribution.—Alaska (Clark) ; Albatross Station 3294, N. 57° 16’ 45”, W. 159° 03’ 30”, 30 fathoms; Station 3505, N. 57° 09’, W. 168° 17’, 44 fathoms; Station 3511, N. 57° 32’, W. 169° 387, 39 fathoms (Nutting) ; San Juan Archipelago. SERTULARELLA RUGOSA (Linneus) Sertularia rugosa LINN&US, Systema Nature, 1758, p. 809. Sertularella rugosa CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 224. Sertularella saccata NuvtinG, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 183. Sertularella rugosa NuvTtinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 82. Distribution—Alaska (Clark); Puget Sound (Nutting) ; Popoff Island and Yakutat, Alaska, in H. Moon’s Collection. SERTULARELLA TANNERI Nutting Sertularella tanneri Nutrine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 81. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 71 Distribution Albatross Station 2873, N. 48° 30’, W. 124° 57’, 40 fathoms (Nutting). SERTULARELLA TENELLA (Alder) Sertularia rugosa (var.) JOHNSTON, British Zoophytes, 1847, p. 64. Sertularia tenella ALDER, Cat. Zooph. Northumberland, 1857, p. 23. Sertularella tenella TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 64. Sertularella tenella NuttTinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 83 Distribution—Albatross Station 2865, N. 48° 12’, W. 122° 49’, 40 fathoms (Nutting) ; Puget Sound (Hartlaub) ; California (Torrey) ; San Juan Archipelago. _SERTULARELLA TRICUSPIDATA (Alder) Sertularia tricuspidata ALDER, Ann. and Mag., 2nd Ser., XVIII, 1856, p- 356. Sertularella tricuspidata CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 224. Sertularella tricuspidata Nuttine, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Sertularella tricuspidata CALKINS, Some Hydroids from Puget Sound, 1899, p. 360. Sertularella tricuspidata Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, . 183. 7 Sertularella hesperia Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 63. Sertularella tricuspidata Nutrinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 100. Distribution.—Alaska, Aleutian Islands, St. Paul’s Island (Clark) ; Puget Sound (Nutting) ; Port Townshend (Calkins) ; San Diego Harbor (Torrey) ; Albatross Station 2850, N. 54° 52’, W. 159° 46’, 21 fathoms; Station 2857, N. 58° 05’, W. 150° 46’, 51 fathoms; Station 2858, N. 58° 17’, W. 148° 36’, 230 fathoms ; Station 2865, N. 48° 12’, W. 122° 49’, 40 fathoms; Station 2866, N. 48° 09’, W. 125° 03’, 171 fathoms; Station 3225, N. 54° 48’ 30”, W. 165° 49’, 85 fathoms (Nutting) ; St. Lawrence Island, Bering Sea (Jiderholm) ; San Juan Archipelago, Dodd’s Nar- rows, Departure Bay. SERTULARELLA TURGIDA (Trask) Sertularia turgida TRASK, Proc. Cal. Acad. Se., 1857, p. 113. Sertularella turgida CLark, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 259. Sertularella nodulosa CALKINS, Some Hydroids from Paget Sound, 1899, p- 360. Sertularella turgida Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 64. Sertularella turgida Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part ITI, 1904, p. 95. Distribution—Bay of San Francisco, Monterey, Tomales 72 C. McLEAN FRASER Point, Cal. (Trask) ; San Diego, Cal., Vancouver Island (Clark) ; Townshend Harbor (Calkins); Oregon (Nutting); Albatross Station 2861, N. 54° 14’, W. 129° 50’, 204 fathoms (Nutting) ; San Juan Archipelago, Victoria, Port Renfrew, Ucluelet, Dodd’s Narrows, Departure Bay. 4 Genus SERTULARIA SERTULARIA CORNICINA (McCready) Dynamena cornicina McCreavy, Gmynophthalmata of Charleston Harbor, 1858, p. 204. Sertularia cornicina NuttinG, Hydroids of Wood’s Hole, 1901, p. 359. Sertularia complexa NuttTinG, Hydroids of Wood’s Hole, 1901, p. 360. Sertularia cornicina Nutvinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 58. Dynamena cornicina ToRREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 30. Distribution.—Coronado Islands, Cal. (Torrey). » SERTULARIA DESMOIDES Torrey Sertularia desmoides ToRREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 65. Sertularia desmoides NuvTtIne, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 56. Distribution.San Diego, San Clemente Island, San Pedro, Cal., 1-42 fathoms (Torrey) ; Albatross Station 2939, N. 33° 36’, W. 118° 09’ 30”, 27 fathoms (Nutting). SERTULARIA FURCATA Trask Ted AVAL Daisy. 5) Sertularia furcata TRASK, Proc. Cal. Acad. Se., 1857, p. 112. Sertularia furcata CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 258. Sertularia furcata ToRREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 66. Sertularia pulchella Nutvine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 55. Sertularia furcata TorRREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 31. Distribution—Bay of San Francisco and Farallone Islands (Trask); Santa Cruz, Monterey, San Diego, Santa Barbara (Clark) ; San Pedro, Coronado Island, shore to 24 fathoms (Tor- rey) ; Ucluelet. Prof. Nutting, in his American Hydroids, basing his opinion on Clark’s description and figure of Sertularia furcata Trask, places this species along with Dynamena pulchella d’Orbigny, and ealls it Sertularia pulchella. .Jaiderholm®* follows him in this, and also follows Hincks,** in taking 8. pulchella and S. 53 Northern and Arctic Invertebrata in the Swedish State Museum, Sec- tion IV, Hydroiden, 1909, p. 97. 54 British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 263. WEST COAST HYDROIDS ics operculata together, giving the latter name to the three species. Hartlaub®’ goes a step farther, by including as well, Dynamena bispinosa Gray, with these three species, all under the name S. operculata. Evidently none of these investigators have seen a specimen of S. furcata, and unfortunately Clark’s drawings do not bring out many of the characteristic features. His descrip- tion too, is rather meagre, though in it certain features distin- guishing this from these other forms are mentioned. Torrey, particularly in his 1904 paper, makes note of some of these dif- ferences, but as he had not seen d’Orbigny’s drawings, only one of which was copied by Nutting, he was not in a position to ap- preciate all the differences that exist. The mode of growth in the two cases is markedly different. D. pulchella, according to d’Orbigny,** may be a quarter of a meter long, is much and irregularly branched, and is attached in the usual way to the surface of a shell. None of the specimens of S. furcata are more than three-quarters of an inch in length, un- branched; each stem is attached to a stolon “‘by a short, slender, twisted process, about the length of an internode’’. The stolon which may be quite long, is not very sinuous, and in all speci- mens to hand, is growing attached to the surface of eel-grass. The pairs of hydrothece with the exception of the first two or three towards the base, are in contact on the one side of the stem, which Trask calls the back and Torrey the face. There is no in- dication in any of d’Orbigny’s figures, that they come together, but rather they are shown to be noticeably apart. I see no sign of the double annulation at the nodes that d’Orbigny mentions, and the annulations are not so regular as he figures them. The gonangia appear to be similar in the two species. In S. furcata they are restricted to an area near the base of the stem, whereas in D. pulchella, on account of the extensive branching, they have a wide range. In both cases they have their origin just below the bases of the hydrothece. Trask’s description agrees very well with Clark’s except that he speaks of the stolon as the main stem or rachis, which is ‘‘ad- nate to the various marine alge on which it grows, and often quite embedded in the fronds of marine plants’’. His descrip- 55 Die Hydroiden der Magalhaenischen Region, 1905, p. 664. 56 Voyage dans L’Amerique Meridionale, 1839, p. 26. 74. C. McLEAN FRASER ‘ tion of the pedicel which supports the ‘‘pinna’’, scarcely corre- sponds. He says ‘‘This (the pedicel) is attached to the rachis by a strong base, is sub-pyriform and cylindrical, is free for about three-fourths of its length, terminating in a rather bluntly rounded, rostrate process on the outer and superior aspect’’. In his drawings he shows this ‘‘rostrate process’’, but I can see no indication of it in the specimens examined. These show the ped- icel to be ‘‘a short, slender, twisted process, about the length of an internode’’, as Clark describes. Trask’s other drawings though somewhat indistinct, bear out several of the points mentioned. SERTULARIA GRACILIS Hincks Sertularia pumila var. JOHNSTON, British Zoophytes, 1848, p. 469. Sertularia gracilis HINCKS, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 262. Sertularia gracilis NuTtInc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 57. Prof. Nutting gives this species in the table of Geographical distribution on p. 46, but does not mention any such distribution in his description of the species on p. 57. SERTULARIA PUMILA Linneus Serularia pumila LiINN&uS, Systema Nature, 1758, p. 807. Sertularia pumila CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 251. Sertularia pumila Nurtinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 51. Distribution.—Coast of California (Clark). SYNTHECIUM CYLINDRICUM (Bale) Sertularella cylindricum Bax, Proe. Linn, Soc., N. S. W., 2nd Ser., IIT, 1888, p. 765. Sertularella halecina Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 61. Synthecium cylindrica Nuttrine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 136. Distribution—San Diego Bay, Cal., 5-12 fathoms (Torrey). Reference is made to this species in the general discussion of the Sertularide. Genus THUIARIA THUIARIA ALBA new species Pl. VII, Figs. 1-2 Trophosome.—The colony reaches a height of about two inches. The main stem is coarse, rigid and but slightly flexuose, provided with several annulations near the base, nodes irregular but quite distinct. The branching is regular, alternate and pin- nate, with commonly three hydrothece between two successive WEST COAST HYDROIDS 15 branches, but. often only two. The branches are not nearly so coarse as the main stem, they are silvery white in appearance, while the stem is much darker. Only occasionally is there any di- vision into internodes. The kydrothece are closely crowded, es- pecially on the branches, so much so that in many instances the upper point where the one hydrotheca leaves the branch is on a level with the next hydrotheca in order. Those on opposite sides alternate quite regularly. Both borders of the hydrotheca are regularly curved, but the inner, upper border is much longer than the outer lower one, so that the even margin of the nearly circular aperture is placed parallel to the axis of the branch, an exception to the general rule among Thuiarian forms. The hydrotheca is largely immersed, seldom more than one-fourth being free. The operculum consists of a single abeauline flap. Gonosome.—Urknown. Distribution—San Juan Archipelago, in both Prof. Kineaid’s and Mr. H. Moon’s collection. Jiderholm** has described and figured a species, Thuiaria kolaénsis, which bears a great resemblance to this species. In T. kolaénsis, however, the branches are turned with the flat side upward, a condition which is sufficiently unusual to be of specific value, and they are usually dichotomously branched near the tip. The branches of 7. alba lie in the same plane as the stem and show no indication of any tendency to dichotomous branching near the tip. Apart from these features, the same description seems to apply to the two. THUIARIA ARGENTEA (Linneus) Sertularia argentea LINNZUS, Systema Nature, 1758, p. 809. Sertularia argentea CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 257. Thuiaria argentea NutTTING, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 741. Thuiaria argenta Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 184. Sertularia argentea TorrREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 67. Thuiaria argentea NuTTING, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 71. Distribution.—One of the commonest species in shallow water off the Alaskan Coast (Nutting) ; San Juan Achipelago. THUIARIA DALLI Nutting Sertularia cupressoides CLARK, Alaskan Hydreids, 1876, p. 220. 57 Northern and Arctic Invertebrates, Part IV, 1909, p. 88, Figs. 17-18. Taf. VIII. 76 C. McLEAN FRASER Thuiaria cupressoides NutTtinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 185. Thuiaria dalli Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 68. Distribution—Shumagin Islands and Port Moller, Alaska (Clark) ; Yakutat, Alaska (Nutting); San Juan Archipelago, Dodd’s Narrows, Departure Bay, Ucluelet. THUIARIA ELEGANS Kirchenpauer Thwaria elegans KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 21. Thuiaria elegans Nuttine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 64. Distribution—Plover Bay, Bering Sea (Krause). THUIARIA FABRICII Levinsen Sertularia fastigiata FAasrRicius, Fauna Grenlandica, 1780, p. 458. Sertularia fabricii LEVINSEN, Vid. Middel. Naturh. Foren., 1892, p. 48. Sertularia fabricii CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 361. Thuiaria fabricti Nuttine, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 185. Thuiaria fabricii NuTTING, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 71. Distribution.—Puget Sound (Calkins); Dutch Harbor and Orea, Alaska (Nutting); San Juan Archipelago, Dodd’s Nar- rOws. THUIARIA KURILA Nutting Sertularia kurile Pa@ppic, Manuscript. Thuiaria kurile Nuvrtinc, American Hydroids Part II, 1904, p. 65. Distribution—Unalaska (Nutting). THUIARIA PLUMOSA Clark Thuiaria plumosa CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 228. Thuiaria plumosa KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 21. Thuiaria plumosa Nutrinc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 74. Distribution—Nunivak Island, Bering Sea, 30 fathoms (Clark) ; Bering Strait (Jaderholm). THUIARIA ROBUSTA Clark Thuiaria robusta CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 227. Thuiaria robusta KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 81. Thuiaria robusta NurTine, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 64. Distribution—Hagmeister Island, King’s Island, Bering Sea (Clark) ; Albatross Station 2875, N. 48° 30’, W. 124° 57’, 40 fathoms; Station 3153, N. 57° 37’ 10”, W. 122° 56’ 20”, 32 fathoms; Station 3504, N. 56° 57’, W. 169° 27’, 34 fathoms; Station 3505, N. 59° 09’, W. 168° 17’, 44 fathoms; Station 3511, N. 57° 32’, W. 169° 38’, 39 fathoms; Station 3515, N. 59° 59’, WEST COAST HYDROIDS 77 W. 167° 53’, 13 fathoms; Station 3540, N. 56° 27’, W. 166° 08’, 51 fathoms (Nutting). THUIARIA fIMILIS (Clark) Pl. VII, Figs. 1-6 Sertularia similis CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 219. Sertularia similis HaRTLauB, Hydroiden aus dem Stillen Ocean, 1891, p- 362. Sertularella nana HarTLatr, Hydroiden aus dem Stillen Ocean, 1891, p- 361. Sertularia similis NuttTinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 185. Sertulareila nana NuTTING, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 105. Thuiaria similis NuTTinc, American Hydroids, Part I, 1904, p. 69. Distribution —Hagmeister Island (Clark) ; Berg Inlet, Glacier Bay, Puget Sound, Albatross Station 2842, N. 54° 15’, W. 166° 03’, 72 fathoms; Station 2865, N. 48° 12’, W. 122° 49’, 40 fath- oms; Station 3465, N. 48° 21’, W. 123° 14’, 48 fathoms; Station 39015, N. 59° 59’, W. 167° 53’, 13 fathoms; Station 3557, N. 57° 04’, W. 170° 24’, 26 fathoms (Nutting) ; San Juan Archipelago, Dodd’s Narrows, Departure Bay. This species is very common in the Puget Sound and the Van- couver Island region, where it shows a very great degree of varia- bility in the arrangement of the hydrothece, and in the shape of these as well. In the typical arrangement on the branches, the hydrothece are in nearly opposite pairs, being quite close to- gether, but in some cases there is a long interval in each ease, while the arrangement may be still opposite or in extreme cases it may become distinctly alternate, so much so that if it were not for the intergrading specimens, one might take it as a distinct species as Hartlaub has evidently done when he describes it as Sertularella naia. This has been copied by Prof. Nutting, though he indicates that he does not think it can belong to the genus Sertularella. The entire range may be found in the same colony, consequently, it is scarcely possible to apply both names satisfactorily. The shape of the hydrothece themselves, is as variable as the arrangement, principally in the extent of their elongation. Some of them are so much lengthened as to become twice the normal length or more, so that they appear as long regularly bent tubes. These elongations occur in what appear to be old colonies, generally those acting as hosts to other hy- droids. It may possibly be a diseased condition. 78 C. McLEAN FRASER Gonosome.—I have seen no description of the gonangia. They were very scarce in the material I examined, but I found several arranged singly, near the extremity of the upper branches, each of the gonangia having its origin at the base of a hydrotheca. The gonangia are oval in shape, narrowing to the attachment and not so much towards the circular opening, a narrow collar being formed. The surface is entirely free from spines and annula- tions. Its length is almost the same as that of the hydrotheca, the breadth being about two-thirds the length. THUIARIA TENERA (Sars) Sertularia tenera Sars, Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydroider, 1873, p. 20. - Sertularia tenera NutTTiING, Hydroids from Alaska and Puget Sound, 1899, p. 83. Thuiaria tenera NutTTINGc, American Hydroids, Part II, 1904, p. 70. Distribution.—Kadiak Island and Bering Strait; Albatross Station, 2865, N. 48° 12’, W. 122° 49’, 40 fathoms; St. Paul’s Island (Nutting). THUIARIA THUIARIOIDES (Clark) Sertularia thuiarioides CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 223. Thuiaria thwiarioides CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 361. Thuiaria thuiarioides Nurtinc, Hydroids of the Harriman Ex., 1901, p. 186. Thuiaria thuiarioides HARTLAUB, Hydroiden aus dem Stillen Ocean, 1901, p. 354. Thuiaria thuiariodes Nurtinc, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 64. Distribution —Bering Sea, West of Nunivak Island, 24 fath- oms, Chignik Bay, Alaska (Clark); Puget Sound (Calkins) ; Yakutat, Alaska; N. 62° 15’, W. 167° 48’ (Nutting). THUIARIA THUJA (Linneus) . Sertularia thuja LINN &UsS, Systema Nature, 1758, p. 809. Thuiaria thuja KIRCHENPAUER, Nordische Gattungen, 1884, p. 18. Thuiaria thuja Nutrine, American Hydroids, Part IT, 1904, p. 62. Distribution—Bering Sea (Stimpson); Albatross Station 2843, N. 53° 56’, W. 165° 56’ 45”, 45 fathoms; Station 3558, N. 56° 58’, W. 170° 09’, 25 fathoms (Nutting); San Juan Archi- pelago, Banks Island. - i WEST COAST HYDROIDS 79 PLUMULARID& Few species of this family have been reported except from tropical and sub-tropical regions. Though the family is rich in genera and species, representatives of only five genera, Aglao- phema, Antenella, Diplocheilus, Nuditheca and Plumularia, have been found off the Pacific Coast of North America, and three of these are represented by a single species. In the new material examined, I have found only two of these, Aglaophenia and Plumularia. The limitations of these genera have been so generally agreed upon, that it is not necessary to discuss them. The genus Antenella Allman, of which Dr. Torrey reports a spe- cies from Catalina Island, Cal.,°* has also been generally accept- ed. The genus Nuditheca has been used by Prof. Nutting®® to include a species collected off the Unalaska Coast by Dall, and named by Clark,®° Macrorhynchia dalli. Macrorhynchia was used by Kirchenpauer™ as a name for one of the four sub-genera into which he divided the genus Aglaophenia, but he did not use it as a generic name. This sub-genus has not been generally rec- ognized, and at any rate the species collected by Dall does not answer the description for the sub-genus. Prof. Nutting evi- dently considered the differences great enough to be of generic value and they are certainly quite marked. The genus Diplo- cheilus Allman has received general acceptance, though Bale does not find it suitable. In the first instance he used the generic name Azygoplon for a species of the same genus, but later he placed Allman’s species, Diplocheilus mirabilis with his own Azygoplon productum, in the genus Kirchenpaueria Jickeli.® Judging from Jickeli’s figures** one must agree with Torrey® and Stechow,®* that such arrangement is not justified. Though 58 Hydroida of the Pacifie Coast, 1902, p. 74. 59 American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 128. 60 Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 230. 61 Ueber die Hydroiden Familie Plumularide, Part I, Aglaophenia, 1872, p. 25. 62 Proce. Linn. Soc., N. S. W., 1888, p. 773. 63 Proc. Linn. Soc., Victoria, 1893, p. 107. 64 Der Bau der Hydroidpolypen, II, 1883, Pl. 28, fig. 27. 65 Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 35. 86 Hydroidpolpyen der Japanischen Ostkiiste, I Teil, 1909, p. 88. 80 C. McLEAN FRASER Bale has shown that the characteristic on which the name was based is a misconception, the name has become established, and is likely to remain. Genus AGLAOPHENIA AGLAOPHENTA DIEGENSIS Torrey Aglaophenia diegensis ToRREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 71. Aglaophenia diegensis ToRREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 33. Distribution—San Diego and False Bay, Cal., 1 to 7 fathoms (Torrey ). AGLAOPHENTA INCONSPICUA Torrey Aglaophenia inconspicua TorREyY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, Saas > Aglaophenia inconspicua ToRREY, Hydroids of San Diego, 1902, p. 34. Distribution.—San Diego, 5 fathoms (Torrey). AGLAOPHENTA LATIROSTRIS Nutting Aglaophenia latirostris Nurtine, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 101. Distribution.—Santa Barbara, collected by Mrs. V. B. Gibbs; Off the Oregon Coast; Puget Sound. AGLAOPHENIA OCTOCARPA Nutting Aglaophenia octocarpa NutTtinG, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 103. Distribution.—C. San Lueas, Lower California (Nutting). AGLAOPHENIA PLUMA (Linneus) Sertularia pluma LINNZUS, Systema Nature, 1767, p. 1309. Aglaophenia pluma Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 73. Aglaophenia pluma Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 34. Distribution.—Off Coronado, Cal. (Torrey). AGLAOPHENIA STRUTHIONIDES (Murray) Plumularia struthionides Murray, Ann. and Mag., 3rd Ser. V, 1860, p. 251. Aglaophenia struthionides CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 272. Aglaophenia struthionides CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 363. Aglaophenia struthionides Nuvrinc, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 102. Aglaophenia struthionides Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 73. Aglaophenia struthionides Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 35. Distribution.—Santa Cruz (Nutting); San Diego (Palmer) ; San Francisco (A. Agassiz) ; Puget Sound (Dr. Steindachner) ;. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 81 Townshend Bay (Calkins); Puget Sound to San Diego (Tor- rey); San Juan Archipelago, Victoria, Port Renfrew, Ucluelet. This is one of the commonest species of hydroids in the Van- couver Island and Puget Sound Region. All phases of growth may be found easily, and at no time is there much indication of variation from the type. Corbule have been present on almost all of the colonies examined, and these show the same constancy of type as is found in the various parts of the trophosome. Genus ANTENELLA ANTENELLA AVALONITA Torrey Antenella avalonia Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 74. Distribution—Avalon, Catalina Island, Cal. (Torrey). Genus DIPLOCHEILUS DIPLOCHEILUS ALLMANT Torrey Halicornia producta Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 75. Dipiocheilus allmani Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 36. Distribution—San Diego and Pt. Loma, Cal. (Torrey). The points of distinction between this species and Diplocheilus mirabilis Allman, as, given by Dr. Torrey, do not seem to be of very great specific value, particularly as he says that ‘‘The im- _maturity and paucity of my material makes it impossible to de- termine the real value of these differences’’.** Stechow** reports a species from the Japanese East Coast, which he considers is the same as Torrey’s. He retains Torrey’s name for it, though in his discussion he states definitely that he thinks there is not enough distinction between D. mirabilis and D. allmani to war- rant it. As neither he nor Torrey found any gonangia, each pre- fers to speak of two distinct species until the presence of these decide the question. Genus NUDITHECA NUDITHECA DALLI (Clark) Macrorhynchia dalli CLark, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 230. Nuditheca dalli Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 129. Distribution—Unalaska and Akutan. Pass, Alaska, on the beach (Clark). 67 Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 36. 68 Hydroidpolypen der Japanischen Ostkiiste, I Teil, 1909, p. 88. 6 82 C. McLEAN FRASER Genus PLUMULARIA PLUMULARIA ALICIA Torrey Plumularia alicia Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 75. Plumularia alicia TorREy, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 37. Distribution—San Diego and Long Beach, Cal. (Torrey). PLUMULARIA CORRUGATA Nutting Plumularia corrugata NuTtTiInG, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 64. Distribution—San Juan Archipelago. 7 Only two specimens of this species were found, in the material dredged by Prof. Kineaid, but these answer definitely to the original description of the species. The distribution is somewhat unusual, if we may speak of unusual distribution among the hydroids, as, since it was first reported from the Coast of Brazil, it has been found only once, so far as I know, and that was off the Hawaiian Islands, by the Albatross in 1903, and reported by Prof. Nutting.® PLUMULARIA ECHINULATA (Lamarck) Plumularia echinulata LAMARCK, Hist. Nat. des An. sans Vert., 1836, p. 162. Plumularia echinulata Hincks, British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 302. Plumularia echinulata var, CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 363. Distribution.—Port Townshend (Calkins). PLUMULARIA GOODEI Nutting Plumularia goodei Nuttine, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 64. Plumularia goodei Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 76 Distribution—Santa Barbara (Nutting); Pacific Grove, Cal. (Torrey) ; Port Renfrew. PLUMULARIA LAGENIFERA Allman Plumularia lagenifera ALLMAN, Proc. Linn. Soc., London, 1885, p. 157. Plumularia californica MARKTANNER-TURNERETSCHER, Ann. des K. K. Nat. Hof., 1890, p. 255. Plumularia lagenifera Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 65. Plumularia lagenifera Torrry, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 77. Plumularia lagenifera var. septifera Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 78. Distribution—Puget Sound (Dr. Steindachner); Coast of 69 Hydroids of the Hawaiian Islands, 1905, p. 951. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 83 California (Clark); Vancouver Island (Allman); Berg Inlet, Popoff Islands (Nutting); San Pedro and Santa Cruz, Cal. (Torrey) ; Catalina Island (Torrey); San Juan Archipelago, Port Renfrew, Ucluelet, Dodd’s Narrows, Hope Island. This species seems as widely distributed in the Vancouver Is- land and Puget Sound region as Aglaophenia struthionides, but as it grows in masses that are much less conspicuous, it may not be so often found as that species is. The majority of the colonies correspond to Allman’s type, but many of them are somewhat similar to Torrey’s variety septifera, but more nearly to that type with the variations described by Ritchie.*° I find as he does, that though many of the intermediate internodes have but one intrathecal ridge, some of them have two. Certain specimens have two or even three athecate internodes at the base of the hydrocladium, between the process that supports the hydrocla- dium and the first thecate internode, each having a single intra- thecal ridge. Occasionally there is more than one intermediate internode between two thecate internodes on the hydrocladium. Torrey states that in his specimens the hydrocladia coming out on the opposite sides of the stem, are in the same plane. I do not find this the case in any specimen. In all cases they come out at an angle of from 100° to 120°, as they do in the regular lagen- tfera type. Ritchie makes no reference to this and his drawing does not make the matter clear. If this characteristic is constant in Torrey’s specimens and the other points that he mentions are always as definite as he says, they would seem to be of specific value. Since I have not found them constant, even in the same specimen, I have included all of them under P. lagenifera. These short forms, however, are worthy of reference on account of the sharp definition of the intrathecal ridges. Marktanner-Turner- etscher has shown this very well in his drawing of P. californica, as he calls it. In the larger specimens the ridges are not nearly so distinct. These short forms have gonangia present, but they are more like the gonangia of P. setacea, quite small in cross- section as compared with the type. PLUMULARIA MEGALOCEPHALA Allman Plumularia megalocephala ALLMAN, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., V, No. 2, 1877, p. 31. 70 Supplementary report on the Hydroids of the Scottish National Antare- tic Expedition, 1909, p. 87. 84. C. McLEAN FRASER Plumularia megalocephala Nurrinc, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 57. Plumularia megalocephala Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 37. Distribution —Off San Diego (Torrey). PLUMULARIA PALMERI Nutting Pl. VII, Figs. 3-4 Plumularia palmert NuttinG, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 65. Distribution—San Diego, Cal., Victoria, B. C. (Nutting) ; Ucluelet. The gonosome of this species has not been hitherto described. Many of the Ucluelet specimens have gonangia arranged along. the greater portion of the length of the stem, while others are less plentifully supplied. These gonangia, as is the case with a good many species of this genus, have their origin by a short pedicel, from the basal process of the hydrocladium. They are irregularly oval in shape, with the distal end usually larger than the proximal. Though in some eases there is a slight narrowing in the nature of a neck at the distal end, this end is usually club- shaped. They are closely applied to the stem for at least a por- tion of their length, and this may account for some of the ir- regularity of shape. They are but little like the gonangia of P. setacea, consequently, the gonosomes show that these two spe- cies are not synonymous, as Torrey says’: I can not see much resemblance in the trophosomes of the two either. In my mate- rial, P. palmeri bears a much greater resemblance to P. lageni- fera, so much so that there seems to be almost a complete series of intergradations between the two. PLUMULARIA PLUMULAROIDES (Clark) Halecium plumularoides CLARK, Alaskan Hydroids, 1876, p. 217. Plumularia plumularoides Nuttinc, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 62. Plumularia plumularoides Torrey, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 78. Plumularia plumularoides Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 38. Distribution—Cape Etolin, 8-10 fathoms, Nunivak Island, Alaska (Clark) ; San Diego, Cal, 15-25 fathoms (Torrey). PLUMULARIA SETACEA (Ellis) Corallina setacea Evuis, Nat. Hist. Cor., 1755, p. 19. - Plumularia setacea LAMARCK, Anim. sans Vert., 1856, p. 165. 71 Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 79. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 85 Plumularia setacea CLARK, Hydroids of the Pacific Coast, 1876, p. 261. Plumularia setacea CALKINS, Some Hydroids of Puget Sound, 1899, p. 362. Plumularia setacea NUTTING, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 56. Plumularia setacea TorREY, Hydroida of the Pacific Coast, 1902, p. 79. Plumularia setacea Torrey, Hydroids of San Diego, 1904, p. 39. Distribution—Santa Barbara (Nutting) ; San Diego, Avalon, San Pedro, and San Francisco, Cal., Victoria, B. C., Pt. Loma, La Jolla, Catalina Island, San Pedro, Monterey, Cal. (Torrey) ; Point Wilson (Calkins) ; San Juan Archipelago. PLUMULARIA VIRGINL# Nutting ’ Plumularia virginie Nuttine, American Hydroids, Part I, 1900, p. 66. Distribution—Santa Barbara, Cal. (Nutting). BIBLIOGRAPHY Only those papers referred to in the text or in the synonymy are listed. Agassiz, A. 1865. North American Acalephe. Illustrated Catalogue of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College. Agassiz, L. 1862. Contributions to the Natural History of the United States, IV. Alder, J. 1856. A Notice of some new Genera and Species of British Hydroid Zoophytes. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Second Series, Vol. XVIII. 1857. A Catalogue of the Zoophytes of Northumberland and Durham. Trans. of the Tyneside Naturalists’ Field Club, III. 1862. Supplement to the Catalogue of the Zoophytes found on the Coast of Northumberland and Durham. Trans. of the Tyneside Nat- uralists’ F. C., V. 1862. Description of some rare Zoophytes found on the Coast of North- umberland. Annals and Magazine Nat. Hist., Third Series, Vol. IX. Allman, G. J. 1863. Notes on the Hydroida. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Third Series, Vol. XI. ia i 1864. On the Construction and Limitation among the Hydroids. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Third Series, Vol. XIII. 1871. A Monograph of the Gymnoblastic or Tubularian Hydroids. Ray Soe. 1877. Report of the Hydroida collected during the Exploration of the Gulf Stream. Mem. of the Mus. Comp. Zool. at Harvard College, Vol! HH. 1885. Description of Australian, Cape and other Hydroids mostly new, from the Collection of Miss H. Gatty. Jour. Linnean Soc., Zoology, London, XIX. 1888. Report on the Hydroida dredged by H. M. S. ‘‘Challenger’’, dur- ing the years 1873-1876. Part I. Vol. XXIII. Bale, W. M. 1888. On some new and rare Hydroida in the Australian Museum Collec- tion. Proce. Linnean Soec., New South Wales, Series 2, Vol. HI. 1893. Further Notes on Australian Hydroids with Description of some New Species. Proc. Royal Soc., Victoria. Bergh, R. S. 1887. Goplepolyper (Hydroider) fra Kara-Havet, in Dijmphna-Togtets Zoologisk-botaniske Udbytte. Billard, A. 1907. Hydroides in Expeditions Scientifiques du ‘‘Travailleur’’ et du ‘*Talisman’’, 88 C. McLEAN FRASER Broch, H. 1909. Hydroiduntersuchungen IJ. Zur Kenntnis der Gattungen Bonne- viella und Lictorella. Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne, Bd. XLVII. 1909. Die Hydroiden der Arktischen Meere. Browne, E. T. 1906. The Hydroids collected by the ‘‘Huxley’’ from the North Side of the Bay of Biscay in August, 1906. Jour. Marine Biological ASSN VOle VALE SNo el: Calkins, G. N. 1899. Some Hydroids of Puget Sound. Proc. Boston Society Natural History. Clark, S. F. 1876. The Hydroids of the Pacific Coast of the United States, South of Vancouver Island, with a Report upon those in the Museum of Yale College. Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. III. 1876. Report on the Hydroids on the Coast of Alaska and the Aleutian Islands Collected by W. H. Dall, from 1871 to 1874. Proc. Acad. Nat. Se., Philadelphia. 1894. Reports on the Dredging Operations off the West Coast of Cen- tral America, to the Galapagos, to the West Coast of Mexico and in the Gulf of California, during 1871. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard. Ellis, J. 1755. An Essay towards the Natural History of the Corallines and other Marine Productions of the like kind found off the Coasts of Great Britain and Ireland. Ellis, J. and Solander, D. 1786. The Natural History of many curious and uncommon Zoophytes collected from various parts of the Globe. Fabricius, O. y 1780. Fauna Grenlandica. Haunie et Lipsie. Fide Nutting. Fewkes, J. W. 1889. New Invertebrata from the Coast of California. 1891. An Aid to the Collector of the Celenterata and Echinodermata of New England. Bull. Essex Institute, Vol. 23. Forbes, E. 1848. A Monograph of the British Naked-eyed Meduse. Ray Society. Hartlaub, C. 1901. Hydroiden aus dem Stillen Ocean. Zool. Jahr., Fifth Series, Vol. XIV. 1905. Die Hydroiden der Magalhaenischen Region und Chilienschen Kiiste. Fauna Chilensis, Vol. III. WEST COAST HYDROIDS 89 Hassell, A. 1852. Description of three species-of Marine Zoophytes. Trans. Micro. Soe. Hincks, T. 1861. A Catalogue of the Zoophytes of South Devon and South Cornwall. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Third Series, Vol. VIII. 1863. On New British Hydroids. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Third Series, Vol, xr 1866. On New British Hydroids. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Third Series, Vol. XVIII. 1868. A History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes. 1874. On Deep-water Hydroida from Iceland. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Fourth Series, Vol. XIII. Jaderholm, E. 1903. Aussereuropdische Hydroiden im Swedischen Reichsmuseum. Arkiv for Zoologi, Vol. L. 1907. Zur Kentnis der Hydroidenfauna der Beringsmeeres. Arkiv for Zoologi, Vol. IV. 1909. Northern and Arctic Invertebrates in the Collection of the Swedish State Museum. IV. Hydroiden. Jickeli, C. F. 1883. Der Bau der Hydroidpolypen. Morphol. Jahrb., Vol. VIII. Johnston, G. H. 1847. History of British Zoophytes, Ed. I. Kirchenpauer, G. H. 1872. Ueber die Hydroidenfamilie Plumularide, Einzelne Gruppen der- selben und ihre Fruchtbehalter. I. Aglaophenia. Abhand- lungen aus dem Gebiete der Naturwissenschaften, Vol. VI. 1884. Nordische Arten und Gattungen von Sertulariden. Abhandl. Geb. Naturwiss. Vol. VI. von Lamarck, J. B. P. 1836. Histoire Naturelle des Animaux sans Vertebres, Second Edition. Lepechin, J. 1781. Nove Pennatule et Sertularie species descripte. Acta Acad. Se. Imp. Petropolitana pro anno 1778. Fide Broch. 1783. Sertularie species due determinate. Acta. Acad. Petr., 1780. Fide Broch. Levinsen, G. M. R. 1892. Om Fornyelsen af Erneringsindividerne hos Hydroiderne. Vid- enskabelige Middehlser fra den Naturhistoriske Forrennig. 1893. Meduser, Ctenophorer og Hydroider fra Grenlands Vestkyst. Vid- ensk. Middel. fra den Naturh. Foren. Linnzus, C. 1758. Systema Nature, 10th Edition. 1767. Systema Nature, 12th Edition. 90 C. McLEAN FRASER MacGillivray, J. 1842. Catalogue of the Marine Zoophytes of the Neighborhood of Aber- deen. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Vol. IX. McCready, J. 1858. Gymnophthalmata of Charleston Harbor. Proc. Elliot Society, Volt. Marktanner-Turneretscher, G. , 1890. Die Hydroiden des K. K. Naturhistorischen Hofmuseums. 1895. Hydroiden in Zoologische Ergebnisse der im Jahre 1889 auf Kosten der Bremer Geographischen Gesellschaft von Dr, Willy Kiiken- thal und Dr. Alfred Walter Ausgefiihrten Expedition nach Ost Spitzbergen. Zool. Jahrb., Vol. VIII. Mayer, A. G. ; 1910. Meduse of the World, Vol. I and II. The Hydromeduse. Car- negie Institute of Washington. Mereschkowsky, C. 1878. New Hydroider from Ochotsk, Kamtschatka and other parts of the North Pacific Ocean. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Fifth Series, Woljshie Murray, A. 1860. Description of New Sertularide from the Californian Coast. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Third Series, Vol. V. Nutting, C. C. 1899. Hydroida from Alaska and Puget Sound. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Vol. XXI. 1899. Hydroids of the Wood’s Hole Region. Bull. U. 8S. Fish Commission. 1900. American Hydroids, Part I. Plumularide. Smithsonian In- stitution. 1901. Papers from the Harriman Alaska Expedition, XXI. The Hy- droids. Proc. Washington Academy of Sciences. Vol. III. 1904. American Hydroids, Part II. Sertularide. Smithsonian In- stitution. fe 1905. Hydroids of the Hawaiian Islands Collected by the Steamer ‘‘ Alba- tross’’ in 1902. Bull. U.S. Fish Commission for 1903. d’Orbigny, A. 1846. Voyage dans 1’Amerique Meridionale, Vol. V., Part 4. Zoophytes. Pallas, P. S. 1766. Elenchus Zoophytorum. Peron et Lesueur. 1809. Tableau des Caractéres Génériques et Spécifiques de toutes les. Espéces de Méduses commes jusqu’a ce jour. Annales du Mu- séum d’Histoire Naturelle, Vol. XIV. Fide Forbes. Ritchie, J. 1907. The Hydroids of the Scottish National Antarctic Expeditiom. Trans. Royal Soc. Edin. Vol. XLV, Part II. a WEST COAST HYDROIDS 91 1909. Supplementary Report on the Hydroids of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. Trans. Royal Soc. Edin., Vol. XLVII, Part I. Sars, G. O. 1873. Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydroider. Videnskabs-Selska- bets Forhandlinger for 1873. Sars, M. 1857. Bidrag til Kundskaben om Middelhavets Littoralfauna, Vol. X. Fide Hincks. 1863. Bemerkninger over fire norske Hydroider. Videnskabs-Selskabets Forhandlinger for 1862, Christiana. Fide Jaderholm. Schneider, K. C. 1897. Hydropolypen von Rovigno, nebst Uebersicht des System der Hy- dropolypen im Allegemein. Zool. Jahrb., Vol. X. Stechow, E. 1909. Hydroidpolypen der Japanischen Ostkiste. Beitrage zur Natur- geschichte Ostasiens. I Teil. Athecata und Plumularide. Thornely, L. R. 1908. Reports on the Marine Biology of the Sudanese Red Sea. X. Hy- droida collected by Mr. C. Crossland. Jour. Linn. Soc., Zoology, XXXII. Torrey, H. B. 1902. The Hydroida of the Pacific Coast of North America with special reference to the Species in the Collection of the University of California. Univ. Cal. Publications, Zoology, Vol. I. 1904. The Hydroids of the San Diego Region. Univ. Cal. Publications, Zoology. Vol. 2, No. 1. Trask, J. B. 1857. On Some New Microscopic Organisms. Proc. Cal. Acad. Se., Vol. I. Verrill, A. E. 1874. Invertebrated Animals of Vineyard Sound. Report of U. S. Fish Commission. Warren, E. 1908. On a Collection of Hydroids mostly from the Natal Coast. Annals of the Natal Government Museum, Vol. I, Part 3. Wright, T. S. 1857, 1858 and 1859. Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, New Series. Fide Hincks and Allman. 1861. Observation on British Zoophytes. Quarterly Journal of Micro- scopical Science. 1862. On the Reproduction of Thaumantias inconspicua. Quarterly - Journal of Microscopical Science. mig A, 4. 5. PLATE I. Crypta huntsmani. Hydranth of an adult zooid showing distribu- tion of tentacles. Hydranth with gonophores present. Group of young zooids showing attachment to the mycelium-like base. Side view of a gonophore. End view of a gonophore. Note.— In these as in all the other drawings the magnification is 30 diameters so that direct comparison can be made for size in any ease. oe PLATE 1 DEL. CLARA A. PRASER, AFTER C. M. FP. West Coast Hyproips Bis, 1. PLATE II. Hydractinia aggregata. Mature nutritive zooid. Mature generative zooid showing large size of the female phores. Young generative zooid showing male gonophores and sea thread cells. : Young generative zooid with mole gonophores. PuaTE 2 CLARA A. FRASER, DEL. APTER C. M, F. West Coast Hyproips PLATE III. Fig. 1. Clytia edwardsi. Part of a branched colony showing gonophores. 2. Single gonangium attached to the stolon. — 3 and 4. Obelia dubia. Gonangia. 5. Calycella pygmea. Single hydrotheea. 6. Calycella syringa. Single hydrotheea. 5 and 6 show the relative size of the two species. 7 and 8. Lovenella producta. Specimens from Dodd’s Narrows. 9 and 10. Specimens from San Juan Archipelago. Difference in size in the two localities is shown. 11. Campanulina forskalea. The only branched specimen. 12 and 13. Single hydrothece growing directly from the stolon, PuaTEe 3 oS) ie, es is C* ARA A. FRASER, DEL. APTER C. M. F. West Coast HyproIps PLATE IV. Halecium pygmeum. Colony made up of several stem joints show- ing position of gonangium. Colony consisting of a single joint showing large female gonophore. Lictorella carolina. Part of a branch showing hydrothece and nematophores. Terminus of one part of the polysiphonic stem. Portion of a polysiphonic stem. "Ss ay 2? ee ee =< y ‘ Me a hal PACA PH VG Ce TN) ie 2 Miny ; meni aba ty aan a nnasmennornnccemanene HME hy : sto mye ees? ei a pilin parca ‘ Pra 1 i cainaap are SDT STS taeda ween AOL arson gu gman tS 1 { West Coast Hyproms PLATE V. Fig. 1. A. I. P. Puysonota Boh. unipunctata Say. A. I. Fd. CassIpA Linn. nigripes Oliv. I. bivittata Say. A.I. El. Bl. CoprocycLa Chev. aurichaleea Fabr. A.I.T.P. signifera Hbst. A.I.T.P. EI. purpurata Boh. A.I. elavata Fabr. A.I. CHELYMORPHA Chev. argus Licht. A.I.S. A LIST OF THE COLEOPTERA OF IOWA SperMOPHAGUS Sch. robiniw Sch. A.I. BL Brucuus Linn. pisorum Linn. Ia. mimus Say. I. Bl. BRUCHID. eruentatus Horn. I.P. BL fraterculus Horn. LI. obteetus Say. Ia. hibisei Oliv. Wi. exiguus Horr. I. B.C.P. bivulneratus Horn. A. E. seminulum Horn. Ames, in doubt. TENEBRIONID&. ELzopes Esch. Diepts Lee. suturalis Say. L. punetatus Lee. LI. tricostata Say. El]. A. B. Lyon, Dick- Utoma Lap. inson, Emmet, and Woodbury Cos. impressa Melsh. A. I. NYCTOBATES Guér. mentalis Horn. I. pennsylvanica DeG. Ia. imberbis Lee. I. Meginus Lec. PARATENETUS Spin. levis Oliv. L. fuseus Lee. A.I. B. HaApPLaNnpeus Lee. DIAPERIS Geoff. femoratus Lee. I. hydni Fabr. Ia. ScoToBaTes Horn. ARRHENOPLITA Aby. ealearatus Fabr. I. viridipennis Fabr. I.C.P. XyLopinus Lee. bicornis Oliv. Ia. saperdioides Oliv. I. W. PLATYDEMA Lap. TENEBRIO Linn. excavatum Say. A.I. EL obseurus Fabr. Ia. ruficorne Sturm. A.I. U.P. BI. molitor Linn. Ia. americanum Lap. D.I. tenebrioides Beauv. Ia. picilabrum Melsh. L. IDIOBATES Csy. subeostatum Lap. I. eastanéus Knoch. E. PHYLETHUS Meg. Buiapstintus Lat. bifaseciatus Say. I. meestus Melsh. A. Ob. BOLETOTHERUS Cand. interruptus Say. I. A. El. bifureus Fabr. A.I. metallicus Fabr. I. B.C. W. MERACANTHA Koby. TRIBOLIUM MacL. eontracta Beauv. A.L. ferrugineum Fabr. I. STRONGYLIUM Koby. eonfusum Duv. I. tenuicolle Say. I. B. CISTELID2. foveata Lec. binotata Say. EI. Tsomima Muis. iowensis Csy. sericea Say. I. El. AnpDRocHIRUS Lee. erythropus Koby. A.TI. HyMenorus Miuls. pilosus Melsh. LI. eurticollis Csy. obseurus Say. A. I. MycetrocHara Berth. fraterna Say. I. megalops Csy. I. VoL. viI—1l. 3 34 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN ARTHROMACRA Kby, enea Say. A.1. TETRATOMA Fabr. truncorum Lec. I. PENTHE Newm. obliquata Fabr. A.I. El. pimelia Fabr. I. SyncHroa Newm. punctata Newm. I. EI. MELANDRYA Fabr. striata Say. I. A. ENCHODES Lec. sericea Hald. C.I. PHL@oTRYA Steph. liturata Lec. A.I. SyMPHORA Lec. flavicollis Hald. I. EustTROPHUS Til. repandus Horn. I. NACERDES Schm. melanura Linn. LI. ASCLERA Schm. puncticollis Say. I. A. PENTARIA Muls. trifasciata Melsh. I. TomMoxia Costa. tridentata Say. A.I. lineella Lec. I. MorRDELLA Linn. scutellaris Fabr. I. R. El. octopunctata Fabr. A.C.I. marginata Melsh. A.I. B. serval Say. A.I. oculata Say. A.H.I.R. discoidea Melsh. A.I. MOoRDELLISTENA Costa. trifasciata Say. Bl. lepidula Lec. I. LAGRIIDZ. Strata Lat. gagatina Melsh. I. MELANDRYID. bicolor Say. A.I.P. W. confinis Lec. Ames, in doubt. tomentosus Say. I. Atwood. HoLostrRoPpHus Horn. bifasciatus Say. I. HALLOMENUS Panz. scapularis Melsh. I. punctulatus Lec. B. ORCHESIA Lat. eastanea Melsh. I. gracilis Melsh. I. CANIFA Lec. plagiata Melsh. I. Notuus Oliv. varians Lec. I. G@DEMERIDZE. ruficollis Say. inte ahe Mycetophagidte 10). Jsie esis since oe Dermestide Histeride Nitidulids Lathridiida Trogositide © 2 Mellamdryadse® Jy cicccteje oslo cereale 19 Gidemeridee sexist 2t.svers1> ern oneeinete 4 Mordellvda— oe. ss =).ic sy enero 25 IMINO a anGaewas as oon oo > 28 IPyOchrOVG 2 wep) eee eee 3 Mreloidae: occ sioner ciciele etre tere meme rnate 15 RH MOTUS | Teese ore ciarelelstenetel erates 5 lidayanimmachs Ghopanandcooadono> 5 Atttelabidees cjicieteseisysienee telnet terrane 2 Otiorbynchidee: 7. <= sieve ma sicre eer tal Curculionids. f25,..<8.0 0s 165 Brenthidiwe bier oe ere 1 Calandridem er. scr utss..- coer 19 Scolytide ...... PT ao 13 7 Wri hol TOR Reem Reka O40" 5 IOWA DISCOMYCETES BY FRED J. SEAVER INTRODUCTION The work of the present paper was begun during the autumn of 1902, under the direction of Professor Thomas H. Macbride, in the State University of Iowa. The work was continued during the four years following this period, the first three of which were spent in Iowa City as a student of the University and the fourth at Mt. Pleasant in charge of the biological work in Iowa Wesleyan University. To Professor Macbride and the various members of the botanical department of the State University I am indebted not only for free access to the mate- rial in the collections of that department, but for constant sug- gestions and aid on the numerous questions which have arisen during the course of the work. Having since taken up my residence in New York City access to the libraries and collections of the New York Botanical Gar- den has afforded the opportunity to put the manuscript of the Iowa Discomycetes into better form. The library facilities of this institution have made it possible to confirm the citations of nearly all the species named, and to correct determinations in several cases; to the authorities of this institution I wish to ac- knowledge my indebtedness for the privilege of completing the work begun in Iowa. A preliminary paper on the Discomycetes of Eastern Iowa was published in the spring of 1904* and the present paper stands in part as a revision of that work with the addition of work done subsequent to the time of that publication. The present work includes, not only the work of the writer but all the infor- mation which he has been able to accumulate from other sources on this part of the fungous flora of Iowa. 1 Bull, Lab. Nat. Hist. State Univ. Ia. V. pp. 335-406. VOL. vi—I. 4 42 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Since the publication of the Discomycetes of Eastern Iowa, five new species and one variety have been described by various authors based on material collected in connection with this work and this opportunity is taken to bring together all of these facts and publish them as one work. The new species referred to are as follows: Spherosoma echinulatum Seaver, Schlerotina seaveri Rehm, Dermatea olivascens Rehm, Gorgoniceps iowensis Rehm, Sclerotinia tiliae Reade, and Helotiwm citrinulum seaveri Rehm. The first of these has since been twice reported from Europe and the second has been collected and studied in New York State. This work is not intended as a monograph and for this reason no attempt has been made to straighten the many nomenclatural tangles which have arisen, such matters being left to those to whose lot it shall fall to prepare the much-needed monograph of the North American Discomycetes. While an attempt has been made to recognize the first published specific name, where there is a clear case, few new combinations have been made. The ques- tion of the validity of several genera has arisen and in some eases noted but it is thought best to leave such matters also to those who may have the time to go into the study of the nomen- elature of this group of plants more thoroughly. The drawings were the most of them made from fresh mate- rial and before leaving Iowa. When it became necessary to use dried specimens these were carefully soaked up before using. In the case of large plants the drawing is natural size but when the specimens are very small, both a natural size sketch and an enlarged view have been made to show gross characters. No attempt has been made to draw spores and asei to a common scale throughout. Such drawings are aimed to show the form of the ascus, spore arrangement, spore-form, and internal and external markings. For the relative size of the microscopic char- acters the reader must depend upon the measurements given with the descriptions. This article is offered mainly as a guide to local students and while it comprises the sum of the knowledge of the discomycete flora of Iowa so far as I have been able to accumulate it, the subject is a large one and I have reason to believe can searcely be more than touched upon in an article of this size. It is hoped = oe IOWA DISCOMYCETES 43 that other students may take up the work where it is left and carry it on to its completion. To say that there are five hundred species of this group in Iowa would, to my mind, be only a reasonable estimate. To the various individuals who have contributed to this work acknowledgments are made in the proper place and need not be repeated here. However in addition to the members of the botanical department of the State University of Iowa, I wish to express thanks to Professor L. H. Pammel of Iowa State College for his kindness in loaning to me for study the discomycetes in the Holway collection of that institution. For characteristics and life-history of the group the reader will consult the lowa Natural History Bulletin already cited. CLASSIFICATION. The classification adopted in this paper is for the most part that offered in Engler & Prantl, Natiirlichen Pflanzen Familien with some variation and the introduction of several genera not recognized in that work. Only such orders, families, and genera are included in the key as are represented by species described in this paper. KEY TO THE ORDERS. Hymenium exposed from the first. : : ; I. HELVELLINEZ. Hymenium at first closed. Hymenium open at an early stage, without firm covering. : : : : ‘ . II. PEZIZINEZA Hymenium enclosed in a firm covering, opening at maturity. Opening with astellate or irregular aperture. IIT. PHACIDIINE. Elongate, opening with a slit-like aperture. IV. HYSTERIINEZ. KEY TO THE FAMILIES. HELVELLINE. Receptacle borne on a stem. Pileus clavate or knob-like; asci non-operculate. 1. Geoglossaceae Pileus capitate or pileate; asci operculate. 2. Helvellaceae eteptackersemmite 5 eM See ee 3. Rhizinaceae 44. NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN PRZIZINEA. Receptacle fleshy or waxy, rarely gelatinous; ends of paraphyses free. Peridium and hypothecium of nearly the same structure. Receptacle open from the first, convex, peri- dium wanting or poorly developed. . 4, Pyronemaceae Receptacle at first concave; peridium devel- oped, fleshy. Asci at maturity forming an even layer. . 5. Pezizaceae Asci at maturity emergent. : : 6. Ascobolaceae Peridium forming a more or less well cecren tiated layer. Peridium composed of elongate, thin, bright- walled cells, parallel with each other forming the pseudo-parenchyma. . . 7%. Helotiaceae Peridium composed of roundish or angular, thin, dark-walled cells, forming a pseudo-parenchyma. . . . §&. Mollisiaceae Receptacle leathery or cartilaginous; sine of para- physes united to form an epithecium. Receptacle free from the first, never inclosed in &@ membrane. . : . 9. Patellariaceae Receptacle at first sanereon ier. breaking through the epidermis, cup- or beaker- shaped often at first inclosed in a mem- brane. , : ; : : : ‘ . 10. Cenangiaceae PHACIDIINE. Fleshy, white, bright colored, never black, sur- rounded by the torn edges of the epidermal covering. . : 3 Sry. wee . « IL1. Stictidaceae HYSTERIINEX. Apothecia free, carbonaceous, black, round or most- lyidimear.’ = +. ~ a af % 2° 12. Hystensceae KEY TO THE GENERA. 1. GEOGLOSSACES. Receptacle globose or pileate, margin free. . . . LEOTIA. Receptacle spoon-shaped, adnate with the stem. : . SPATHULARIA. 2. HELVELLACE. Pileus hollow entirely or in the upper part only; cavity of pileus continuous with that of the stem. Upper surface of the pileus marked by deep pits. MORCHELLA. IOWA DISCOMYCETES Upper surface of pileus spirally folded or convo- i Se a rere eS Pileus membranaceous, bell-shaped or ragged, attached to the stem by the central part only. . . . HELVELLA. 3. RHIZINACE2. Spores globose, root-like processes wanting. . . SPH#ROSOMA 4. PYRONEMACE. Receptacle seated on a spider-web-like, or felt-like mass of hyphz, hypothecium well developed, fleshy; peridium poorly developed. .- . . . . PYRONEMA - 5. PEZzIZACEZm. Spores globose. Receptacle externally clothed with bristly hairs. SPHZROSPORA. Receptacle externally smooth or nearly so, not bristly. Receptacle large, cup-shaped, brown. . . DETONIA. Receptacle small, nearly plane or disc-shaped. BaRL2A. Spores elliptical, blunt, rarely pointed. Receptacle externally hairy. 5 At first buried in the ground, margin splitting. SARCOSPHZRA. Not buried in the ground, margin remaining even. . : : : : : 2 . . LACHNEA. Receptacle smooth or nearly so externally. Cups or discs regular in outline. Juice colorless. Spores smooth or rough, not reticulate. Plants entirely sessile. Large cup-shaped. - - : : PEZIZA, Small dise-shaped. Plants bright colored, spores hyaline. HUMARra. Plants dark colored, spores brown. PH#XOPEZIA. Plants stipitate. Stem stout, short. Stem even, not grooved. . . . GEOPYXIS. Stem uneven, with longitudinal grooves. . : : : : ACETABULA. Stem long, slender. . . . . . MACROPODIA. Spores reticulate, with a net work, exter- nallys =: ee, fa. kn, a) ge EA Jae neve eee fe Ps hm GALACTINIA. Cups irregular, split on one side. . . . OTIDEA. 46 6. ASCOBOLACEZ. Spores hyaline. Asci 8-spored. Receptacle smooth or at least not hairy. Receptacle clothed with hairs. Asci 16 to many-spored. Plants large, 1 to 2 mm, in eee at first conical. : Plants small mostly ieee than 1 mm. depressed: Spores at first hyaline becoming ad Spores free in the ascus. . eens ee Spores united in a ball in the ascus. 7. HELOTIACER. Receptacle between fleshy and waxy, or waxy, thick or membranaceous. Receptacle fleshy-waxy, bright colored fragile or dull leathery. Plants externally tomentose. Plants externally smooth. Receptacle not springing from a sclerotium, Substratum green. Substratum not colored. 2 Receptacle springing from a sclerotium. Receptacle waxy, thick, tough or membranaceous. Externally hairy. Plants stipitate. Plants entirely sessile. Externally smooth. Spores elliptical to fusiform. Plants slender stipitate. Plants with stem short, stout or wantin: Spores linear or much elongated, many-sep- tate. : . = ‘ : becoming several- Receptacle spores celled. cartilaginous ; 8. MOLLISIACE. Receptacle fleshy-waxy or rarely membranaceous. Receptacle cartilaginous, horny when dry. 9. PATELLARIACE. Spores with transverse septa only. Plants patellate. Spores hyaline 3 to many-septate. NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN ASCOPHANUS. LASIOBOLUS. THECOTHEUS. RHYPAROBIUS. ASCOBOLUS. SACCOBOLUS. . SARCOSCYPHA. . CHLOROSPLENIUM. CIBORIA, SCLEROTINIA. . DASYSCYPHA. TRICHOPEZIZA. PHIALEA. HELOTIUM. GORGONICEPS. . CORYNE. . MOLLISIA. ORBILIA. PATELLARIA. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 47 Spores brown 1 to 3-septate. Spores l-septate. . . . . ++ #. « KARSCHIA. Spures s-Seprates 9. te MYCOLECIDEA. Plants hysteropatelliiform. . . a oaess HYSTEROPATELLA, Spores muriform. . . . . «© ~. « © « BLITRYDIUM. 10. CENANGIACES. Plants sessile or subsessile. Receptacle when fresh, leathery, horny or waxy. Stroma entirely wanting. . ee eee CENANGIUM. Stroma more or less well ieecioned. Asci 8-spored. . : : : - : . DERMATEA. Asci many-spored. . é : : : . TYMPANIS. Receptacle when fresh gelatinous. Spores simple. Apothecium within watery, shrinking much when-dry. .. . See cece | 4-4 Sp OARCOSOMAS Apothecium within not watery. . : . BULGARIA. Spores much elongated, many-septate. . . HoLWAYA. Plants stipitate, large, urn-shaped. . ea \<.. UBNULA. 11. STICTIDACE. Plants elongated; asci 8-spored; spores simple. . . PROPOLIS. 12. HYSTERIACEX. Spores with transverse septa only. Spores-colored, brown, . -.- . +. ~- .» HYSTERIUM. Spores hyaline. Spores I-septate. . © =. -. «- + #« GLONIUM. Spores becoming 3-septate. . . GLONIELLA. Spores muriform (with both transverse and dong itaadi- pA 2) 029) Do SA ee ee pee oa ee HyYSTEROGRAPHIUM. ORDER I. HELVELLINEA. Receptacle vertical, stipitate, mitrate, pileate, or clavate; hy- menium superior, exposed from the first; substance between fleshy and waxy, rarely gelatinous. FAMILY 1. GEOGLOSSACEA. Receptacle fleshy, waxy, or gelatinous; fructification separated into a sterile stem and fertile receptacle; hymenium on the out- side of the receptacle, always exposed; asci clavate, non-opercu- late. 48 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN SPATHULARIA Pers., Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 36. 1797. Receptacle fleshy, stipitate, vertical, compressed laterally, ex- tending down two opposite sides of the stem; spores 8, filiform, hyaline, paraphyses filiform. One species found in the northeast part of the state. SPATHULARIA CLAVATA (Schaeff.) Sace., Michelia 2:77. 1880. Plate a, fy 1: Elvela clavata Scheff., Icon. Fung. pl. 149. 1767. Spathularia flavida Pers., Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 3n. 1797. Receptacle spatulate, compressed, nearly even, yellow; margin often crisped, or undulated, 2 to 5 em. high; stem light colored, whitish ; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores filiform, 50 to 60 by 2 to 3y, guttulate or granular within; paraphyses filiform, branched, numerous. On the ground in pine woods, summer; collected by B. Shimek, Winneshiek county. Plants distinguished by their yellow color. The pileus is flat- tened laterally so as to be spoon-shaped or spatulate and is often much contorted and twisted. A note from Mr. Holway after the publication of the Discomy- eetes of Eastern Iowa states that this species has been found in but one locality in the northeast part of the state, in a piece of pine timber where it grows on the ground among leaves and twigs. This stands as a correction to the statement made in the paper quoted above that these plants are common. LEOTIA Pers., Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 17. 1797. Receptacle stipitate, gelatinous, pileate, roundish or spreading, revolute, at the margin; hymenium covering the upper surface and margin of the pileus, under surface sterile; hymenium undu- lated or even; stem cylindrical or laterally compressed; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores fusiform or linear, hyaline. LEOTIA STIPITATA (Bose.) Schr., Nat. Pfl. Fam. 1:166. 1897. Plates, f. a1: Tremella (hygromitra) stipitata Bose., Berl. Mag. 5: 89. 1811. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 49 Plants stipitate, 2 to 4 em. high by 1 to 2-em. broad; pileus globose or spreading, smooth, dark xruginous-green; stem long, fiattened or twisted, lighter colored than the pileus, yellowish or slightly greenish, covered with minute hair-like structures or nearly smooth; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores guttulate and granular within, 20 by 5; paraphyses filiform. On soil in woods among leaves, summer and fall, Iowa City. The pileus in this species is very dark green and in some cases so dark as to appear almost black and contrasts strongly with the lighter colored stem. The plants seem to grow for the most part solitary. LEOTIA LuBRICA (Seop.) Pers., Syn. Fung. 613. 1801. Plate 2, f. 1. Elvela lubrica Scop., Fl. Carn. 2: 477. 1772. _Plants growing in ecespitose clusters, stem and pileus more or less irregular in form and appearing tremulous and rather soft; pileus irregular, convolute, at first golden-yellow becoming brownish to greenish when dry, stem and pileus when fresh of nearly the same color; asci cylindrical, 8-spored: spores elliptical to fusoid, 25 by 8u; paraphyses filiform. In woods on soil among leaves, Iowa City. The specimens described here under this name were decidedly different in color and in general appearance from the preceding species. There was no trace of green in the fresh specimens the color resembling that of Spathularia clavata, but as the speci- Mens dried they assumed more or less of a green color and those placed in aleohol became quite decidedly green in color. The stems of pileus of this species are much more irregular than those of the preceding species in the specimens observed by us. FAMILY 2. HELVELLACEZ. Plants fleshy, separated into stem and pileus; stem sharply distinguished from the receptacle, for the most part hollow, frag- ile; receptacle pileate, covered outside with the hymenium, which is always exposed, composed of asci and well developed paraphy- ses; asci operculate; spores elliptical, hyaline or faintly yellow- ish. 50 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN MORCHELLA Pers., Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 36. 1797. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Pileus free half way up. M. hybrida.. Pileus not free. Stem much smaller than the head, ribs thick, pits deep. Plants large, more than 4 em, high, usually yellow. Pits irregular, head rounded, : M. esculenta. Pits longitudinally inclined, head conical. M. conica. Plants small, usually much less than 4 em. high, cinereous. Sal OOD lo" age Se M. deliciosa. Stem very much enlarged below, ribs very thin, pits shallow. . M. crassipes. *MORCHELLA HYBRIDA (Sow.) Pers., Syn. Fung. 620. 1801. Plate 3, £m: Helvella hybrida Sow., Eng. Fungi, 238. 1797. MORCHELLA ESCULENTA (L.) Pers., Syn. Fung. 618. 1801. Plate: 2. 3f im, Phallus esculentus Linn., Fl. Suee. 455. 1755. Pileus rounded, ovate or oblong, adnate at the base, ribs thick; pits large, deep, irregular; stem even, not much enlarged at the base; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical, 20-22 by 10n; paraphyses filiform, slightly thickened above. On the ground in open places among grass, spring, Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant. Probably common throughout the state. This is much valued on account of its edible qualities and is often gathered in large quantities for this purpose The species is common and the plants very variable in form and size. *MORCHELLA CONICA Pers., Trait. Champ. 257. 1818. Plate 3, f. 1. MoRCHELLA DELICIOSA Fries, Syst Mye. 2:8. 1822. Plate 2.) i: n: Pileus subeonical, ribs rather thick, longitudinally inclined, deep, rather dark colored within, grayish, with the edges of the ribs lighter, yellowish; stem short, scarcely as long as the pileus, *Species are described in the preliminary paper already named. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 51 slender above and a little enlarged below and more or less ir- regular, nearly smooth; asci cylindrical, 8-spored, spores ellip- tical, 20 zy 10z. _ On the ground in grassy places, spring, Iowa City. This and the following species were collected in the same local- ity and growing together but were so different in size and gen- eral appearance that they would at once be recognized as differ- ent species. The pits in this species were decidedly grayish within with the edge of the ribs lighter while in WM. crassipes the pits and ribs are of uniform color. The great difference in size is also a prominent feature. MoRCHELLA CRASSIPES (Vent.) Pers., Syn. Fung. 621. 1801. Pileus subeonical, yellowish to slightly brownish, adnate at the base; ribs very irregular, thin; pits large, irregular, shallow, of the same color as the ribs; stem very large and irregular, en- larged much toward the base, 10-15 em. high; spores 20 to 23 by 10 to 12z. On the ground in open, grassy places, Iowa City, spring. This species is quite different from any of the preceding forms. The pits are very large and irregular and the ribs are very thin. The large size of the whole stem is a distinguishing character and this is still more enlarged toward the base and often very irregu- lar in form. GYROMITRA Fries, Summa Veg. Seand, 346. 1849. Receptacle pileate, stipitate, margin refiexed, covered above by the hymenium; substance fleshy; stem short, slender, even; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical or elongate-elliptical, smooth; paraphyses filiform. One species found in the state. GYROMITRA ESCULENTA (Pers.) Fries, Summa Veg. Seand., 346. 1849. Plate 4, f. 1. Helvella esculenta Pers., Syn. Fung. 618. 1801. Pileus inflated, irregularly undulated or convolute, brown, margin adnate with the short stem; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; 52 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN spores 20 by 10; paraphyses enlarged upwards and containing coloring matter. On the ground, Iowa City. Several specimens of this species have been collected by Pro- fessors Macbride and Shimek. The plants are very attractive from their large size and peculiar form. HELVELLA Linn., Sp. Pl. ed. 2, 1649. 1763. Receptacle pileate, supported by the center, deflected, concave and sterile beneath; upper surface of the pileus covered by the hymenium which is even; stem always present, united by the center to the pileus, hollow or filled with cavities; in mature plants pileus compressed, lobate, substance waxy-membrana- ceous; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical, smooth ; para- pitrses linear. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Stem slender, even. . re we ms at ne. (one Roe D aseeiit eae Stem stout, with deep eieome: Plants entirely white or whitish, . . . » A. onspa: Plants with pileus dark brownish to pincisen: . . M. lacunosa. *HELLVELLA ELASTICA Bull., Champ. 299. 1809. Plate bof; *HELVELLA CRISPA (Scop.) Fries, Syst. Mye., 2:14. 1822 Platevb: £4. Phallus crispus Scop., Fl. Carn. 2: 475. 1772. HELVELLA LAcUNOSA Afzel, Act. Holm., 304. 1785. Pileus inflated, unequally lobed, cinereous-black ; margin of the pileus adnate with the stem; stem rather slender as compared with the preceding, and often more or less twisted, yellowish, lighter than the pileus; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores 1- seriate, elliptical, 18 by 104; paraphyses filiform, slender. On the ground in woods, Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant. Distinguished from the preceding by the darker pileus and more slender stem. The plants of this species vary much in size, specimens collected in Iowa City are from 2 to 6 em. high while those collected in Mt. Pleasant were much smaller on the IOWA DISCOMYCETES 53 average not more than 2 cm. The color of the pileus also varies somewhat but in all the specimens examined is decidedly darker than the stem. FAMILY 3. RHIZINACE®. Receptacle fleshy-waxy, brittle, sessile. Hymenium exposed from the first, plane or convex. Asci cylindrical, operculate. Paraphyses numerous, free. SPHZROSOMA Klotzseh; Dietrich Fl. Boruss 467. 1841. Receptacle fieshy, sessile, conyolute, roundish, outer surface covered entirely by the hymenium, within sterile. Asci cylin- drical. Sporidia spherical, verrucose, hyaline. SPHZROSOMA ECHINULATUM Seaver., Jour. Myce. 11: 2-5. 1905. Plate 6, a—g. Plants gregarious or scattered, occasionally crowded, sessile, 1 to 8 mm. in diameter; at first almost spherical and regular in outline, becoming convolute with age, especially on the upper surface, often umbilicate; lower surface sterile, nearly plane, attached to the soil near the center by delicate hyphx, very easily detached; at first white or whitish becoming reddish- brown on the exposed surface, then dark brown; the color be- gins with a brown spot in the center of the upper surface and spreads until if covers all of the exposed surface: at maturity having a brown velvety appearance due to the large. brownish paraphyses which extend far beyond the asci; under surface light colored; hymenium at maturity covering the exposed sur- face of the plant, composed of very large asci and paraphyses; asci 40 to 50 by 300 to 500y, clavate, 8-spored; spores globose, at first smooth, filled with numerous guttule, and surrounded with a transparent exospore, gradually becoming rough on the outside, at maturity covered with spines which are several times as .. 2 as broad; spines 4 to 5z in length by 2 to 2.54 broad at the base, often bent at their apices, at maturity extending to the outer surface of the exospore; spore, excluding exospore 25u in diameter, including spines or exospore, 354 in diameter; para- physes large, clavate, septate, brownish, 12 to 15» in diameter 54. NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN at the apex; sterile part of the receptacle composed of rather loosely interwoven hyphex, grading into pseudo-parenchyma; cells large. Habitat—On the surface of damp soil between the tufts of grass in an open place, in the margins of woods near Iowa City. Plants collected from June to October. Also reported from Europe. ; The specific name under which these plants are described is suggested by the character of the markings of the spores, which are distinetly echinulate. The description and measurements given above were made from fresh material collected at different times. Specimens pre- served in alcohol vary somewhat; the most of the color disap- pears and the plants are a little contracted and the measure- ments are therefore a little less. The plants described above were collected during the later part of the month of June in the summer of 1904, in large num- bers in a ravine near Iowa City and upon examination were at onee referred to this genus. The individuals are at first almost spherical in form, smooth on the outer surface, and of a whitish or lead color. As they mature, a small, brown spot is formed in the center of the supper surface, the brown color gradually spreading until it covers all of the exposed surface. They are at first regular in outline, becoming, at maturity, irregularly con- volute and more or less depressed, so that at maturity the plants are roundish but more or less irregular in form, of a deep brown color and with a soft velvety appearance. Examination of sec- tions of young plants shows the brown spot on the upper surface to be the beginning of the development of the hymenial layer and the brown color and velvety appearance to be due to the large paraphyses which contain brown coloring matter. The writer has not had opportunity to revisit the type locality of this species since the original collection was made in 1904, so that no statement can be made as to its reoccurrence there and so far as noted it has not since been reported from this country. It is interesting to note that one year after the collection of this species in America it was collected in Europe and dis- tributed by Dr. Rehm in his Ascomycetes. It was later col- IOWA DISCOMYCETES 55 lected and distributed the second time. Examination of the foreign material shows it to be identical in every way with that collected in Iowa. ORDER II. PEZIZINE. Receptacle well developed, fleshy or more or less leathery, gen- erally regular, at first closed, spherical (except in Pyronemaceae) gradually opening, becoming shallow, cup-shaped or beaker- shaped or dise-like ; hymenium forming a covering on the upper, inner surface, composed of asci and paraphyses arranged in the form of a palisade. FAMILY .4. PYRONEMACE. Receptacle seated on a mass of thread-like hyphe; hymenium at length plane or convex; peridium wanting or poorly devel- oped. PYRONEMA Carus, Nov. Act. Acad. Nat. Cur. 17: 370. 1835. Receptacle seated on a mass of hyphex, fleshy, at first spherical, then expanded; peridium very poorly developed or wanting; spores elliptical, hyaline. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants very small scarcely more than 1 mm. in diame- LOMA HCl Wate ee ee PB ae eae . P. omphalodes. Plants 1 to 3 mm. in diameter, dark red. . : : ‘ P. melaloma. PYRONEMA OMPHALODES (Bull.) Fuckel, Symb. Mye. 319. 1869. Plate .7, £1. Peziza omphalodes Bull., Champ. France 264. 1809. Aleuria omphalodes Gill., Discom. 48. 1888. Pyronema confluens Tul., Carp. 2: 197. 1865. Plants fleshy, gregarious or confluent 1 mm. in diameter, forming confiuent masses 1 to several cm. in diameter; pale red to salmon-color, surrounding mycelium white; hymenium plane or convex; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical, 10 to 12 by 7u; 2 to 3 guttulate and granular within; paraphyses en- larged upwards and filled with coloring matter. 56 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN On charcoal and ashes where fire has been; Iowa City. The form described in the Discomycetes of Eastern Iowa as P. aurantio-rubrum Fuckel was probably rather a poor specimen of the above. After the publication of that paper the present species was found in abundance on burnt places in wet weather. The beautiful salmon-colored patches on burnt ground were quite attractive. In the winter of 1906 this species was observed commonly in the propagating house of the New York Botanical Garden where if occurred in abundance on soil which had been sterilized by heating. It grew abundantly for a time and finally disappeared. The gardener reported it to be very common but apparently it did no harm. Also during the autumn of 1907 the species was observed com- monly in North Dakota where it occurred on moist soil along roadsides. It seemed to appear here where no traces of fire were evident but it may have followed prairie fires. Usually it is common only on burnt places. *PYRONEMA MELALOMA (Fries) Sacce., Syll. Fung. 8:107. 1889. Plate 9, 4..at. Pezza melaloma Fries., Syst. Mye. 2: 68. 1822. Saceardo seems to have made a difference between this and Peziza melaloma Alb. & Schw. which we have described as Lachnea melaloma (Alb. & Schw.) Saece. The two forms col- lected by the writer and described under these different names seem to be distinct although both occur on burnt soil and are in other ways similar. Whether they should be placed in different genera is uncertain. The form described here is smaller, of a brighter color and the exterior is not so distinctly hairy. The plants of this species have been found to be common, and occur in dense crowded masses. FAMILY 5. PEZIZACEA. Receptacle for the most part borne on the surface, not im- mersed in the substratum, sessile or stipitate, externally smooth or clothed with hairs, fleshy, at first closed then opening with a IOWA DISCOMYCETES ae small aperture at the top and gradually expanding; peridium and hypothecium composed of loose roundish cells; asci not pro- truding at maturity, often operculate (opening by a lid-like structure) ; spores hyaline. SPHAROSPORA Sace., Michelia, 1: 594. 1879. Receptacle sessile, at first hemispherical, then expanding, ex- ternally clother with simple, sharp-pointed, septate hairs; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores globose with one large oil-drop; smooth or beset with spines, arranged in one row in the ascus; paraphyses thickened above and filled with colored granules. In external appearance the plants of this genus resemble those of the genus Lachnea but differ in the globose spores. Two forms have been collected by the writer which seem distinct. KEY TO THE SPECIES Plants small, mostly 2 to 5 mm. on burnt places. . . SS. confusa. Plants large 5 to 10 mm. in diameter, on damp soil iene ees ee ee > 6B: semtellotdes. _ SpHzRosporA (Sarcoscypha) SCUTELLOWES Ellis, Bull. Torrey Cl. 9:18. 1882. Plate 8, f. 1. Cups gregarious or scattered, hemispherical, then depressed, 5 to 10 mm. in diameter, dark reddish-brown, clothed externally with numerous, short, septate, brown hairs, which are often en- larged near the base; asci cylindrical, 8-spored, 14 by 150 to 1604; spores globose, 1-guttulate, 13 to 15u in diameter; para- physes filiform, enlarged at their apices. On damp soil in woods among moss, Iowa City. The plants described here were at first referred to Sphaero- spora confusa (Cooke) Sace. but seem to differ from that species in the size of the plants and also in the habitat with perhaps some difference in spore sizes. The plants described here are of about the size and general appearance of Lachnea scutellata ex- cept that the color is darker more brown than red. These plants were found by the writer in the same place each year while re- maining at Iowa City. Also specimens of the same form were collected during the VoL. vi—1. 5 58 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN fall of 1906 in similar localities in the woods of the New York Botanical Garden. SPHZROSPORA CONFUSA (Cooke) Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 190. 1889. Peziza confusa Cooke, Mycogr., 69. On the ground where a pile of wood had been burned, woods, Iowa City. The plants of this species differ from the preceding mainly in the size of the cups and the habit as well as the habitat. The plants were found in quantity growing in a dense mass on a burnt place. The preceding species occurs on mossy banks in rather sandy places, the cups are more or less scattered, never densely crowded, and much larger. The preceding form has been studied in such localities for several years in succession. DETONIA Sace., Syll. Fung., 8:105. 1889. Cups large, fleshy, expanded, discoid, brown; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores globose, hyaline, smooth or rough. DETONIA TRACHYCARPA (Curr.) Sacc., Syll. Fung., 8:105. 1889. Plate 14, f. 1. Peziza trachycarpa Curr., Trans. Linn. Soc., 24: 493. 1864. Discina trachycarpa Karst., Act. Soc. Fauna FI. Fenn., 2: 113. 1885. Plicaria trachycarpa Boud., Bull. Soe. Mye. France, 1: 102. 1885. Aleuria trachycarpa Gill., Discom., 207. Plicariella trachycarpa Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt FI1., 1° : 996. 1896. Cups at first closed, soon expanded and nearly plane, umbili- cate, scattered, or densely crowded, becoming very irregular with age, often contorted and twisted especially when crowded; hy- menium dark brownish-black, more or less uneven; cups exter- nally granular; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores globose, about 15p in diameter becoming very rough with more or less elon- gated ridges; paraphyses filiform, enlarged upwards and filled with brown coloring matter. yy, "+ IOWA DISCOMYCETES 59 On burnt ground, Iowa City. The plants of this species were found to be abundant on burnt places during the autumn of 1904 in woods near Iowa City. The plants from which the above description was drawn were collected in woods in which large numbers of trees had been ent and the brush burned in various places. The plants when scat- tered are nearly plane but when crowded, as they often are they become very irregular with age and the brown mass, often sev- eral em. in diameter, becomes very attractive on account of the peculiar forms which the cups assume. The spores are very rough and close examination shows the roughenings to be in the form of interrupted ridges rather than rounded wart-like eleva- tions. BARLMA Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 111. 1889. Plants small, coneave or depressed, often becoming convex, not exceeding 1 cm. broad and usually much less, mostly bright eolored; asci cylindrical, 8spored; spores perfectly globose, smooth, reticulate, spinulose or verrucose. Several species have been collected four of which are de- seribed here. The plants of this genus and the genus Humaria which differ only in the form of the spores are most beautiful objects for study and the forms which occur in Iowa are num- erous but unfortunately on account of the small size of the plants they are often overlooked. The plants of these two gen- era occur on moist ground often among moss or on entirely naked soil. Mossy banks in, often small, sheltered places by the road- sides furnish a most favorable habitat for these minute plants and searcely such a place can be found which in the proper season does not furnish some one or many of these delicate forms. On account of the small size and delicate structure of the plants of this genus they are not easy to preserve in the usual way and for this reason material for comparison is difficult to obtain. Several smooth-spored forms were collected which could not be determined with any degree of certainty and for that reason are not included in this list. 60 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN KEY TO THE SPECIES. Spores with reticulate markings. Plants large 2 to 5 mm. in diameter. Plants small 1 to 2 mm. in diameter. Spores not reticulate. Spores spinulose, plants yellow. . . . . OB. crec’hqueraultii. Spores verrucose, plants purplish. B. amethystina. . miniata. . cinnabarina. bh BARLZA MINIATA (Crouan) Sacc., Syll. Fung. 8: 111. 1889. Plate 12, f. 1. Ascobolus minatus Crouan, Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 10: 197. 388. Lamprospora miniata De Notaris, Comm. Critt. It. 1: 388. 1864. Crouama mimata Fuckel, Symb. Mye. 320. 1869. Peziza crouani Cooke, Mycogr. 13. Plants small, 2 to 5 mm. in diameter, at first concave, becom- ing nearly plane, orange; asci very long, cylindrical to clavate, 150 by 16 to 18; 8-spored; spores globose with large central oil-drop, externally delicately reticulated, 154 in diameter; re- ticulations regular with the meshes rather small; paraphyses slender, enlarged upwards, filled with orange granules. On rather sandy soil among moss, Iowa City. One collection of this species was made in Iowa and the plants are characteristic in every way. The individuals are larger than the other species of the genus here described and the spore- markings are distinct from any of the other forms studied. BARLZA CINNABARINA (Fuckel) Sacc., Syll. Fung. 8: 112. 1889. Plate: 12, £548. Crouania cinnabarina Fuckel, Symb. Mye. 2: 64. 1873. Peziza letirubra Cooke, Mycogr. 14. Plants small, not to exceed 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, at first slightly coneave or plane becoming convex, bright orange; hy- menium at maturity more or less rough with minute pits; asci clavate to cylindrical, 8-spored; spores globose, with 1 large, central oil-drop, externally finally reticulated, 15 to 18y; re- ticulations more irregular than in preceding and meshes larger; IOWA DISCOMYCETES 61 paraphyses filiform, slender, enlarged upwards and filled with orange granules. On the ground among moss, Iowa City, common. Also ob- served and studied in Indiana. The plants of this species are smaller than in the preceding, the hymenium at maturity always convex and without definite mar- gin. The spore-markings are characteristic on account of their irregularity and the larger size of the meshes. The species is - very common and so far has always been found among moss- plants in gardens and open fields. BARL2ZA CREC’HQUERAULTH (Crouan) Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 113. 1889. Ascobolus crec’hqueraultii Crouan, Ann. Sei. Nat. IV. 10: 194. 1858. Peziza auriflava Cooke, Mycogr. 16. Plants similar in size and general appearance to the preceding, entirely smooth, pale orange to salmon-colored, growing in thick groups but never crowded; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores globose, clothed externally with numerous minute, sharp spines which are often bent in various ways, seldom entirely straight, 15 to 18 in diameter; paraphyses filiform or a little enlarged. On naked clay soil among tufts of grass, Iowa City. Common in one locality. The plants of this species occurred in one locality in great numbers and were studied during the entire season. The habi- tat and pale yellow color of the plants seems to be quite charac- teristic and the spore-markings are still more so. The minute spines with which the spore is covered are very sharp and many of them crooked and bent in various ways. The drawings of the forms collected, which were made before leaving Iowa, compare very favorably with those accompanying the original descrip- tion which has since been examined. BARL2ZA AMETHYSTINA (Quel.) Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 116. 1889. Plate 12, f. m. Humaria persoonii amethystina Quel., Asc. Frane. Adv. Sci. 14: 451. 1885. 62 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Plants small, 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, purplish, with a delicate whitish margin; hymenium slightly concave of about the same color as the exterior; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores globose entirely covered with large wart-like granules appearing very rough; paraphyses slender a little enlarged. In woods among moss, Iowa City. The plants of this species are not quite so large as those de- scribed by Quelet but the color and the spore-markings are char- acteristic. The measurements given for the plants of this spe- cies in the original description are 3 to 4 mm. in diameter while our specimens scarcely exceed 2 mm. The verrucose markings of the spores of the two specimens are very similar as is also the color of the plants. SARCOSPHAERA Auersw., Hedwigia 8: 82. 1869. Receptacle at first closed and more or less immersed in the ground, gradually opening and often splitting at the margin and becoming subsuperficial; cups externally clothed with flexuose, brown hairs which are more numerous near the base; asci cylin- drical, 8-spored; spores elliptical, hyaline, smooth with one oil- drop. *SARCOSPHRA ARENICOLA (Lev.) Lindau; E. & P. Pfl. 1: 182. 1897. Plate 9:. tm. Peziza (Humaria) arenicola Lev., Ann. Sei. Nat. III. 9: 140. 1848. This species was described and illustrated in the Discomycetes of Eastern Iowa with the note that it had not been found in Iowa but was collected in the adjoining state of Illinois. The species has not yet been collected in Iowa so far as known but is allowed to remain in the list since the illustration occurs on an accom- panying plate. This is the only species included in this list which has not been actually collected in the state, this one having been originally included as illustrative of this genus. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 63 LACHNEA Pers., Myce. Eu. 1: 244. 1822. Plants fleshy or subfieshy, cup-shaped or plane, externally clothed with a covering of sharp, rigid or soft, fiexuose hairs which are usually brown but often hyaline; asci cylindrical or clavate, usually 8-spored; spores elliptical to fusiform, hyaline; paraphyses present slender or clavate. The genus is distinguished from Peziza by the presence of the hairs with which the cups are clothed. The forms with hyaline hairs are sometimes placed in a separate genus, Neotiella. Eleven species of the genus are here described one of which has hyaline hairs. Probably many more occur in the state. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Hairs hyaline. .. : en! Be a i toga Hairs colored, pale to dark — Hymenium white or whitish. Planis large, more than 2 mm. in diameter. Plants 2 to 3 em., spores spinulose. . . . JL. hemispherica. Plants less than 1 em., spores smooth. . . L. albo-spadicea. Plants small, less than 2 mm. in diameter. Spores tuberculose. . . . . ans L. paludosa. Speren amonbie) tise ee Le SO ae L. abundans. Hymenium red or yellow. Plants 1 em. in diameter, hairs short. Plants red, hairs rigid. Spores smooth or scarcely roughened. L. scutellata. Spores spinulose. . : z : . L. hirta. Plants pale yellow, hairs dicen L. aurantiopsis. Plants 1 to 5 mm. in diameter. On dung, hairs often stellate. . . . . UL. stercorea. On rotten wood, hairs not stellate. . : LL. setosa. On burnt ground. . . -.- . . +. =. CJ. melaloma. LACHNEA LOJK£ZANA Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. 13: 1045. 1896. Plate 8, f. m. Peziza (Sarcoscypha) luteo-pallens Cooke, Mycogr. 85. Neottiella luteopallens Sacc., Syll. Fung. 8: 191. 1889. Cups, sessile, at first hemispherical, then expanded, pale orange, 4 to 5 mm. in diameter, externally clothed with hyaline, septate hairs, which are often more or less rigid; asci cylindrical, 64 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN operculate, 8-spored; spores elliptical, 15 to 17 to 10u, granular within; paraphyses stout, thickened at their apices, 5 to 7» in diameter. On naked soil in woods, also grown in the laboratory on same material. Two plants were grown in the laboratory from the soil on which the plants were collected in the field. The hymenium is nearly plane but surrounded with a delicate white fringe. The asci are often found to be only 4 or 6-spored. *LACHNEA HEMISPHERICA (Schaeff.) Guill., Discom. 73. 1879. Plate 9; £..1 Elvela hemispherica Scheff., Ie. Fung. 2 pl. 151. 1767. Peziza hemispherica Hoffm., Veg. Crypt. 2: 28. 1790. Octospora fasciculata Hedw., Laub-Moose, 2, pl. 4-B. Sepultaria albida Morgan, Jour. Mye. 8: 188. 1902. On the ground in woods, common. The plants are at first small and almost entirely globose be- . coming expanded and hemispherical with age. The species is easily known by the white hymenium and external covering of brown hairs, the plants being about the size of an acorn-cup. LACHNEA ALBO-SPADICEA (Grev.) Phill., Brit. Discom. 228. 1887. Peziza albo-spadicea Grv., Fl. Edin. 420. 1824. Plants sessile, gregarious, at first subglobose becoming ex- panded and often nearly plane, about 5 to 8 mm., externally clothed with rather soft brown hairs; hymenium white or whit- ish; asei cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical, smooth, about 20 by 104; paraphyses filiform, slender. On naked soil in shaded places among weeds, Iowa City. The specimens referred to this species have been collected often but never in large numbers. They resemble somewhat the preceding but are much smaller and the cups which are at first hemispherical become nearly plane with the margin often slightly split. The hairs are softer and not so prominent as in LD. hemispherica. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 65> LACHNEA PALUDOSA (Boud.) Saee., Syll. Fung. 11: 400. 1895. Piste 11, £. 1. Ciliaria (Trichophea) paludosa Boud., Bull. Soc. Myce. France 10: 65. 1894. Plants thickly gregarious, 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, hemispher- _ leal, becoming nearly plane, externally thickly clothed with long, bristly, brown hairs; hymenium whitish or bluish-white; hairs straight, rather sharp-pointed, mostly simple, reddish-brown, as long as 500u; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores 1-seriate, ellip- tical, at first 2-guttulate, becoming tuberculose with very large wart-like markings giving the spore a scalloped appearance; tubercles 2 to 3u in diameter, entire spore 22 to 25 by 15 to 17u; paraphyses enlarged at their apices. On naked soil in moist places, rather common. The species described here has often been met with in the vicinity of Mt. Pleasant where the small plants grow in dense masses on damp soil in shaded places. The species is an attract- ive one although probably not very distinct in its external char- acters. The bluish-white hymenium contrasts quite strongly with the dark brown hairy exterior. The spore characters how- ever are very distinct from any of the discomycetes studied in this locality. The spores are covered with large wart-like mark- ings which give them a decidedly scalloped appearance, the scal- lops reaching a size of 2 to 3u, much larger and more distinct than in any of the other species studied. The original drawings of the plants, hairs, and spores of this species correspond as closely with the specimens studied in Iowa as they could have done if drawn from this material, although the original descrip- tion was drawn from material collected in France. In addition to the material collected at Mt. Pleasant, one speci- men of this species has been sent in by Mr. S. C. Knupp from Garrison, Iowa. LACHNEA ABUNDANS (Karst.) Sacec., Syll. Fung. 8: 186. 1889. Plate 11, f. m. Peziza abundans Karst., Fauna Fl. Fenn. 10: 124. 1869. Plants thickly crowded, small 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, exter- 66 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN nally brownish, clothed with a thick covering of short, rigid, sharp-pointed, pale brown, 1- to 3-septate hairs which reach a length of 200 to 250”; hymenium dull, pallid, becoming brown- ish; asci cylindrical, 8-spored, 100 to 125 by 10,; spores ellip- tical to ovoid, 1- to 2-guttulate (mostly 2), smooth, 12 to 14 by 7 to 8u; paraphyses clavate, apex much enlarged, 5 to Ty in — diameter, brownish. On ground in woods where wood had been burned, Iowa City. One collection of this species has been made, but the plants occurred in great abundance being closely crowded together on damp soil where a brush-pile had been burned. *LACHNEA SCUTELLATA (L.) Gill., Discom. 75. 1879. Plate 10) 2.8 Peziza scutellata Linn., Sp. Pl. 1181. 1753. Peziza ciliata Hoftm., Veg. Crypt. 2: 25. 1790. Humaria scutellata Fuckel, Symb. Mye. 321. 1869. Common on rotten wood. The species is quite distinct in its scarlet, saucer-shaped plants and still more so in its broadly-elliptical, smooth spores com- pletely filled with oil-drops and granules. The paraphyses also seem to be delicately marked. This is one of the most common species in this locality and is probably widely distributed. Specimens have also been observed by the writer in New York and North Dakota. LACHNEA HIRTA (Schumach.) Gill., Discom. 75. 1879. Peziza lurta Schumach., Pl. Saell. 2: 422.° 1803. Cups scattered, sessile, subhemispherical, becoming more or less expanded, externally clothed with septate, brown hairs; hy- menium coneave or nearly plane, bright red; asci cylindrical, 8- spored; spores elliptical, spinulose, usually 2-guttulate, about 25 by 10u; paraphyses clavate, filled with colored granules. On the ground and decaying materials. The plants described under this name are similar to the pre- ceding in external characters but the hymenium is usually darker. The spores are more narrowly-elliptical and spinulose, the markings resembling those of the spores of LZ. hemispherica (Schaeff.) Gill. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 67 LACHNEA AURANTOPSIS (Ellis) Sace., Syll Fung. 8: 180. 1889. Plate 11, £. 1: Peziza (Sarcoscypha) aurantiopsis Ellis, Bull. Torrey Cl. 9: 18. 1882. Plants sessile, about 2 to 3 em. in diameter, with a coarse, felt- like, black-brown mycelium at the base, cups also clothed with brown hairs; hairs septate, minutely rough toward the ends, fiexuose, about 10u in diameter and of nearly uniform thickness, blunt; hymenium clear, pale yellow, nearly sulphur-yellow, be- coming dull orange when dry; asci cylindrical, 8-spored, 175 to 200, long; spores elliptical, very large, about 15 by 28»; para- physes clavate. On ground, decaying wood and other materials. The specimens collected in Iowa by Mr. Holway which were referred to this species by Mr. Ellis do not conform well. The spores are smaller, the hairs rigid and the septa more numerous. The plants are also smaller. Mr. Ellis indicated by a note on this specimen that it might be a form of Peziza lanuginosa Bull. The drawings in this paper were made from the type material in the Ellis collection. LACHNEA STERCOREA (Pers.) Gill., Discom. 76. 1879. Peziza stercorea Pers. Obs. Mye. 2: 89. 1799. Plants gregarious or seattered, sessile, at first subglobose, then coneave, becoming plane, dull red, clothed externally with a dense covering of brown hairs which are often branched or stellate ; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical, smooth, 20 to 22 by 8 to 9u; paraphyses clavate. On cow dung. The species is peculiar in its habitat and the presence of stel- late hairs in addition to the ordinary straight ones on the ex- terior of the plants. Not common. LACHNEA SETOSA (Nees) Gill. Discom., 75. 1879. Peziza setosa Nees, Syst. Pilze. 260. 1817. Plants thickly gregarious, 1 to 4 mm. in diameter, clothed with very long, brown, septate hairs; hairs as long as 600u, hyme- nium plane, orange; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical 68 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN smooth, 17 to 20 by 10 to 12, filled with oil-drops; paraphyses clavate. On rotten wood. A common species on mossy logs in woods, distinguished by the presence of the very long hairs and the orange disc. The spores of this species are very similar to those of Lachnea scutel- lata (L.) Gill. but the external characters are quite different. This species has also been observed by the writer in North Da- kota and is probably widely distributed. *LACHNEA MELALOMA (A. & 8S.) Saec., Syll. Fung. 8: 181. 1889. Plate 10, £. a. Peziza melaloma A. & S., Conspect. Fung. 336. 1805. PEZIZA. (Dill.) Linn., Sp. Pl. 2: 1180. 1753. Pega Dill., Cat. Pl. 76. 1719. Receptacle at first closed, globose, then opening and becoming more or less cup-shaped or plane, substipitate or sessile, exter- nally smooth, furfuraceous, or occasionally clothed with soft flexuose hairs (never with sharp-pointed bristles), asci cylin- drical to clavate, 8-spored; spores elliptical to fusiform, smooth, verrucose, or spinulose; paraphyses filiform, mostly enlarged upwards; plants varying in color, growing on earth, wood or de- caying materials of various kinds. The genus as it has formerly been known has been broken into a number of new genera. Four species belonging properly to this genus are described here, but doubtless many more occur. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants light colored yellowish or whitish. Plants decidedly cup shaped. .. . -. PP. vesiculosa. Plants becoming repand with hyaeinunt a convex. . P. repanda. Plants dark colored, brown or brownish-black. Plants large 3 to 10 em, in diameter, cup-shaped. . P. badia. Plants small less than 2 em., dise plane. . . . PP. brunneo-atra. PEZIZA VESICULOSA Bull., Champ. France 270. 1809. Plate a6; £.. 1. Aleuria vesiculosa Gill., Discom. 45. 1879. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 69 Pustularia vesiculosa Fuckel, Symb. Myce. 329. 1869. Cups large, gregarious or cespitose, at first hemispherical be- coming expanded, but remaining cup-shaped, margin often con- torted and undulate with age, fieshy, very fragile, furfuraceous, externally whitish or often reddish-brown near the margin, with the hymenium darker, yellowish, 2 to 3 cm. in diameter; asci cylindrical, operculate, 8-spored; spores elliptical, smooth, 20 to 22 by 10u, granular within; paraphyses slender but enlarged upwards, granular within. On rich ground and dung heaps, Iowa City, common. The plants of this species are common on manure piles which are mixed with straw and on ground fertilized with such mate- rial. The plants are at first hemispherical and very regular becoming very much contorted with age especially when ocecur- ring in dense clusters as they often do. In younger specimens the exterior of the cups is very furfuraceous becoming more nearly smooth with age. This was listed in Discomycetes of Eastern Iowa as Peziza cerea Sow. which has been described as a variety of this species. PEZIZA REPANDA Pers., le. Picte 49. 1806. Plate 15, f. mn. Aleuria repanda Gill., Discom. 43. 1879. Plants gregarious but not crowded, with a short but distinct stem; cups concave, nearly white, soon becoming repand and umbilicate, when mature more or less angular, often 3-sided and darker yellowish to brownish, stem obscured by the expanding disc, 2 to 10 em. in diameter; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical, smooth, 15 to 18 by 104 paraphyses clavate. On coal dust in basement, Mt. Pleasant, and logs, Decorah. This is a species concerning which there is much doubt as to the real nature of the specimens originally referred to it. Speci- mens collected by Mr. Holway in the northeast part of the state hhave been referred here. From plants collected in Mt. Pleasant the illustration in this work is drawn, which plants were studied during the entire summer. The cups are at first small with a 1897. Plate 29, f. 1. Peziza stercoraria Bull. Herb. France, pl. 376, f. 1. 1787. Ascobolus furfuraceus Pers., Obs. Mye. 1: 33. 1796. Plants sessile, globose, then expanded, 1 to 5 mm. in diameter, externally pale yellow, covered with bran-like particles, espe- cially near the margin; hymenium concave, sometimes plane or slightly convex, same color when young, becoming dark with age on account of the dark colored spores; flesh very brittle; asci clavate, emergent; spores elliptical, reticulate, violet, then brown, 20 to 25 by 10 to 12”; paraphyses filiform, septate, im- bedded in sulphur-yellow gelatine. On old cow-dung in pastures and woods, also grown in culture. A very common species and easily recognized by the yellowish: IOWA DISCOMYCETES 89 plants which are covered with dark dots, the ends of the emergent asei filled with dark purple spores. The plants occur scattered or densely crowded and vary much in size. ASCOBOLUS LEVEILLEI Boud., Ann. Sci. Nat., V. 10: 225. 1869. Plate 30, f. m. Plants thickly gregarious, small about 1 mm. in diameter or less, globose or expanded, externally brown, very rough almost pilose; hymenium dark with the emergent asci; asci 100 to 125 by 25y, clavate, 8-spored; spores elliptical, smooth, at first hya- line, then purple and at last brown, 24 to 25 by 12u paraphyses filiform, simple or branched, granular within. On horse-dung, June, 1904, Iowa City. These plants were referred to Ascobolus brunneus Cooke in An Annotated List of Iowa Discomycetes but they seem to con- form more closely to the above. The general appearance of the plants as well as the spore characters conform very well to the illustration given with the original description cited above. The plants were collected in considerable mass on horse-dung. Sacecardo describes the spores of this species as being deli- cately reticulated. Neither the original description nor the il- lustrations accompanying it show this character, but the spores are represented as being entirely smooth as they are in our plants. Our specimens were collected, described and the illustration drawn before the original description of this species was seen but in all points the descriptions conform unusually well. SACCOBOLUS Boud., Ann. Sci. Nat. V. 10: 228. 1869. Receptacle similar to Ascobolus, externally smooth; asci emer- gent, operculate, clavate, often stipitate, 8-spored; spores ellip- tical to fusiform, at first hyaline, then purple, at last brown, smooth, united into one globular mass in the ascus; plants gen- erally occurring on dung. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Planig. golden-yellow, 92.) S-ies ks a S eermernt. Plants violet. . Sy «Bd : : reves - : . .8. violacens. VOL. vi—l. 7 90 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN *SACCOBOLUS KERVERNI (Crouan) Boud., Ann. Sci. Nat., V. 10292295" 1869: Plate 28, f. 1. Ascobolus kerverni Crouan, Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 10: 193. 1858. SACCOBOLUS VIOLACEUS Boud., Ann. Sci. Nat., V. 10: 230. 1869. Ascobolus violascens Gill., Champ. France, 141. 1888. Plants scattered or gregarious, minute, 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, smooth, soft, violet; hymenium convex of the same color as the exterior; asci broad more slender near the base, operculate, 8- spored; spores elliptical, subacute, at first hyaline, becoming violet to blackish, smooth, 15 by 9», enclosed in a common hya- line membrane; paraphyses violet, pyriform at the apex. On cow-dung, Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant, rather common. This species is very distinct from the preceding in the gen- eral color of the plants which are violet instead of golden-yellow, also the spores are a little smaller and darker. Several collec- tions of the plants of this species have been made in Iowa by the writer. FAMILY 7. HELOTIACE2. Plants for the most part superficial, more rarely erumpent or produced from a sclerotium, sessile or stipitate, smooth or hairy; substance waxy or membranous or stout, composed of thin- walled, bright colored cells which form a pseudoparenchyma; cups at first closed, gradually becoming expanded; asci 8-spored. opening with a pore; spores globose to filiform, 1-8-celled. SARCOSYPHA Fries, Sace. Syll, Fung. 8: 153. 1889. Sarcoscypha Fries (as tribe), Syst: Mye. 2: 78. 1822. Sarcoscypha Cooke (as subgenus), Mycogr. 258. Plants generally gregarious or tufted, more or less long-stipi- tate, receptacle generally cup-shaped becoming nearly plane in some cases, externally hairy; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical, usually smooth, hyaline, 1 to 2-guttulate; paraphyses IOWA DISCOMYCETES 91 slender, branched, enlarged above; plants usually bright colored, growing on decaying wood. Three species common in Iowa. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Externally clothed with long rigid hairs. . . . . 8S. floccosa. Externally clothed with soft flexuose hairs, or nearly naked. Cups large, 3 to 4 em.; stem short, thick. . . . S. coccinea. Cups medium sized, 1 to 2 em.; stem slender, usually long. : ‘ oh - : : . S. occidentalis. *SARCOSYPHA FLOCCOSA (Schw.) Sacec., Syll. Fung. 8. 156. 1889. Plate 22, f. 1. Peziza floccosa Schw., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. II. 4: 172. 1832. *SARCOSCYPHA COCCINEA (Scop.) Saec., Syll. Fung. 8: 154. 1889. Plate 21, f. m. Elvela coccinea Scop., Fl. Car. 2: 479. 1772. Peziza coccinea Jacq., Fl. Austr. 2, pl. 163. 1774. Lachnea coccinea Gill., Discom. 66. 1879. Geopyxis coccinea Massee, Fung. Fl. York. 252. 1905. On partially buried sticks in the woods, fall and spring, Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant. Also observed in North Dakota. *SARCOSYPHA OCCIDENTALIS (Schw.) Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 154. 1889. Plate 22, f. m1. Peziza occidentalis Schw., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. II. 4: 171 1832. On decaying sticks in woods, spring and summer, Iowa City, Mt. Pleasant, and Des Moines, Iowa. Also observed in North Dakota. : CHLOROSPLENIUM Fries, Summa Veg. Scand. 356. 1849. Plants sessile or shortly stipitate, concave or plane, bright yel- low to olivaceous or aeruginous-green, often staining the sub- 92 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN stratum green; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores ovoid to fusoid, simple, hyaline. Three species of the genus not uncommon in Iowa. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants entirely sessile, bright to olivaceous. . . C. chlora. Plants stipitate or substipitate, wruginous or oliva- ceous-green. Plants bright wruginous-green. : : - . C. eruginosum. Plants dull olivaceous-green. : : : - C. versiforme. CHLOROSPENIUM CHLORA (Schw.) Massee, Jour. Linn. Soe. 35: 16. A901 Plate 23, f. m1. Peziza chlora Schw., Schr. Nat. Ges. Leipzig. 1: 122. 1818. Chlorosplenium schweinitzti Fries, Summa Veg. Scand. 356. 1849. Peziza crocitincta Berk. & Curtis; Berkeley, Grevillea 3: 160. 1875. Plants thickly gregarious, soft, rather fleshy, at first closed and globose in form, then expanded but remaining concave with the margin incurved, bright yellow externally or often more or less faded; hymenium becoming greenish; cups appearing rough on the exterior but not hairy, 1 to 2 mm. in diameter; asci stipi- tate, 8-spored; spores 1-seriate, hyaline, simple, straight or curved, 5 to 6 by 1.54; paraphyses slender, slightly enlarged at their apices. On old stumps especially oak, Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant. common. Although this species is the type of the genus Chlorosplenium as founded by Fries the general appearance of the plants would seareely suggest that genus as it is understood at the present time. The plants are usually very bright yellow, often orange- yellow with perhaps a slight tinge of green displayed especially by the hymenium. The species differs from the other members of the genus described here not only in color but in the entire absence of stem. This species which has been collected often by the writer has IOWA DISCOMYCETES 93 always been associated with the genus Helotium rather than with the one to which it belongs. CHLOROSPLENIUM ZRUGINOSUM (Oeder) De Notaris, Comm. Critt. It. 1: 376. 1864. Plate 24, f. 1. Helvella aeruginosa Oeder, Fl]. Dan. pl. 534. 1770. Peziza aeruginosa Vahl. Fl. Dan. pl. 1200. 1797. Helotium aeruginosum Fries, Summa Veg. Seand. 355. 1849. Plants gregarious with a short stem or nearly sessile, concave or nearly plane, bright wruginous-green externally, staining the substratum to some depth the same color; hymenium paler often yellowish ; entire plant from 5 to 8 mm. in diameter and the same in height; stem stout, tapering below; asci cylindrical to clavate, 8-spored ; spores fusiform or fusoid, 10 to 14 by 3 to 4y, hyaline; paraphyses slender. On old wood especially oak, Iowa City, Macbride and Shimek, Mt. Pleasant, Seaver, not uncommon. The plants of the species are distinguished by the bright wruginous-green color of the exterior of the cups as well as that of the substratum on which they grow. The wood thus stained is made use of in the manufacture of various articles. CHLOROSPLENIUM VERSIFORME (Pers.) De Notaris, Comm. Critt. It. 1: 376. 1864. Plate 24, f. m. Peziza versiforme Pers., Ie. Dese. 25. 1798. Plants gregarious, stipitate or subsessile, concave or plane, of- ten very irregular in outline, elongated on one side or variously contorted; externally brownish to olivaceous-green; hymenium dull olivaceous-green ; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores elliptical or subelliptical, 12 to 14 by 3 to 4u; paraphyses filiform, slender. On old wood. Decorah, Iowa, E. W. D. Holway. The only specimens of this species examined from Iowa are those collected by Holway at Decorah. The color in this form is not nearly so bright as in the preced- ing and the plants are much more irregular in form. From the 94. NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN original description and illustration the color appears to be quite variable ranging from olivaceous-green to brownish or purplish but never so decidedly green as in Chlorosplenium aeruginosum (Oeder) DeNot. CIBORIA Fuckel, Symb. Mye. 311. 1869. Cups scattered, firm, often with a long stem, of medium size, waxy, externally smooth, or furfuraceous, hymenium concave or plane; color variable; asci elongated, 8-spored; spores oblong- oval, cylindrical or lanceolate, simple, hyaline; paraphyses pre- sent variable. . Plants larger and stem stronger than in the genus Phialea. One species reported from the state. CrBORIA SULPHURELLA (Ellis & Everh.) Rehm; Durand, Bull. Torrey Cl. 29: 461. 1902. Helotium sulphurellum Ellis & Everh., Bull. Torrey Cl. 10: 98. 1883. Plants gregarious, stipitate; stem variable in length, sometimes as long as 2 em. and slender, but often very short; cups 2 to 5 mm. in diameter, a little concave or nearly plane; plants very variable in color often sulphur-yellow when fresh with a tinge of green; hymenium darker becoming reddish or reddish-brown, when dry entire plant almost black; asci clavate, 8-spored, 75 by 8u; spores 1-seriate with the ends overlapped, elliptical, nar- rowed at the ends, 10 to 12 by 3 to 4u. On petioles of ash (Fraxinus) Mt. Pleasant, common, Iowa City, Macbride. The plants of this species were found to be abundant and quite attractive from their variable color. The species has been ecol- lected by the writer in New York and North Dakota and prob- ably oceurs coextensive with the host. SCLEROTINIA Fuckel, Symb. Myc., 1: 330. 1869. Plants for the most part medium large, single or in clusters springing from a sclerotium formed in the stems, leaves or fruits of plants; sclerotium resting over winter; cups at first closed, IOWA DISCOMYCETES 95 and globose, becoming expanded and cup-shaped or plane; asci cylindrical to clavate, 8-spored; spores elongated or elliptical, straight or curved, simple, hyaline, 1-seriate. The genus is distinguished by the sclerotium from which the plants grow. Three species found in Iowa, two of which have their type locality in this state. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Selerotium formed in acorns. - : ‘ : S. pseudotuberosa. Sclerotium formed in seeds of bass es : : ea Pag Sclerotinum formed in seeds of wild cherry. . . SS. seaveri. SCLEROTINA PSEUDOTUBEROSA Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. 1°: 809. 1896. Ciboria pseudotuberosa Rehm, Ber. Naturh. Ver. Augsburg 26: 28. 1881. Stromatinia pseudotuberosa Boud., Bull. Soc. Myc. France, 1: 115. 1885. Hymenoscypha pseudotuberosa Phill., Brit. Diseom. 119. 1887. Plants gregarious, stipitate; stem often 2 em. long. subfiex- uose, when dry longitudinally striated, olivaceous to olivaceous- brown ; cups at first closed and globose, becoming expanded when moist, 5 to 7 mm. in diameter; hymenium brownish; asci clavate, 8-spored, 120 by 6; spores elliptical to ovate, smooth, simple; paraphyses filiform, 34 in diameter at their apices, hyaline. On acorns, Decorah. The only specimens of this species seen were those collected by Mr. E. W. D. Holway in the northeast part of the state. ScLeroTIna (Stromatinia) TIL1= Reade, Ann. Mye. 6: 114. 1908. Apothecia mostly solitary, cyathoid. long stipitate, 0.5-1 em. high, Isabelline color (R), stipe smooth, slender, cylindrical, 0.5 mm. or less thick; dise at first closed then expanded. saucer- shaped, 1 to 3 mm. across, excipulum with pseudoparenchymatous outer layer and a prosenchymatous medulla; asci cylindrical- clavate, 140 to 170 by 8 to 10u, apex round-truneate, spores blue with iodine, continuous, 9 to 11 by 4 - Du; paraphyses scatter- ing, filiform, hyaline. 96 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN From sclerotium in seeds of Tilia americana L. lying on the ground, Mt. Pleasant, Iowa, April 16, 1906. F. J. Seaver. The above description is taken from the original without material change, the description having been drawn from Iowa material sent by the writer. The plants in external appearance are very much like those occuring on the seeds of wild cherry described below. SCLEROTINIA (Stromatina) SEAVERI Rehm, Ann. Mye. 3: 519. 1905. Apothecia 1 or 2 from a single mummy, about 1 em. high, long stipitate, cyathoid, fawn to Isabella color (R) ; stipe smooth, slender, cylindrical, more or less tapering and frequently tomen- tose below, 5 to 20 by 11 mm. without rhizoid-like organs; dise at first closed then expanding saucer shaped, to convex and umbilicate; excipulum with a pseudoparenchymatous outer layer and a prosenchymatous medulla; asci cylindrical-clavate, 155 to, 180 by 8 to 11u, apex round, spores blue with iodine; spores 8, obliquely 1-seriate, ellipsoid, ends rounded, hyaline, continuous, 11 to 17 by 5 to 8; paraphyses scattering, filiform, slightly wider at the tips, mostly simple, septate, hyaline. Chlamydospores (Monilia seavert Reade n. f.) effuse, ash- gray; epiphyllous sometimes later on twigs also, still later in minute cespitule on immature fruits citron-shaped, continuous. hyaline, 7 to 15 mostly 8 to 10u, in. long di- and trichotomously branched chains with slender, fusiform disjunctors 3 or 4 long. Sclerotia formed in mummified fruits. _ Parasitic on leaves, twigs and fruits of Prunus serotina Ehrh. growing by roadsides and along fences, Ithaca, N. Y., and Mal- loryville, N. Y. Apothecia were collected in the latter part of April and the first of May. Chlamydospores were abundant on the leaves during the first part of June and on the frmt in July. The attention of the writer was first directed to this species by Prof. B. Shimek who collected a number of plants on the seeds of the wild cherry, in March, 1905, in woods near Iowa City. As this was the first occurence of any of the plants of this genus, to my knowledge, in the state it was of more than usual interest. A search was made for more of the material and it IOWA DISCOMYCETES OT was found to be quite common in the early spring so that suf- ficient material was collected to be issued in exsiceati. Nearly a year later the material was sent to Dr. Rehm of Germany for determination who described it as new. DASYSCYPHA (Fries) Fuckel, Symb. Mye. 304. 1869. Dasyscyphea (as tribe) Fries, Syst. Myce. 2: 89. 1822. Cups gregarious, small, distinctly stipitate, expanded, when dry closed, externally clothed with hairs; hymenium concave; asci elongated, 8-spored ; spores variable in form, simple, hyaline. Distinguished from Trichopeziza by the stipitate cups. Two species collected in Iowa. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants small 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, white. . : : D. nivea. Plants comparatively large 2 to 5 mm., yellowish, .. D. pygmea. DASYSCYPHA NIVEA (Hedw.) Sacc., Syll. Fung. 8: 437. 1889. Plate 25, f. m. Octospora nivea Hedw. Obs. Bot. 13. 1802. Peziza nivea Fries, Syst, Mye. 2: 90. 1822. Lachnella nivea Phill., Brit. Discom. 245. 1887. Plants small about 1 mm. in diameter, tapering below into a distinct stem which is sometimes very short or 1 to 2 mm. long, clothed externally with a dense covering of hyaline (white) hairs; hairs enlarged, clavate smooth or minutely roughened; hymenium coneave or nearly plane; asci clavate, 8-spored ; spores small, simple, hyaline, 7 to 9 by 2”; paraphyses present. On decaying wood and herbaceous stems, Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant, common. In the specimens from which the description is drawn the hairs are decidedly enlarged upwards so as to appear club- shaped and nearly smooth or a little roughened. DASYSCYPHA PYGMZA (Fries) Saee., Syll. Fung. 8: 436. 1889. Plate 24, f. m1. Peziza pygmea Fries, Syst. Mye. 2: 79. 1822. Helotium pygmeum Karst., Mye. Fenn. 1: 153. 1871. 98 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Lachnea pygmea Gill. Discom. 71. 1879. Lachnella pygmea Phill., Brit. Discom. 242. 1887. Plants thickly gregarious, 2 to 3 mm. in diameter with a dis- tinct stem which varies much in length, externally hairy, pale yellowish; stem often branched; hairs not so numerous as in the preceding; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores elliptical or subclavate, hyaline, about 7 to 10 by 2» paraphyses filiform. On roots and twigs partially exposed, Iowa City. The plants were numerous and grew with the stems often to- fully pilose; hymenium coneave; asci, 8-spored; spores cylin- drical or oblong, simple, hyaline; paraphyses present. TRICHOPEZIZA Fuckel, Symb. Mye. 195. 1869. Cups fleshy-coriaceous, for the most part small, only a few mm. in diameter, sessile or subsessile, when dry becoming closed and globose, when moist more or less expanded, externally beauti- fully pilose; hymenium concave; asci, 8-spored; spores eylindri- eal or oblong, simple, hyaline; paraphyses present. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Hairs hyaline, appearing white to the naked eye. On ‘branches ‘of basswood, .% = “Gs dsr - + T. tilie. On decaying oak leaves. . -- «. « Wl. comata: Hairs sulphur-yellow becoming prowel Sipe dry. Plants occuring on wood, spores 6 to 84 long. . . T. albo-lutea. Plants on herbaceous stems, spores 16 to 20u long. = ; : ‘ : : . . I. sulphurea. TRICHOPEZIZA TILIZ (Peck) Sacce., Syll. Fung. 8: 428. 1889. Pezza tiliae Peck, Ann. Rep. N. Y. St. Mus. 24: 96. 1872. Plate 25, f. 1. Plants gregarious, minute, 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, sessile, con- cave, closed when dry, expanding when moist, externally dense- ly clothed with hyaline (white) hairs; hairs delicately rough- ened externally; hymenium pale yellowish or white; asci pres- ent but spores not seen. On dead branches of basswood (Tilia americana), Dies Towa. One collection of the plants of this species has been made in IOWA DISCOMYCETES 99 Iowa by the writer and the plants were found to occur in great abundance in the locality named above. During the season of 1907 the same species was found in abundance on dead branches of basswood along the Red River in North Dakota. It is prob- ably not uncommon where the host occurs. TRICHOPEZIZA COMATA (Schw.) Sacc., Syll. Fung. 8: 431. 1889. Plate 25,.f. 1. Peziza comata Schw., Trans. Am. Phil. Soe. IT. 4: 173. 1832. Plants similar in external appearance to the preceding but smaller scarcely reaching 1 mm. in diameter; hairs tapering to a rather sharp point and covered externally with irregular gran- ules, consisting of elongated interrupted ridges, very different from those of the preceding; asci and spores indistinct. On decaying oak leaves Iowa City, common. Well distinguished by the habitat, size of the plants and the peculiar markings of the hairs. In the specimens examined the asci and spores could not be made out and it may be that the plants are immature. TRICHOPEZIZA SULPHUREA (Pers.) Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 401. 1889. Peziza sulphurea Pers., Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 33. 1797. Lachnum sulphureum Karst., Mye. Fenn. 1: 176. 1871. Plants small, about 1 mm. in diameter, gregarious, sessile, hemispherical, when dry closed, when moist expanded, clothed externally with a dense covering of delicate hairs which are filled with yellow coloring matter so that the whole plant when fresh has a beautiful sulphur-yellow color, when dry becoming chest- nut-brown; hairs variable in length as long as 75u, smooth below and delicately rough near their apices; asci 65 to 75 by 6yn, 8- spored; spores fusiform, nearly straight or curved, with several oil-drops, 16 to 20 by 24; paraphyses 2 to 4 broad at their apices. On dead herbaceous stems, Mt. Pleasant, Iowa. Two collections of this species were made in Mt. Pleasant. The sulphur-yellow color and the habitat are sufficient charac- 100 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN ters by which the species may be recognized. On microscopic examination the long fusiform spores are characteristic. TRICHOPEZIZA ALBO-LUTEA (Pers.) Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 412. 1889. Peziza sulphurea albo-lutea Pers., Syn. Fung. 649. 1801. Helotium albo-luteum Karst, Mye. Fenn. 1: 160. 1871. Peziza flavo-fuliginea A. & S., Consp. Fung. 319. 1805. Pezza variecolor Fries, Syst. Mye. 2: 100. 1822. Plants similar in general appearance to the preceding but larger often 2 mm. in diameter and expanded, when dry becom- ing closed or partially closed; hymenium smooth, whitish or slightly yellowish, externally clothed with sulphur-yellow hairs: which become brown when dry (to the naked eye) slightly rough on the exterior, often a little enlarged at their apices; asci cylin- drical to clavate, 8-spored; spores elliptical or slightly clavate, straight or curved, 7 to 8 by 24; paraphyses present. On old wood, Mt. Pleasant, Iowa. This species was originally described as a variety of the pre- ceding which it resembles in external characters but is very dis- tinct in the size and form of the spores. The plants occur gre- garious on old but rather hard wood and this habitat with the generally large size of the plants would enable one to distinguish it from 7. sulphurea (Pers.) Saece. which always occurs on her- baceous stems. The color is a very prominent character in both species but the plants when dry change their external appear- ance from sulphur-yellow to chestnut brown. On microscopic examination the hairs are found to show their original color when moist. PHIALEA (Pers.) Gill. Discom. 93. 1879. Phialea (as subgenus) Pers., Mye. Eu. 1: 276. 1822. Apothecia waxy-membranaceous, at first closed, then spread- ing, concave or convex, smooth or pruinose, with rather long, slender stem, and even margin (not dentate); asci cylindrical éii IOWA DISCOMYCETES 101 to clavate, 8-spored; spores ovoid, oblong or clavate, simple, hya- line. Distinguished from Helotium by the more slender stem. Two species described from Iowa but probably many more occur. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants occurring on acorns, hickory-nut husks, etc., stem often long. . : a - : : . P. fructigena. Plants on stems of Polygonum, stem usually short 1 mm. : a ‘ J . = a E - LP. seutula fucata. PHIALEA FRUCTIGENA (Bull.) Gill., Discom. 99. 1879. Plate 23, f. 1. Peziza fructigena Bull. Champ. France. 1: 236. 1809. Helotium fructigenum Karst., Mye. Fenn. 1: 113. 1871. Hymenoscypha fructigena Phill. Brit. Diseom. 135. 1887. Hymenoscypha virgultorum fructigenum Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. 1°: 783. 1896. Plants small, usually 1 to 3 mm. in diameter, at first closed. then opening dise becoming concave or nearly plane, rather pale yellowish, smooth; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores clavate, nearly pointed at the smaller end, guttulate, 14 to 18 by 4 to 5u; para- physes filiform, enlarged upwards. On decaying acorns and husks from hickory-nuts, Iowa City. Plants found to be abundant at times. The stems of the plants -of this species are quite variable in length sometimes being nearly 1 em. while at other times the cups are almost sessile, the length of the stem depending on the conditions as in other stipitate forms. PHIALEA SCUTULA FUCATA (Phill.) Saee., Syll. Fung. 8: 266. 1889. Hymenoscypha scutula fucata Phill., Brit. Discom. 137. 1887. Plants similar in general appearance to the preceding but ‘smaller scarcely exceeding 1 mm. in diameter with the stem of about the same length; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores clavate, nearly pointed at the narrow end, 18 to 22 by 3 to 4u; 2- to 3- -guttulate, often appearing to be 1-septate. On dead stems of Polygonum, Mt. Pleasant. 102 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Plants are gregarious and occur in large numbers. Similar forms occur on various kinds of herbaceous stems in wet places. HELOTIUM Fries, Summa Veg. Seand, 354. 1849. Plants generally gregarious, stipitate or sessile; stem when present short, stout; substance waxy, bright colored; hymenium concave or convex; asci 8-spored; spores elliptical or fusiform, ends blunt or sharp-pointed, simple or occasionally pseudo-sep- tate; paraphyses slender; for the most part small plants growing on wood, stems and leaves. Several species occur in Iowa, three of which have been studied. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants more or less stipitate. Plants deep lemon ee stem very stout, on old wood. . : . « 4. cttrinwm. Plants pale yellow, stem more patcades or want- ing, on decaying leaves. . ee Oe Plants entirely sessile, on dead stems of Carex. _.H. citrinulum seaveri. *HELOTIUM CITRINUM (Hedw.) Fries, Summa Veg. Scand. 355. 1849. Plate 20, 4. 1. Octospora citrina Hedw., Laub-Moose 2: 33. 1789. HeELoTIUM FRIESIT (Weinm.) Sace., Syll. Fungi 8: 228. 1889. Plate 23, f. 1. Peziza friesii Weinm., Hymeno-Gastero-Mycetes 469. 1836. Plants 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, usually with a short stem but often nearly sessile; hymenium plane or convex, pale yellow, when dry rather deep yellow, color resembling that of the pre- ceding but much paler; asci clavate, 65 to 70 by 5 to 6p, 8-spored ; spores slightly clavate, 8 to 9 by 3 to 4; paraphyses filiform, slender. On decaying leaves of Populus sp. in damp place in woods, Towa City. The plants described here under this name were abundant on the substratum named above, and while the microscopic charac- ters of the species under which this is here described are not mentioned in the original description, the plants correspond well in external characters. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 103 HELOTIUM CITRINULUM SEAVERI Rehm, Ann. Myce. 4: 67. 1906. Apothecia scattered, sessile, at first globose, becoming spread out and patellate in form, disc orbicular; hymenium lemon-yel- low, .5 to 4 mm. in diameter, externally smooth, whitish; excipu- lum prosenchymatous; margin undulate, when dry, hymenium orange-yellow; asci clavate, apex rotundate, 40 to 45 by 5 to Tu, 8-spored; spores fusiform, straight or slightly curved, simple, hyaline, 7 to 10 by 1.5, 2-seriate ; paraphyses filiform, hyaline, lz in diameter. On dead stems of Carex sp., hillsides, Iowa City, Iowa, May, 1905. Two collections of this material were made at Iowa City in localities about two miles apart. The material was collected in quantity sufficient for distribution in exsiccati. In color the plants resemble those of Helotium citrinum but the plants are very different in other characters. The stem is entirely wanting and the discs are spread out so that the hymenium is entirely plane. Compare H. fleruosum Massee. GORGONICEPS Karst., Mye. Fenn. 1: 15. 1871. Apothecia sessile or substipitate, obconie or elongated, finally expanded, soft, almost gelatinous, excipulum composed of brown filaments ; asci clavate; spores crowded together, fasciculate, rod- like, or filiform, hyaline, many-septate or guttulate; paraphyses filiform. At least one species rather common on rotten wood. GORGONICEPS IOWENSIS Rehm, Ann. Mye. 4: 338. 1906. Plate 26, f. m1. Apothecia scattered, sessile, subglobose, tapering below into a stem-like base; margin becoming convex and immarginate, whit- ish, externally smooth, slightly greenish or bluish-green, .2 to .5 mm. in diameter and high, when dry brownish; asci clavate, apex rotundate, 80 to 100 by 10 to 12u, 8-spored; spores subeylindriec- al, a little curved or almost straight, about 7-septate, scarcely constricted, hyaline, 30 to 33 by 3 to 4u; paraphyses filiform, 3u thick, apices 2.5 to 3u, hyaline. On decaying wood, Mt. Pleasant. 104. NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN One collection of this material was made in which the bluish- green color of the plants seemed to be a conspicuous character. Whether this is constant or not we cannot say. The specimen described in the Discomyeetes of Eastern Iowa and doubtfully referred to Patellaria melaxantha (Fries) Phil- lips is a Gorgoniceps the genus differing from Patellaria in the soft, waxy consistency of the plants. This specimen differs from the above mainly in the color of the plants which is yellowish to brown, and the plants were often found to be confluent. There also seems to be a difference in the size of the spores but as the original material is not at hand a more careful comparison can- not be made at present. Unless field study shows these differences to be constant it is thought best to refer this material all to the above name. The following is the description which was drawn from fresh material. Plants minute, not more than 1 mm. in diameter, generally less, gregarious, or often confluent, depressed, yellowish-brown, darker externally near the base; hymenium coneave, plane or slightly convex, more or less papillate or rough; asci clavate, 12 to 14 by 100 to 110, very slender at the base, apex rounded, at- tenuated; spores 8, fusiform, generally curved, 5- to 7-septate. hyaline, 35 to 40 by 3 to 4u, obliquely arranged in the asecus, more or less twisted around each other; paraphyses filiform, branched. On decaying wood, Iowa City. The plants described here have been collected several times in the summer and fall. They are minute in size but always gre- garious and often form a confluent yellowish mass. The inter- nal characters are quite distinct. Spores are fusiform, generally eurved or double-curved, becoming very slightly S-shaped, from 5- to 7-septate, (generally 7) and often apparently constricted at the septa. Paraphyses are less distinct but filiform and branched. Also a third collection of Gorgoniceps was made at Mt. Pleas- ant on old wood of Platanus occidentalis. This species is un- doubtedly the same as the one collected at Iowa City although the plants are rather smaller and do not show the same tendency to become confiuent. The plants are very numerous but small and on account of their dull color not easily seen. In spite of IOWA DISCOMYCETES 105 the slight differences we feel safe in saying that this is the same species collected at Iowa City but whether these are both the same as that describd as Gorgoniceps iowensis Rehm we are un- certain. These specimens are close to Gorgoniceps pumilionis Rehm. CORYNE Tul., Carp. 3: 190. 1865. Plants tufted, with a short, thick stem, externally smooth; sub- stance gelatinous, hard when dry; hymenium at first concave, becoming nearly plane, generally dark-colored; asci cylindrical, 8-spored ; spores fusiform, at last 2- to 8-celled, generally in two rows; paraphyses slender, enlarged upwards; plants usually oc- curring on decaying wood. Two forms occur in the state. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants small, usually not to exceed 1 cm. in diame- ter, spores 20u. : : : : . - C. sarcoides. Plants large often 2 to 3 em., spores large, 25 to 30x. Cc. urnalis. *CORYNE SARCOIDES (Jaceq.) Tul., Carpol. 3: 190. 1865. Plate 26, f 1. Tichen sarcoides Jacq., Mise. Aust., 2: 378. 1781. Peziza sarcoides Pers., Syn. Fung., 633. 1801. Bulgaria sarcoides Fries, Syst. Mye., 2: 168. 1822. Ombrophila sarcoides Karst., Myce. Fenn., 1: 86. 1871. CoRYNE URNALIS (Nyl.) Sace., Fungi Ven., IV., 31. Bulgaria urnalis Nyl., Obs. Pez. Fenn. 73. 1868. Sarcoidea sarcoides urnalis Karst., Myce. Fenn., 1: 87. 1871. Coryne purpurea Fuckel, Symb. Myc., 284. 1869. Ombrophila purpurea Phill., Brit. Discom., 324. 1887. The characters of this species are identical with those of the preceding except the size of the plants and spores. The spores are mostly 25 to 30» long, and the plants are often 2 to 3 cm. in diameter. Plants collected at Mt. Pleasant in woods along the Skunk River. VOL. vi—l. 8 106 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN . In the study of the preceding species no trace could be made out of the septa of the spores notwithstanding the fact that this is one of the characteristics of this genus. But in the last named species the septa could be quite easily seen although they are very narrow and delicate and for this reason may be overlooked. The septa are more or less irregular not always extending straight across the spore. FAMILY 8. MOLLISIACEZ. Plants either superficial or erumpent-superficial, mostly ses- sile on the substratum; substance fleshy, soft, composed of round- ish dark cells; cups at first closed gradually spreading; .asci 8- spored, opening with a pore; spores hyaline, 1- to many-septate. MOLLISIA (Fries) Karsten, Mye. Fenn. 1: 187. 1871. Mollisia Fries (as subgenus) Syst. Myce. 2: 137. 1822. Plants small, sessile, at first globose, becoming expanded; apothecium soft, waxy; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores ellip- tical to fusiform, simple, straight or curved. The genus is distinguished by the small size of the plants and the soft consistency of the apothecium as well as by the micro- scopic characters of its component cells. Four species collected but others probably oceur. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants parasitic on leaves and stems of Potentilla. . . M. dehnit. Plants saprophytic on wood and stems of herbaceous plants. Plants occurring on dead wood, cinereous. . . . UM. cinerea. Plants occurring on herbaceous stems. On stems of Polygonum. ; : M. polygon. On dead stems of Ambrosia ete. ‘ : z . UM. atrata. *MOLLISIA DEHNI (Rabenh.) Karst., Mye. Fenn. 1: 206. 1871. Plate: 350 2, 1. Peziza dehnii Rabenh., Bot. Zeit. 1: 11-12. 1843. This is a common species and known by its parasitic habits. The species appears to have a wide distribution, specimens hav- IOWA DISCOMYCETES 107 ing been collected by the writer in New York, North Dakota as well as in Iowa. The plants grow in such numbers as to almost completely cover the stems and leaves of the host. Mo.uuisiA CINEREA (Batsch) Karst., Myce. Fenn. 1: 189. 1871. Peziza cinerea Batsch, Elench. Fung. 2: 198. 1786. Niptera cinerea Fuckel, Symb. Mye. 292. 1869. Plants gregarious or scattered, at first globose becoming ex- panded, cinereous or sublivid, margin often elevated, whitish, undulated or wavy, .5 to 2 mm. in diameter; asci cylindrical to clavate, 45 to 70 by 5 to 6; paraphyses filiform scarcely en- larged at their apices. On decaying wood of various kinds, common. *\[oLLISIA POLYGONI (Lasch.) Gill., Discom. 120. 1879. Plate 35, f. 1. Peziza polygoni Lasch., Rabenh. Herb. Myc. 1127. Niptera polygoni Rehm, Ber. Naturh. Ver. Augsburg 26: 21. 1881. Peziza luctuosa Cooke, Hedwigia 14: 83. 1875. Mo.uista ATRATA (Pers.) Karst., Mye. Fenn. 1: 200. 1871. Peziza atrata Pers. Syn. Fung. 669. 1801. Pyrenopeziza atrata Fuckel, Symb. Mye. 294. 1869. Plants gregarious, at first globose, becoming expanded, .5 to 1 mm. in diameter, externally blackish, hymenium concave, yel- lowish to cinereous or quite black; asci cylindrical to clavate, 25 by 5 to 6; spores elongated elliptical 5 to 6 by 24; paraphyses very slender. On dead stems of Ambrosia trifida. As stated in previous reports the plants referred to this name here are larger than is usually indicated for this species but in other respects seem to conform well. There seems to be some difference of opinion as to what the real Peziza atrata Persoon was, the species having been originally reported on wood, which at the present time is known only on herbaceous stems. While the same species do often occur on 108 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN wood and herbaceous stems this difference here suggests a pos- sibility that the species has been misinterpreted. ORBILIA Fries, Summa Veg. Scand. 357. 1849. Plants orbicular, waxy-membranaceous, patellate, margin of- ten undulated, when dry horny; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores minute, straight or curved, slender. The plants of this genus occur commonly on rotten wood and bark and are characterized by the small, delicate, membranaceous discs which vary in color from nearly white to deep flesh-red. Two forms reported here which are very distinct, probably many others occur. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plantsedeepefiesh-red: =) 1). yee eee nr rn ee O. vinosa. Plants pale yellowish, . . sag. pee, es tal ho) Ore eee Orpiuia vinosa (A. & S.) Karst. Mye. Fenn. 1: 101. 1871. Peziza vinosa (A. & S.) Consp., Fung. 308. 1805. Calloria vinosa Fries, Summa. Veg. Seand. 359. 1849. Plants thickly gregarious, often confiuent, patellate with the hymenium nearly plane when occurring singly or very irregular when confluent, thin membranaceous, becoming horny when dry, bright flesh-red when fresh, fading somewhat when preserved for long periods, 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, margin even when young becoming undulate with age; asci clavate, 35 by 4 to 5p, 8-spored; spores very slender, straight or curved, about 10 to 15 by 1.5; paraphyses present. On rotten wood, Mt. Pleasant. Plants distinguished externally by the bright, flesh-red color and microscopically by the character of the spores. The species was collected in quantity. ORBILIA CHRYSOCOMA (Bull.) Sacc., Syll. Fung. 8: 624. 1889. Peziza chrysocoma Bull., Champ. France, 254. 1809. Calloria chrysocoma Fries, Summa Veg. Scand. 359. 1849. Plants sessile, at first closed becoming expanded, scattered or crowded and often confluent, .5 to 1 mm. in diameter, golden- IOWA DISCOMYCETES 109 yellow, thin and membranaceous; asci and spores as in the pre- ceding. The plants are very similar in every respect to the preceding except that the color is golden-yellow instead of flesh-red as in that species. The spores of the two species are so minute that . they are studied with difficulty. FAMILY 9. PATELLARIACEZ. Plants either superficial on the surface of the substratum or at first immersed becoming erumpent, for the most part leathery or hard, dark colored, black, hemispherical or hysteriform, then expanded becoming elliptical or circular in outline; asci 8- to many-spored; spores globose, elliptical or elongated and filiform, 1- to many-septate, -hyaline or colored. The plants of this family are dark in color resembling in this respect those of the Pyrenomycetes. The family also grades into the lichens so that it is difficult to draw any fast line between the two groups. PATELLARIA Fries, Syst. Orbis. Veg. 113. 1825. Apothecia for the most part, sessile, and never immersed, black, often bluish with transmitted light, rounded, or linear; asci clavate, thick-walled, 4- to 8-spored; spores fusoid, often larger at one end becoming clavate, straight or bent 3- to many-septate, 2-seriate, hyaline; paraphyses branched, forming an epithecium. When the genus Patellaria was established by Fries Patellaria -atrata (Hedw.) was designated as the type of the genus, the species being a hyaline-spored form, but notwithstanding this fact that species has been taken out of this genus and placed in the genus Lecanidion by recent writers. The genus Patellaria as treated by Saccardo in Syll. Fung. is represented by the col- ored-spored forms. If the genus as founded by Fries is valid it should contain the hyaline-spored species and the brown-spored forms should be placed in the genus Mycolecidea founded by Karst. Two species; one very common in the state. 110 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN KEY TO THE SPECIES. Asci 8-spored. . ; 3 - c : c - A . WL. atrata. Asci 4-spored. . . : , ‘ : : g . . SP. tétraspora. PATELLARIA ATRATA (Hedw.) Fries, Syst. Orbis. Veg. 113. 1825. Iichen atratus Hedw., Laub-Moose 2: 73. 1789. Peziza patellaria Pers., Syn. Fung. 670. 1801. Lecanidion atratum Rabenh., Krypt Fl. 1: 342. 1844. Plants small, 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, sessile, patelliiform with the margin elevated, black (bluish with transmitted lght) ; hy- menium plane, of the same color; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores fusoid to clavate, 5 to 7-septate, hyaline 35 to 50 by 6 to 7p; paraphyses filiform, branched, ends enlarged forming an epithe- cium. On various kinds of dead wood, Carpinus, Celtis, Carya, Jug- lans, Populus, Quercus, Salix, Viburnum, Vitis, Ulmus and on herbaceous stems, common. PATELLARIA TETRASPORA Massee & Morgan; Morgan, Jour. Mye. Sras0 1902, Plate 36, f. m1. Lecanidion tetraspora Seaver, Proc. Iowa Acad. Sei. 12: 118. 1905. This species is similar in every way to the preceding with the exception of the asci and spores. The asci are 8-spored and nat- urally a little narrow and the spores are somewhat larger. This might seem to be only a variety of the preceding but ecare- ful study of the plants of the species which have been collected several times in Iowa seems to show the 4-spored character to be constant. In none of the plants were both 4-spored and 8-spored asci found but they were always either 4 or 8-spored. The plants containing 8-spored asci show the asci to be broader and clavate while those containing 4-spored asci show them to be more nearly eylindrical and much narrower as would follow from the smaller number of spores contained. KARSCHIA Koerber, Parerga Lich. 459. 1865. External characteristics the same as those of the genus Patel- IOWA DISCOMYCETES +44 laria from which the plants can be distinguished only on micro- scopic characters; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores elliptical to fusoid, 1-septate, becoming brown. One species of the genus found to be very common in Iowa. KARSCHIA TAVELIANA Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. FI. 1°: 1223. 1896. Plate 36, f. 1. Plants scattered or closely crowded, at first concave, becoming plane with the margin often slightly elevated, black, rounded in form or when crowded becoming irregular often in dense masses; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores irregularly crowded, elliptical or with ends slightly narrowed, 1-septate, brown, often a little eurved; 14 to 18 by 4u; paraphyses a little enlarged upward and forming an epithecium. On old wood especially butternut (Juglans), Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant. This species has been listed in previous reports as Karschia lignyota but according to Dr. Rehm it is distinct from that spe- cies although apparently close to it. The plants have been found to be very common in Iowa on partially decayed wood but seem to show a decided preference for butternut. MYCOLECIDEA Karst., Medd. Soc. Fauna Fl. Fenn. 16: 27. 1888. External characteristics the same as those of the genus Patel- laria; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores 3 to many-septate, brown; paraphyses branched and enlarged upwards forming an epithe- cium, brownish. One species collected in Iowa which is the type of the genus as founded by Karsten. MYCOLECIDEA TRISEPTATA Karst., Medd. Soc. Fauna FI. Fenn. 16: 27. 1888. Plate 40;-£. 1. Patellaria triseptata Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 787. 1889. Leciographa triseptata Morgan, Jour. Mye. 8: 180. 1902. Plants scattered, superficial, patellate, .5 to 1 mm. in diameter ; 112 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN hymenium at first concave, becoming plane with the margin often a little elevated; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores crowded in the ascus, elliptical, a little curved, 3-septate, at first hyaline becom- ing pale brown, 15 to 20 by 5y, slightly constricted at the septa; paraphyses filiform, thickened above and forming a brown epi- thecium. On old wood of oak, Mt. Pleasant. The plants are very similar in general appearance to those of Patellaria atrata (Hedw.) Fries but appear brown with trans- mitted light rather than bluish as in that species. Also the spores are very different being much smaller and brown. One collection of the species was made but in considerable quantity. HYSTEROPATELLA Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. 1°: 367. 1896. Apothecia at first buried becoming erumpent, sessile, linear, straight or bent, simple or branched, later elliptical or roundish, often becoming patelliform, black; asci ovate or very broad, 8- spored; spores elongated, straight or curved, usually 4-celled, at first hyaline, becoming brownish. The plants of this genus stand intermediate between those of the Hysterinee on the one side and the Patellariacex on the other. They are at first hysteriform the lps expanding until they be- come boat-shaped and under favorable conditions of moisture entirely patelliform at least in some of the species included here with this genus. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Spores elliptical. Spores about 15 by 4u. . : 2 4 : : . Ht. prosti. Spores.about 23 by 8. “oo ysl) 20 oacs ve eel Seneca Spores clavate. . . ae ee shee - «, »« \« clavtsnora, FIYSTEROPATELLA PROSTII (Duby) Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. FI. 122 301 A896: Hysterium prostu. Duby, Bot. Gall. ed. 2. 719. 1830. Plants gregarious or scattered, at first hysteriform, .5 to 1 mm. in length, lips soon spreading becoming boat-shaped, especially when moist; asci broad, ovate, 8-spored, about 50 by 10; spores slightly curved, pale brownish when mature, 3-septate, elliptical, 15 by Au. | IOWA DISCOMYCETES 113 On bark of Ulmus, Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant, rather common. The species has also been observed and studied in North Da- kota and probably has a wide distribution. HYSTEROPATELLA ELLIPTICA (Fries) Rehm, Rabenh, Krypt. FI. 1°: 368. 1896. Hysterium ellipticum Fries, Obs. Mye. 1: 195. 1815. Plants gregarious or often crowded in little clusters bursting through the epidermis, similar in general appearance to the pre- ceeding but a little larger; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores elliptical, at first hyaline, becoming pale brown, 3-septate, 23 by 8x. On bark (Pyrus) Mt. Pleasant. The plants are quite similar in external appearance to the preceding but show a marked difference in the size of the spores. The plants from which the description has been drawn have been examined by Dr. Rehm and referred to this species. HYSTEROPATELLA CLAVISPORA (Peck) comb. nov. Plate 36; f£. 1. Tryblidium clavisporum Peck, Ann Rep. N. Y. St. Mus. 35: 143. 1883. Patellaria clavispora Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 787. 1889. Leciographa clavispora Morgan, Jour. Mye. 8: 180. 1902. Plants gregarious, at first immersed becoming erumpent, hys- teriform with the lips gradually spreading becoming boat-shaped and under favorable conditions of moisture the plants become entirely rounded and patelliform, black; asci broad-clavate, con- tinued below into a stem-like base, 75 by 15 to 18y, 8-spored; spores 2-seriate or irregularly crowded, at first hyaline, becoming yellowish finally pale brown, 3 to 5-septate (rarely 5), clavate with the narrow end below, with an oil-drop in each cell, 25 to 30 by 8 to 94; paraphyses forming a black epithecium. On bark of willow also on decorticated wood of willow (Salix) and cottonwood (Populus), Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant, com- mon. ’ The plants of this species have been collected and studied by the writer for several years and so far have been found only on 114 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN the two hosts named above. They are most common on the in- side of dead, loose bark of willow where they occur often in great abundance. The inner bark of a dead willow in Mt. Pleasant was found to be entirely covered with these plants. Specimens which had fallen in a damp place showed the apothecia to be ex- panded and entirely circular in form while younger specimens of those in drier conditions were hysteriform with the lips more or less spreading. In the judgment of the writer, this would seem to be a typ- ical representative of the genus Hysteropatella as established by Rehm and for this reason I have ventured to make the combina- tion. Specimens from the herbarium of the writer have been exam- ined by Mr. Peck and the identification reported to be correct. This is a fine species very distinct in the decidedly clavate pale brown spores, entirely different from Patellaria clavispora Berk & Br. BLITRYDIUM DeNotaris, Comm. Critt. It. 1: 374. 1863. Apothecia fleshy-coriaceous, at first buried, becoming erum- pent, opening irregularly finally becoming patelliform; asci cla- vate, 4 to 8-spored; spores elliptical or elongated, becoming muri- form, at first hyaline, becoming pale yellowish-brown. One species found in Iowa. BLITRYDIUM FENESTRATUM (Cooke & Peck) Sacc., Syll. Fung. 8: 805. 1889. Plate 40, f. 1. Patellaria fenestrata Cooke & Peck; Peck Ann. Rep. N. Y. St. Mus. 28: 68. 1879. Plants at first immersed springing through the outer bark singly or in small groups, at first linear or triangular or more or less star-shaped, lips expanding gradually becoming patellate and at last entirely circular in outline; hymenium plane with the margin elevated, black, appearing rough; asci very broad-clavate, with a long stem-like base, 8-spored, 125 by 25u; spores very large, clavate, at first hyaline, then yellowish-brown about 10 to IOWA DISCOMYCETES 115 12-septate and muriform with an oil-drop in each eell, 45 to 50 by 15 to 184; paraphyses forming an epithecium. On dead branches of Populus tremuloides, Decorah. The only Jowa material of this species seen was that collected by Mr. Holway but the species has been found by the writer to be very common in North Dakota on dead branches of the above host in aspen timber near Fargo. FAMILY 10. CENANGIACEA. Plants at first immersed, becoming erumpent for the most part dark colored, at first closed later opening and concave to plane; asci mostly 8-spored; spores elongated to filiform, 1 to many- celled, often muriform, hyaline to brown; paraphyses branched forming an epithecium. CENANGIUM Fries, Syst. Mye. 2: 177. 1822. Cups scattered or tufted at first immersed, then breaking through the substratum, sessile, leathery or waxy, brown or blackish; receptacle cup-shaped or nearly plane; asci clavate, 8- spored, elongate, cylindrical or tapering at the ends; spores sim- ple, hyaline; paraphyses enlarged at their apices, forming an epithecium. Two species collected in the state. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants sessile, deep, cup-shaped. . . . . . = .C. populnewm. Plants short stipitate, hymenium nearly plane. . . CC. rubiginosum. *CENANGIUM POPULNEUM (Pers.) Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. 13: 220. 1896. Plate 39, f. 1. Peziza populnea Pers., Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 35. 1797. Peziza fascicularis A. & §., Conspect. Fung., 315. 1805. Dermatea fascicularis Fries, Summa. Veg. Seand., 362. 1849. Encoelia fascicularis Karst., Mye. Fenn. 1: 217. 1871. Cenangium fascicularie Karst., Act. Soc. Fauna Fl. Fenn. 2: 145. 1885. 116 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN CENANGIUM RUBIGINOSUM (Fries) Sacc., Syll. Fung. 8: 569. 1889. Plate 38, f. m1. Peziza rubigimosa Fries, Elench. Fung 2: 7. 1828. Plants springing singly or in clusters of 2 to 4 from beneath the bark tapering below into a short stem-like base; hymenium concave, becoming nearly plane; plants about 2 mm. in diameter, externally reddish-brown and rough, more or less wrinkled; hy- menium darker, nearly black or purplish; asci clavate, 8-spored, 125 by 15y, spores 1-seriate or slightly crowded near the apex of the ascus, elliptical to fusoid, mostly narrower toward the lower end, pyriform, and unsymmetrical, 17 by 7 to 8u; paraphyses numerous, a little enlarged upwards. On dead limbs of Carpinus caroliniana, Decorah, Iowa, E. W. D. Holway, also reported from London, Canada, and South Carolina. The material collected in Iowa is distributed in Ellis, North Am. Fungi, 992. According to Sacecardo Cenangium rubiginosum Cooke in Ravenel, Fungi. Am. Exsice 635 is different. While this species seems to have been collected in several lo- ealities there is little mention of it in the literature of N. Am. Fungi. DERMATEA Fries, Summa Veg. Seand. 362. 1849. Apothecia erumpent-superficial, often cespitose at the base, and with a more or less well developed stroma; hymenium con- cave or plane; asci cylindrical to clavate, 8-spored; spores ellip- tical or elongated, simple, hyaline. The genus is close to Cenangium. One species which has been described from Iowa material. DERMATEA OLIVASCENS Rehm, Ann. Myce. 5: 80. 1907. Plate 38, f. 1. Apothecia scattered and occuring singly or in small clusters at first immersed, becoming erumpent, subglobose becoming patel- liform with the hymenium plane or convex, olive-brown, prui- IOWA DISCOMYCETES iF nose, .5 to 1.5 mm. in diameter with a short stem; asci clavate, 150 by 20 to 25y, 8-spored; spores elliptical, simple, 20 to 25 by 10 to 12u, 2-seriate with conspicuous oil drops; paraphyses 2p in diameter. On (dead?) branches of Crategus sp. Mt. Pleasant. The plants from which this species was described were collect- ed during the winter on branches of Crategus near Mt. Pleasant, where they occurred in abundance. According to Dr. Rehm the species is distinct from Dermatea cratoegicola Durand in which the spores are 35 to 50 by 15 to 17n. There is also some difference in the color of the plants in the two species. The asci appear to be filled with large, irregular oil drope, which are so conspicuous that it is with difficulty that the outline of the spores may be seen, but a faint outline can be detected. The spores when removed from the asci are often seen to contain 1 or more of these drops. TYMPANIS Tode, Fungi Meckl. 1: 24. 1790. Plants erumpent, single or in dense clusters, at first globose, closed, becoming expanded, for the most part with short, thick stem; asci thick-walled, 8-spored, spores producing numerous minute bodies which fill the ascus. One species collected in the state. TYMPANIS CONSPERSA Fries, Syst. Mye. 2: 175. 1822. Plants springing in minute dense clusters through the outer bark of the host, at first globose, becoming expanded, black; asci clavate, thick-walled, filled with granular material; spores not well developed; paraphyses branched, enlarged upwards. On bark of Populus sp. Iowa City. Dead branches of the host were thickly covered with the plants of this species which resemble those of the genus Dermatea exter- nally. The asci are well developed but the spores are indistinct or not well developed. SARCOSOMA Caspary; Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. Fl 1°: 497. 1896, Plants globose to ovate or cylindrical, sessile or stipitate, ex- 118 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN ternally dark colored, brown or blackish; tissue gelatinous; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores hyaline, simple, elliptical. Distinguished mainly by the hyaline spores. One species rath- er common in Jowa. *=SARCOSOMA RUFA (Schw.) Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. 13: 497. 1896. Plate 37,.4. 1. Bulgaria rufa Schw., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. II. 4: 178. 1832. BULGARIA Fries, Syst. Mye., 2: 166. 1821. Cups gregarious with a short, thick stem; forming at first un- der the bark, later breaking through; externally dark colored, rough, often with short hairs, gelatinous, shrinking much when dried; asci cylindrical, generally 8-spored; spores elliptical, or unequal-sided, simple, hyaline, then brown; paraphyses forming a colored epithecium; plants large, growing on wood. One species common about Iowa City. *BULGARIA INQUINANS (Pers.) Fries, Syst. Mye. 2: 167. 1828. Plate 37, f. 11. Peziza polymorpha Oeder, Fl. Dan. pl. 464. 1769. Peziza nigra Bull., Herb. France, pl. 116. 1782. Peziza inquinans Pers., Syn. Fung. 631. 1801. HOLWAYA Sacce., Syll. Fung. 8: 646. 1889. Plants stipitate; stem more or less tomentose; entire plant dark brown; hymenium plane or convex; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores elongated approaching filiform, many-septate. One species occurs in Iowa, which is the only representative of the genus. HOLWAYA GIGANTEA (Peck) Durand, Bull. Torrey Cl. 28: 354. 1901. Plate 38, f. 1m. Stilbum giganteum Peck, Ann. Rep. N. Y. St. Mus. 24: 93. 1871. Bulgaria ophiobolus Ellis, Am. Nat. 17: 193. 1883. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 119 ° Graphium giganteum Sacc., Syll. Fung. 4: 611. 1886. Holwaya ophiobolus Sace., Syll. Fung. 8: 646. 1889. Plants occurring singly or in cespitose clusters, stipitate; hy- Mmenium coneave, becoming plane or convex about 1 em. in diameter, dark-colored, brownish-black; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores in a fascicle in the ascus, very long, more or less tapering toward the end, many-septate, about 65 by 3 to 4, paraphyses filiform, slender and enlarged at their apices. . - On partially decayed wood, Decorah. The only specimens of this species examined are those col- lected by Mr. Holway in the northeast. part of the state. The plants are very distinct in the long filiform, many-septate spores. URNULA Fries, Summa Veg. Seand. 364. 1849. - Cups stipitate, urn-shaped, at first closed, then opening by a circular or stellate aperture, externally dark colored, furfura- ceous or clothed with dark colored, minute hairs; asci cylindrical, $-spored; spores oblong-elliptical. One species is common in woods in the early spring. URNULA CRATERIUM (Schw.) Fries, Summa Veg. Seand. 364. 1849. Plate 39, f. 1. Peziza craterium Schw., Schr. Nat. Ges. Leipzig 1: 117. 1822. Cenangium craterium (Schw.) Fries, Elench. Fung. 2: 21. 1828. Dermea craterium Schw., Trans. Am. Phil. Soe. II. 4: 237. 1832. Geopyzis craterium (Schw.) Rehm, Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. 1°: 974. 1896. Cups large, long stipitate, subcespitose, dark brownish-black. ‘at first closed, hollow within, opening at the top by an irregular rupture, leaving the margin notched, involute, clothed exter- nally with minute black hairs; asci very long, cylindrical, 8- ‘spored ; spores oblong, hyaline, granular within, 25 to 30 by 10u; -paraphyses slender, septate. 120 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN On half-buried branches and sticks in woods, Iowa City and Mt. Pleasant. A large species very common on decaying sticks in woods in the spring. A number of the plants may often be found attached to a small stick standing upright in a row. They are at first club-shaped, black structures, hollow in the center, finally open- ing by a star-shaped aperture at the apex, when mature leaving the margin notched. In Engler-Prantl Natiilichen Pflanzenfam- ilien this species is included with the subgenus Geopyzis and — there seems to be some difference of opinion as to whether this plant should be included with that subgenus, which is now treat- ed as a genus, or allowed to remain where it is.* ORDER III. PHACIDIINEZ. Apothecia free on the substratum or forming a stroma, at first immersed, becoming erumpent, roundish or elongated. FAMILY 11. STICTIDACEA. Apothecia bright-colored, never black, surrounded by the rough edges of the broken epidermis. PROPOLIS Fries, Syst. Myc. 2: 198. 1822. Apothecia at first immersed, becoming erumpent, surrounded by the rough edges of the broken epidermis; asci 8-spored; spores elliptical, simple, hyaline, usually with 2 oil-drops, 2- seriate, straight or curved. But one species of the genus and order can he reported on at this time. PROPOLIS FAGINEA (Schrad.) Karst., Myc. Fenn. 1: 244. 1871. Plate 40, f. 11. Hysterium fagineum Schrad., Jour. Bot. 2: 68. 1799. Stictis versicolor Fries., Syst. Mye. 2: 198. 1822. Propolis versicolor Fries, Summa Veg. Scand. 372. 1849. Plants at first immersed, becoming erumpent, usually elon- gated but often rounded; margin laciniate; hymenium farinose, ‘Bull; Dorrey, Cl. 29.13. IOWA DISCOMYCETES peat white or whitish, plane or a little convex especially when moist; asci broadly clavate, 8-spored; spores oblong, rounded at the ends, slightly curved with (usually) 2 oil-drops, large, 24 to 30 by 7 to 9u; paraphyses present, slender. On wood of various kinds, Mt. Pleasant, common. The plants are quite easily recognized by the elongated white patches on the surface of old pieces of wood and logs, the white patches which are often several millimeters in length being sur- rounded by the rough torn edges of the broken epidermis. This is a variable species and a long list of synonyms might be given. It has been collected by the writer at Mt. Pleasant on the follow- ing kinds of wood; Platanus occidentalis, Vitis vulpina, and Car- pinus caroliniana. The species has also been collected by the writer in New York and North Dakota and probably has a wide distribution. ORDER IV. HYSTERIINE. Apothecia at first immersed or always free on the substratum, more or less elongated, simple or occasionally branched, opening with a longitudinal cleft; asci 8-spored; paraphyses present, slender. FAMILY 12. HYSTERIACEA. Apothecia free on the substratum, elongated, straight or bent, oceasionally branched, opening with a longitudinal cleft; asci 8- spored, spores variable. HYSTERIUM Tode, Fungi. Meckl. 2: 3. 1791. Apothecia superficial or erumpent becoming superficial, ob- long or elliptical, carbonaceous or subearbonaceous, opening with a longitudinal cleft; asci clavate or cylindrical, mostly 8-spored ; spores elliptical, straight or curved, 2 to many-septate, brown. One species of the genus reported here. HYSTERIUM PULICARE Pers., Syn. Fung. 98. 1801. Hysterographium pulicare Corda, Ie. Fung. 5: 77. 1842. Apothecia scattered or gregarious, superficial, variable in form, VOL. vI—1. 9 192 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN oblong or elliptical, longitudinally striated, black, lips slightly opening, about 1 mm. long and half as broad; asci clavate, 8- spored; spores partially 2-seriate, straight or shghtly curved. 3-septate, scarcely constricted, 20 to 25 by 8u. On bark of wild cherry (Prunus sp.) The spores of this genus are similar to those of the genus Hysteropatella but the plants differ in that the lips do not ex- pand as in that genus or, if at all, only slightly. GLONIUM Muehl; Schw. Schr. Nat. Ges. Leipzig 1: 50. 1822. Plants erumpent, linear, elongated, sometimes radiately ar- ranged, carbonaceous or tough-membranaceous, opening by a longitudinal cleft; asci cylindrical to clavate, 8-spored; spores 1-septate, hyaline. Distinguished by the hyaline, 1-septate spores. Two species common. KEY TO THE SPECIES. Plants radiately arranged. : : ‘ : - : . G. stellatum. Plants lying parallel with each other. . 2 : . G. parvulum. GLONIUM STELLATUM Schw., Schr. Nat. Ges. Leipzig 1: 50. 1822. Subiculum effused, brownish-black, often covering consider- able area. (2 or more em.) composed of slender, branching, inter- woven hyphe; apothecia seated on the subiculum, radiately ar- ranged forming patches 2 to 4 em. in diameter, entirely cover- ing the subiculum, opening by narrow clefts; asci cylindrical, 8- spored; spores more or less crowded, fusoid, hyaline, 1-septate and constricted at the septum, 20 to 22 by 5 to 6p. On rotten wood of various kinds. A species very distinct from any of the other forms here de- seribed in the presence of the black subiculum and the stellately arranged apothecia. The species was wound in great quantity at Mt. Pleasant on decaying logs of butternut. It has also been observed in North Dakota and probably has a wide distribution. GLONIUM PARVULUM (Ger.) Sacc., Syll. Fung. 2: 735. 1883. Hysterium parvulum Ger., Bull. Torrey Cl. 5: 40. 1874. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 123 Apothecia densely gregarious, or occasionally scattered, small, .5 to 1 mm. long, roundish, mostly lying parallel with each other, opening with a longitudinal cleft; asci cylindrical, 8-spored; spores very small, hyaline, 1-septate, and constricted at the sep- tum, 7 by 3x. On old wood, common. Quite distinct. in the small roundish apothecia and the very small much constricted spores. Ellis makes G. microsporium Sace. identical with this species. Probably common and widely dis- tributed. GLONIELLA Sacce., Syll. Fung. 2: 765. 1883. Apothecia erumpent, oblong or linear, carbonaceous, black. with a longitudinal cleft; asci 4 to 8-spored; spores elongated, fusoid, 2 to many-septate, usually 3-septate, hyaline. One species of the genus collected in the state. GLONIELLA OVATE (Cooke) Sacc., Syll. Fung. 2: 765. 1883. Hysterium ovatum Cooke, Grevillea 11: 107. 1883. Plants gregarious, becoming superficial, ovate, obtuse, black, .5 to 1 mm. in length, longitudinally striated, lips for the most part closed; asci cylindrical to clavate, 8-spored; spores 15 to 18 by 8u, hyaline, becoming 3-septate. On oak wood, Mt. Pleasant. The species was collected in considerable quantity on old wood near Mt. Pleasant. The 3-septate character of the spores was at first overlooked but close examination shows them to be 3-sep- tate at maturity, the middle septum being formed first. HYSTEROGRAPHIUM Corda, Ic. Fung. 5: 34. 1842. Plants erumpent, sessile, elongated or elliptical, obtuse or subacute, mostly simple, opening with a narrow, elongated cleft, black, carbonaceous; asci clavate, 8-spored; spores 1 to 2-seriate, elliptical or ovate, obtuse, becoming muriform, brown. Only three species of this genus collected which seem a but others doubtless occur in the state. 124. NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN KEY TO THE SPECIES. Spores large, more than 25 long. Spores 25 to 30 by 8 to 10u, on bark of oak... . H. kansense. Spores 30 to 40 by 15 to 28u, on branches of ash. H. fraxim. Spores small, less than 254 in length. . : eee . H. mort. HYSTEROGRAPHIUM KANSENSE Ellis & Everhart, Erythea 2: 22. 1894. Plate 41, f. 1. Perithecia scattered, oblong, ends subacute, 1 to 1.25 by .5n, black, subconchiform, longitudinally striated, lps closed or slightly open so as to leave a narrow cleft; asci clavate, 80 to 110 by 12 to 14y, 8-spored; spores 2-seriate or ‘partially so, ovate or fusoid, 7 to 9-septate, with most of the cells finally divided by a longitudinal septum, brown, 25 to 30 by 8 to 10u. On bark of various species of Quercus. This species has been collected several times by the writer and on the bark of several different species of oak. It was at first taken to be H. stygium Cooke, but comparison with an au- thentic specimen of this species shows the spores to be much too narrow. This difference is also mentioned in the original de- scription of the species. Iowa material conforms well with the type of the species to which it is referred. HYSTEROGRAPHIUM FRAXINI (Pers.) De Not., Giorn. Bot. It. 2: 22. 1847. Plate 41, f. m1. Hysterium fraxini Pers., Syn. Fung. 100. 1801. Plants scattered or gregarious, erumpent, elliptical, black, ob- tuse, 1 to 1.5 mm. long, .5 to .75 mm. wide; lips swollen, smooth, partially open so as to expose the elongated hymenium; asci clavate, rounded above, 150 to 200 by 30 to 40u, 8-spored; spores 2-seriate, oblong-elliptical, scarcely constricted in the middle, 7 to 9-septate and muriform, dark brownish, 30 to 40 by 15 to 18u. On dead branches of FPraxinus. This species occurs in abundance on the dead branches and twigs of various species of Fraxinus before or after the bark is removed. The species appears to be common in localities where IOWA DISCOMYCETES 125 the ash is native and its distribution is probably coéxtensive with that of the host. In North Dakota this species has been observed in great quan- tities. One collection on branches of Yanthorylum americanum seems identical both in internal and external characters. HYSTEROGRAPHIUM MORI (Schw.) Rehm,, Ber. Natuhr. Ver. Augsburg 26: 90. 1881. Plate 41, f. 1. Hysterium mori Schw., Trans. Am. Phil. Soe. IT. 4: 244. 1832. Plants erumpent-superficial, elliptical to linear or cylindrical, 1 to 3 mm. long, and .5 to 1 mm. wide, mostly straight or lying parallel with the grain of the wood, gregarious or crowded, often covering the substratum more or less longitudinally striated; lips mostly closed at first, finally more or less spreading; asci cylindrical, about 100 by 12», 8-spored; spores 1-seriate or more or less crowded together above, ovate, smaller below, 3 to 5- septate, a little constricted at the middle septum, cells divided by a longitudinal septum, brown, 15 to 25 by 7 to 8x. On decorticated wood of various kinds. This is a very common, abundant and variable species, oceur- ring on nearly every kind of wood. Specimens found commonly on old wood of butternut conform well with the description of H. cinerascens Schw., but I can find no reliable character by which it can be distinguished from the present species. BIBLIOGRAPHY Auerswald, B., Sarcosphaera Awd. novum genus Discomycetum. Hed- wigia 8: 82-83. 1869. *Afzelius, A. De vegetabilius Suecanis observationes et experimenta. Vet. Acad. Hand]. 1785. De Albertini, J. B. & Schweinitz, L. D. Conspectus Fungorum in Lusa- tie superioris agro Niskiensi crescentium, e methodo Persooniana. 1805. *Literature not accessible to the writer, citations given on other authority than our own. 126 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN DeBary, H. A. Comparative Morphology and Biology of the fungi, myce- tozoa and bacteria. 1887. : Berkeley, Rev. M. J. Outlines of British Fungology; containing charac- ters of above a thousand species of fungi, and a complete list of all that have been described as natives of the British Isles. London. 1860. ————Notices of Brtish Fungi. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1838-1848. Notices of North American Fungi. Grevillea 3: 145-160. 1875. & Broome, C. E. Notices of British Fungi. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1848-1883. Bosc, M. Mémoire sur quelques espéces de Champignons des parties méri- dionales de 1’Amérique Septentrionali. Berl. Mag. 5: 83-89. 1811. Boudier, M. E. Mémoire sur les Ascobolés. Ann. Sci. Nat. V. 10: 191- 268, pl. 5-12. 1869. Nouvelle classification naturelle des discomycétes charnus. Bull. Soe. Myce. 1: 91-120. 1885. On the importance that should be attached to the dehis- cence of asci in the classification of the Discomycétes. Grevillea 8: 45-48. 1879. (A translation by W. Phillips). Nouvelles espéces de Champignons de France. Bull. Soe. Mye. France. 10: 59-68, pl. 1, 2. 1894. Bulliard, P. Herbier de la France, ou collection complette des plantes indigénes de ce royaume, avee leurs détails anatomiques, leurs pro- priétés et leurs usages en medecine. 12 vols. Paris. 1780-1795. Histoire des champignons de la France, ou traité élémen- taire renfermant dans un ordre méthodique les descriptiones et les figures des champignons qui croissent naturellement en France. 1791- 1812. *Carus, F. W. In Nov. Act. Ac. Nat. Cur. 17: 370-375, pl. 10-31. 1864. Caspary, R. Sarcosoma in Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. 13: 497. 1896. Cooke, M. C. Pezize Americane a M. C. Cooke descriptae. Hedwigia 14: 81-85. 1875. -Mycographia, seu Icones Fungorum; figures of fungi from all parts of the world drawn and illustrated by M. ©. Cooke, M. A., A. L. §., ete., vol. 1 Discomycetes. 1875-1879. North American Fungi. Grevillea 11: 106-111. 1883. Corda, A. C. I. Icones fungorum hucusque cognitorum. 6 vols. 1837- 1854. Crouan, M. M. Note sur quelques Ascobolus nouveaux et sur une espéce nouvelle de Vibrissea. Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 7: 173-178, pl. 4. 1857. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 127 Crouan, M. M. Note sur neuf Ascobolus nouveaux. Ann Sci. Nat. IV. 10: 193-199. 1858. Currey, Frederick. Notes on British Fungi. Trans. Linn. Soc. 24: 151- 160, pl. 25 and 24: 491-496, pl. 51. 1864. Desmaziéres, J. B. H. J. Notice sur quelques cryptogames nouvelles qui ont ete publiées, en nature, dans les fascicules 14-17 des plantes cryp- togames de France (1). Ann. Sci. Nat. IT. 6: 242-247. 1836. Dillenius, J. J. Appendix ad catalogum sponte circa Giessam nascentium, #719. Duby, J. E. De Candolle, Botanicon Gallicum seu synopsis plantarum in flora Gallica descriptarum. 1830. Durand, E. J. The classification of the fleshy Pezizinee with reference to the structural characters illustrating the basis of their division into families. Bull. Torrey Cl. 27: 463-495. 1900. Studies in North American Discomyectes I. The genus Holwaya Sace. Bull. Torrey Cl. 28:348-355, pl. 26. 1901. Studies in North American Discomycetes II. Some new or noteworthy species from central and western New York. Bull. Tor- rey. Cl. 29: 458-465. 1902. Peziza fusicarpa Ger. and Peziza semitosta B. & C. Jour Mye. 12: 28-32. 1906. Ellis, J. B. New species of North American Fungi. Am. Nat. 17: 192- 196. 1883. oy New North American Fungi. Bull. Torrey Cl. 9: 18-20. 1882. & Everhart, B. M. New West American Fungi. Erythea 2: 17-26. 1894. New Species of Fungi. Bull. Torrey Cl. 10: 97-98. 1883. & Holway, E. W. D. New Fungi from Iowa. Jour. Mye. 1: 4-6. 1885. Fries, Elias. Systema Orbis Vegetabilis. Primas lineas nove construc- tionis periclitatur. 1825. , Elenchus Fungorum, sistens commentarium in systema my- ecologicum. 2 vols. 1828. , Systema mycologicum sistens fungorum ordines, genera et species hue usque cognitas, quas normam methodi naturalis deter- minavit, disposuit atque descripsit. 3 vols. 1821, 1822, and 1829. Summa vegetabilium Scandinavie, seu enumeratio, syste- matica et critica, plantarum tum cotyledonarum quum nemearum inter mare occidentale et album, inter Eidoram et Nordkap, hae- tenus lectarum, una cum singule distributione geographica. 1845- 1849. 128 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Fuckel, L. Ueber rheinische Ascobolus-arten. Hedwigia 5: 1-5. pl. 1. 1866. Symbole mycologice; beitrage zur kenntiss der rheinischen pilze. Jahr. Nass. Vereins Nat. 23, 24, 25, and 26. 1869-1871. Gerard, W. R. New species of Fungi. Bull. Torrey Cl. 4: 64. 18738. New Fungi. Bull. Torrey Cl. 5: 39-40. 1874. Gillet, C. C. Champignons de France. Les Discomycétes. 1879-1888. Greville, R. K. Flora Edinensis; or A description of plants growing near Edinburg, arranged according to the Linnean system with a concise introduction to the natural orders of the class Cryptogamia, and il- lustrative plates. 1824. Hedwig, D. R. A. Microscopisch-analytische Beschreibungen und Ab- bildungen neuer und zweifelhartter Laub-moose wie auch anderer zu der cryptogamischen Classe des Linné gehoriger Gewichse. vol. 2. 1789. Observationum Botanicarum, fase. 1. 1802. Hoffman, G. F. Vegetabilia cryptogamica, fase. 2. 1790. Jacquin, N. J. Miscellanea austriaca ad botanicam, chemiam, et histo- riam naturalem spectantia cum figuris. vol. 2. 1781. Karsten, P. A. Monograph Pezizarum fennicarum. Not. Sall| Fauna FI. Fenn. «‘orch. 10: 101-206. 1869. Revisio monographica atque synopsis Ascomycetum in Fen- nia hucusque detectorum. Act. Soc. Fauna Fl. Fenn 2: 1-174. 1885. Symbollb ad mycologiam Fennicam. Medd. Soc. Fauna FI. Fenn various volumes. Koerber, G. W. Parerga lichenologica erginzungen zum systema lichen- um Germanie. 1865. Kunze, G. und Schmidt, J. C. Mykologische Heft, nebst einem allgemein- botanischen Anzeiger. 1817. Leveille, M. J. H. Fragments Mycologiques. Ann. Sci. Nat. III. 9: 119- 144. 1848. Linnaeus, C. Flora Suecica exhibens plantas per regnum Suecilb cres- centes, systematice cum differentiis specierum, synonymis autorum, nominibus incolarum solo locorum usu pharmacopiborum. 1755. Species Plantarum, exhibentes plantas rite cognitas, ad gen- era relatas, cum differentiis specificis, nominibus trivialibus, synony- mis selectis, locis natalibus, secundum systema sexuale digestas. 2 vols. 1753. Massee, G. Redescription of Berkeley’s types of fungi. Part II. Jour. Linn. Soe. 35: 90-118, pl. 4, 5. 1901. Peziza rutilans Fr., and Peziza polytrichi, Schum. Grevil lea 22: 107-111, pl. 1894. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 129 Massee, G. & Crossland, C. The fungous-flora of Yorkshire: a complete account of the known fungi of the county. Trans. York. Nat. Un- ion 4, 1905. Morgan, A. P. The Discomycetes of the Miami valley, Ohio. Jour. Myc. 8: 179-192. 1902. : Mueller, O. F. Icones plantarum sponte nasoentium in regnis Danice et Norvegie et in ducatibus Slesvici, Holsatie et Oldenburg: ad illus- trandum opus de iisdem plantis, regio jussu exarandum, Flore Dani- ce. 5. 1782. Nees, C. G. Das System der Pilze und Schwimme. 1817. *de Notaris G. Osservazioni sul genere Patellaria, Parlatore. Gziorn. Bot. It. 1: 224-232. 1846. Proposte di aleune rettificazioni al profilo dei discomiceti. Comm. Soe. Critt. It. 1: 357-388. 1864. +Nylander, W. Observationes circa Pezizas fennie. Not. Saell. Fauna Fl. Fenn. 1868. Oeder, G. C. Icones plantarum sponte nascentium in regnis Danie et Norvegixw, ducatibus Slesvici et Holsatie, et in comiatibus Olden- burg et Delmenhorstiae Florae Danicae inscriptum 3, pl. 464, 534, regio jussu exarandum Florae Danicae inscriptum 3, pl. 464, 534, and 169. 1770. Persoon, C. H. Observationes mycologicae seu descriptiones tam novor- um, quam notabilium fungorum exhibitae. 1. 1796. Tentamen dispositionis methodicae fungorum in classes, ordines, genera et familias cum supplemento adjecto. 1797. Icones et descriptiones fungorum minus cognitorum. Fase. 1. 1798, Fase. 2. 1800. Synopsis methodica fungorum, sistens, Enumerationem om- nium hue usque detectarum specierum, cum brevibus descriptionibus nee non synonymis et observationibus selectis. 1801. Iecones pictae rariorum fungorum. 1803-1806. Mycologia Europaea seu complete omnium fungorum in variis Europaeae regionibus detectorum enumeratio, methodo natur- ali disposita: descriptione succincta, synonymia selecta et observa- tionibus ecriticis additis. 3 vols. 1822, 1825, and 1828. Peck, C. H. Annual Report on the New York State Museum of Natural History 24: 83 and 97. 1871, 28: 69. 1879 and 35: 143. 1882. Phillips, W. Fungi of California (Collected by Dr. H. W. Harkness and Mr. J. P. Moor). Grevillea 7: 20-23. 1878. 7A synopsis of this paper is contained in Bull. Soc. Bot. France. 16: 23 The original has not been seen. 130 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Phillips, W. A manual of the British disecomycetes with descriptions of all the species of fungi hitherto found in Britain, included in the family and illustrations of the genera. 1887. —————_-& Plowright, C. B. New and rare British fungi. Grevillea 2: 186-189. 1874. Quelet, L. Some new species of fungi from Jura and the Vosges. Gre- villea 8: 115-117. 1880. Quelques espéces critiques ou nouvelles de la flora myeolo- gique de France. Assoc. Frane. 1’Advane. Sci. 142: 444-454. 1886. Enchiridion fungorum in Europa media et presertim in Gallia vigentium. 1886. Rabenhorst, L. Peziza Dehnii eine neue Pilzform. Bot. Zeitung 1: 11- 12. 1843. Krypt. Fl. (see Rehm) Reade, J. M. Preliminary notes on some species of Sclerotinia. Ann. Mye. 6: 109-115. 1908. Rehm, H. Ascomyceten. Fase 1-11. Ber. Naturh. Ver. Augsburg 26: 1-132. 1881. Die Pilze Deutschlands, Oesterreichs und der Schweiz. As- comyceten: Hysteriaceen und Discomyceten. Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. 18: 1896. Ascomycetes Americae borealis. Ann. Mye. 3: 516-520. 1905. Ascomycetes exs. Fase. 36. Ann. Mye. 4: 64-71. 1906. Ascomycetes novi. 1. Ascomycetes Americae borealis. Ann. Mye. 4: 336-338. 1906. Ascomycetes exs. Fase. 38. Ann. Myce. 5: 78-85. 1907. Rouppert, C. Revision du genre Sphaerosoma. Bull. Acad. Sci. Cracavie for 1909: 75-95. 1909. Saccardo, P. A. Fungi Veneti novi vel ecritici vel mycologiae venetae addendi. Michelia 1: 1-72. 1879. Conspectus generum Discomycetum hucusque cognitorum. Bot. Cent. 18: 213-220. 1884. Sylloge Fungorum. 8. 1889. Schaeffer, J. C. Fungorum qui in Bavaria et Palatinatu cirea Ratisbon- am nascuntur icones nativis coloribus expressae. 3 vols. 1762, 1767, and 1770. Schrader, H. A. Plantae cryptogamicae novae, rariores aut minus cog- nitae. Jour. fur die Bot. 2: 55-70. 1799. Schroeter, J.; E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 11. 1897. Schumacher, C. F. Enumeratio plantarum in partibus Saellandiae sep- tentrionalis et orientalis. 2 vols. 1801 and 1803. IOWA DISCOMYCETES 131 de Schweinitz, L. D. Synopsis fungorum Carolinae superioris secundum observationes. Schr. Nat. Ges. Leipzig 1: 26-131, pl. 1, 2. 1818. ——————Synopsis fungorum in America boreali media degentium secundum observationes. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 4: 141-316. 1832. Scopoli, J. A. Flora Carnolica exhibens plantas Carnioliae indigenas et distributas in classes, genera, species, varietates, ordine Linnaeano. vol 2: 1772. Seaver, F. J. Discomycetes of eastern Iowa. Bull. Lab. Nat. Hist. St. Univ. Iowa. 5: 335-407, pl. 1-25. 1904. A new species of Sphaerosoma. Jour. Myc. 11: 2-5, pl. 1905. An annotated list of Iowa discomycetes. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sei. 12: 105-120. 1905. Notes on the discomycete flora of Iowa. Proc. Iowa Acad. of Sci. 13: 71-74. 1906. Discomycetes of North Dakota. Mycologia 1: 104-114. 1909. —————Studies pyrophylous fungi—I. Occurrence and cultivation of Pyronema. Mycologia 1: 131-139. 1909. Sowerby, J. Coloured figures of English fungi or mushrooms. 3 vols. 1797, 1799, and 1803. Tulasne, L. R. Selecta fungorum carpologia, et documenta et icones potissimum exhibens quae varia fructuum et seminum genera in Weinmann, J. A. Hymeno-et gastero-mycetes hucusque in imperio ros- triei, Phacidiei, Pezizei. 1865. Tode, H. I. Fungi Mecklenburgenses selecti. Fase. 1 and 2. 1790 and vce Vahl, M. Florae Danicae (1. c.) pl. 1200. 1797. Weinmann, J. A. Hymeno-et gastero mycétes hucusque in imperio ros- sico observatos. 1836. - 13 10 JOU, EXPLANATION OF PLATE 2 LEOTIA LUBRICA (Scop.) Pers. a. Cluster of plants natural size. b. Ascus with paraphysis and spores X 500. ce. One spore X 1500. MORCHELLA DELICIOSA Fries, a. One plant natural size. b. Ascus with paraphysis and spores < 500. ce. One spore X 1200. MOoRCHELLA ESCULENTA (L.) Pers. a. One plant natural size. b. Ascus with paraphysis and spores X 500. ce. One spore X 1200. CSE (oH ay — iS) , , ("A P L ATE 2 EXPLANATION OF PLATE 4 I. GYROMITRA ESCULENTA (Pers.) Fries. a. Plants natural size. b. Ascus with paraphysis and spores < 700. ce. One spore X 1500. II. HEtvELLA LAcuNosA Afzel. a. Plants natural size. sae b. Ascus with paraphysis and spores < -70(): e. One spore X 1500. 134 Pate 4 th TE mtn Pyparerent ha cc eee A NL IO? ro TTT Rae re — Dy. QYBBDIO'D ag rae ‘ EXPLANATION OF PLATE 6 SPHZROSOMA ECHINULATUM Seaver. a. Several plants natural size. Plants of different ages x 5. Section of a plant showing position of Hymenium X 30. Ascus with spores before maturity x 500. Young spore showing surrounding membrane X 1000. Spore showing the early stages in the roughening of the outer sur- face < 1000. g. Ascus with paraphysis and spores at maturity xX 600. ho as Pate 6 i ‘ -- - 2 137 vi--l. 10 VOL 138 IDL II. EXPLANATION OF PLATE 11 LACHNEA PALUDOSA (Boud.) Sace. ho ao op Plants natural size. Several plants x 5. Ascus with spores < 600. One hair from exterior of cup X 300. Spore showing internal characters X 1500 Mature spore showing external markings X 1500. LACHNEA AURANTIOPSIS Ellis from type material. a. b. C. One plant about natural size. Hair from exterior of cup x 500. Aseus with spores x 500. LACHNEA ABUNDANS (Karst.) Sace. a. b. Cc. d. es Plants natural size. Several plants x 5. Hair from exterior of cup x 600. Ascus with spores and paraphyses < 800. One spore X 2500. PuatTE 11 PRD Pal ~ ia: an ahi: > Sy FE Ly one JF > 139 10, He ave 140 EXPLANATION OF PLATE 12 BARLHZA MINIATA (Crouan) Sace. a. Plants natural size. b. One spore X 1500. BARL#A CINNABARINA (Fuckel) Sace. a. Plants natural size. b. Two spores X 1200. BARLZA AMETHYSTINA (Quel.) Sace. a. Asecus with spores and paraphyses < 600. b. One spore showing internal markings X 1500. ce. One spore showing external markings X 1500. BARLZA CREC’HQUERAULTIT (Crouan) Sace. a. Plants natural size. b. One plant X 5. ce. Immature spore X 1500. d. Mature spore showing external characters X 1500. e. Ascus with spores x 600. 12 7 “a Puat 141 EXPLANATION OF PLATE 14 I. DETONIA TRACHYCARPA (Curr.) Sace. a. Plants natural size. b. Ascus with spores X 700. ce. Ascus showing operculum xX 1000. d. One spore showing external markings < 1500, II. PEzizA BADIA Pers. a. Plants natural size. b. Ascus with spores and paraphysis < 600. III. PEzIzA BRUNNEO-ATRA Desm. a. Plants natural size. b. Ascus with spores < 500. e. One spore showing markings X 1500. 142 PuatEe 14 148 EXPLANATION OF PLATE 15 I. PEzIzA BADIA Pers. (form collected in deep woods). a. Plants natural size, b. Ascus with spores and paraphysis x 800. ec. One spore showing markings < 1500. II. PEzIZA REPANDA Pers. a. Plants of several ages natural size. b. Ascus with spores and paraphysis & 700. ce. One spore X 1500. 144 146 We BOE EXPLANATION OF PLATE 19 MACROPODIA MACROPUS (Pers.) Fuckel. a. Plants of different ages natural size. b. Ascus with paraphyses and spores X 300. ec. One spore X 800. ACETABULA SULCATA (Pers.) Fuckel. a. One plant natural size. b. Ascus with paraphysis and spores X 400. ce. One spore X 1200. ACETABULUM ACETABULUM (L.) comb, nov. a. Two plants natural size. b. Ascus with paraphysis and spores X 500. ¢. One spore X 1200. Piate 19 { ! vs Nod . het Sih | Ree ' HH ote a ) g Fe i ‘ aie Vi Saaea se ay Hh Er Pe i ~— a eles | 1 = ae SNIDOO ——————— 147 148 IDE: EXPLANATION OF PLATE 23 PHIALEA FRUCTIGENA (Bull.) Gill. a. Plants natural size showing substrata. b. Several plants “x 5. ce. Ascus with spores and paraphysis X 1000. d. Spores xX 2000. HELOTIUM FRIESII (Weim.) Sace. a. Plants natural size. b. One plant X 10. ce. Ascus with spores and paraphysis 1500. d. One spore X 3000. CHLOROSPLENIUM CHLORA (Schw.) Massee. a. Plants natural size. b. Two plants < 10. e. Ascus with paraphysis and spores & 2000. d. Two spores X 4000. PLATE 23 9 14 ie iEiTe EXPLANATION OF PLATE 24 CHLOROSPLENIUM RUGINOSUM (Cider) DeNotaris. a. Plants natural size. b. Two plants xX 5. ce. Ascus with paraphysis and spores X 1500. d. Spores SCOT . “s Cah os TIT | CaS Ait y ~ ~ PSF So “eazZ Pik te at a = oN ee ceed tet. ee Soe 5 pede ve 11 vou vi—l. i EXPLANATION OF PLATE 30 ASCOBOLUS VIRIDIS Curr. d. e. Plants natural size, Plants X 5. Ascus with spores and paraphyses xX 800. One spore not fully mature X 1200. . Mature spores X 1200. ASCOBOLUS LEVEILLEIL Boud. d. Plants natural size. Several plants * 10. “ Ascus with spores and paraphyses xX 800. Two spores X 1500. PiatE 30 155 EXPLANATION OF PLATE 36 I. KARSCHIA TAVELIANA Rehm. a. Plants natural size. b. Plants a little enlarged. ce. Ascus with paraphyses and spores X 800. d. Portion of an empty ascus < 1000. e. Two spores X 1800. II. HYSTEROPATELLA CLAVISPORA (Peck) comb. nov. Plants natural size. Plants a little enlarged. Several plants showing different forms xX 5. Ascus with paraphyses and spores X 800. Two spores X 1500. Pas op III. PATELLARIA TETRASPORA Massee & Morgan. a. Plants natural size. b. Ascus with spores & 1000. c. Plants) >< 3: 156 ( ( i > ———_ 1) a meseaan eter se 157 Ocs ae 2S eae Yootias ——— Puate 36 1 AT CENANGIUM RUBIGINOSUM (Fries) Sace. “b. ‘Pwo clusters of plants x 3. EXPLANATION oF PLATE 38 DERMATEA OLIVASCENS Rehm. : oe a. Clusters of plants natural size. b. Several clusters xX 4. e. Ascus with spores < 600. d. One spore X 1200. a. Clusters of plants natural size, e. One plant x 5. d. Ascus with spores X 700. e. One spore x 1500. “« HoLwWavA GIGANTEA (Peck) Durand. a. Plants natural size. b. One plant x 5. ce. Ascus with spores and See x 500. d. Two spores < 1000. —— <—qcttoe SSE II OSS Crim Ms — PLaTE 388 EXPLANATION OF PLATE 40 I. MyYcOLECIDEA TRISEPTATA Karst. a. Several plants natural size. b. One plant < 10. d. Aseus with spores X 1000. e. One spore X 1200. II. BLirRyDIUM FENESTRATUM (Cooke & Peck) Sace. a. Several plants natural size. b. Two plants X 10. — ce. Ascus with spores X 600. d. One spore * 1000. III. PRopouis FAGINEA (Schrad.) Karst. a. Several plants natural size. b. One plant X 5. ce. Ascus with spores < 600. d. Two spores X 800. 160 Prate 40 aT. iene EXPLANATION OF PLATE 41 HYSTEROGRAPHIUM KANSENSE Ellis & Everhart. a. Plants natural size on bark. b. One plant x<-.10. ce. Ascus with spores and paraphyses x 800, d. Two spores X 1500. HYSTEROGRAPHIUM MORI (Schw.) Rehm. a. Plants natural size. ; b. One plant X 10. ce. Ascus with paraphyses and ee x 700. d. One spore X 1500. HYSTEROGRAPHIUM FRAXINI (Pers.) DeNotaris. a. Plants natural size. b. Ascus with paraphyses and spores < 800. ce. One spore X 1500. Prats 41 A FOSSIL BURROWING SPONGE FROM THE IOWA DEVONIAN BY A. 0. THOMAS. Cliona hackberryensis, nov. sp. Plate Burrows tubular and of uniform size being from two to three tenths of a millimeter in diameter; usually found penetrating the shells of brachipods especially those of Orthis striatula Schloth. and of Strophonella hybrida H. & W. The ramifying burrows extend parallel to the surface as well as obliquely and vertically to it and are generally filled with some foreign substance which, if softer than its surrounding walls, crumbles out leaving them open; as the outside of the brachiopod shell weathers away the underlying borings appear on the new surface as delicate intersecting grooves. This labyrinthine maze of passages often weakens the shell causing it to disintegrate. A single valve containing many borings was cut and polished but none of the tubes were found to perforate the inner surface. showing that in case the sponge inhabited the shell of a living brachiopod it did not disturb the occupant in the least. This genus of sponges lives in our modern seas and ‘‘‘ burrows in the shells of oysters and other bivalves, but for protection not food.’’ (Parker and Haswell, Textbook of Zoology, Vol. 1, p. 116.) It is not known how the process of boring is effected, ‘‘the presence of an acid in the tissue was suspected, but has been searched for in vain’’. (Hartog, Sollas, Hickson, Macbride. Protozoa, Coelenterates, and Echinoderms, p. 218.) Zittel says that they ‘‘secrete pin-shaped siliceous elements . . . . by means of which they bore labyrinthie passages in the shells of mol- luses’’. (Zittel, Textbook of Paleontology, Vol. 1, p. 46.) “ , = a + oe . oe PLATE VIilI—Missouri Valley, Iowa. 1 Looking north along exposed loess bluffs. 2 Looking northeast from the top of (1) into Snyders Hollow. PLATE VIII—Meteorological stations, Missouri Valley. (1 Looking south across stations (1) and (3). 2 Looking east toward station (2) in grove in line with buroak marked (2). — PLATE IX—Meteorological stations, Missouri Valley. 1 Looking east toward Stations (1) and (3). 2 Looking east of south toward station (4). PLATE X—McGuire’s walnut grove near George, Lyon county, Iowa. 1 Look- ing east. Thriving trees to right, sheltered. 2 Looking east at exposed southwest corner of same grove. er ‘ . : ty ' cD a ; i Dae aa . 1 hd i - = ¢ ¥ aay - JT RA 1 if x } ay ; -* i 1 ’ A" Mi ‘ a - ' , i‘. pari . z vy, . r i Md 2 = Fy rvs, & ’ y y 1 ! “ i A a . . » - ‘ 1 ' . ) NEW SERIES NO. 44. ne | 2 MAY 18, 1912 © > - BULLETIN OF THE STATE - UNIVERSITY OF Iowa : Bulletin from the Laboratories — of Natural History VOLUME VI | NUMBER 3 CONTENTS 1. A report on some recent collections of fossil Coleoptera ‘from the Miocene Shales of Florissant. ' H. F. WickaAM bo Notes on New Engiand Hydroids. C. McLEAN. FRASER Notes on Cleridae from North and Central America. H, F. WicKHaM AnD A, B Woxicorr w PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY Towa, Ciry, Iowa ee —————————————————————————————————————————————————————————— ISSUED TWENTY-ONE TIMES DURING THE ACADEMIC YEAR; MONTHLY FROM OCTOBER TO JANUARY, WEEKLY FROM FEBRUARY TO JUNE.. ENTERED AT THE POST OFFICE IN. IOWA: CITY AS SECOND CLASS MAIL MATTER IN THE SERIES OF RESEARCH BULLETINS OF THE UNIVERSITY BULLESIN FROM THE LABORATORIES OF NatTuRAL History OF THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA EDITORIAL STAFF ARTEVOTN NSIS) B10 B ACO) E1- S001 77 i Behe Gee ca Se ns Re a Botany RSE MER Wea OV ENIDEN Giyeg waits cig Px xiaraye iacais efile’ a. wsigheye haar Zoology aie ACR ote la arate n te lw 0S ans Se aie omg 62 iRw as Geology VOLUME VI NUMBER 3 LIB : rc NEW CONTENTS BOTAN GARD 1. A report on some recent collections of fossil Coleoptera from the Miocene Shales of Florissant. H. F. WIcKHAM 2. Notes on New England Hydroids. C. McLEAN FRASER 3. Notes on Cleridae from North and Central America. H. F. WICKHAM AND A. B WOo.Lcotr PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY Iowa Ciry, Iowa pee ae anny ak a) j 7 Lae ‘ ray ; © A ", % i ‘ ; , AF ‘oe ae b WAS Be ha ft eI ; | ; | | } oe re . | y j ‘ : r i . : Ded am ~ p 5 a | ; | : A Sty. 4 ; we ty | | 5 ’ ~ ; ; ? MAY 23 1912 A REPORT ON SOME RECENT COLLECTIONS OF FOSSIL COLEOPTERA FROM THE MIOCENE SHALES OF FLORISSANT. H. F. WickHAaM Within the past five or six years, the historic locality of Floris- sant, Colorado, has been revisited several times by parties under the direction of Professor T. D. A. Cockerell, of the University of Colorado, for the purpose of making fresh collections of the fossil insects abounding in the shales of the ancient lake bed. These expeditions have been successful in bringing to light a great number of hitherto unknown species, and in securing ad- ditional specimens of many forms already known. Some of the material has been worked up by Professor Cockerell himself, other portions by Professor Brues and Mr.. Beutenmueller, while most of the Coleoptera have at length come into my hands for study. A good share of these were transmitted directly by Pro- fessor Cockerell, others came through the American Museum of Natural History. I have also had some specimens from the Peabody Museum and am now engaged in finishing a report on the collection of Florissant Coleoptera belonging to the United States National Museum. The new species from the last named source will be published elsewhere, but I have made an occasional note upon them in the present paper and have also referred to a few of the names which are still in manuscript. It is my hope to publish tables of some of the genera when all of the collections are finished, and the intention is to get out a list in which the Florissant beetle fauna will be shown as nearly in its entirety as possible. This seems the more desirable since Dr. Seudder was interrupted in his work by ill health and had only begun the non-Rhynchophorous series. Until the remainder of the collections in hand are studied, it is scarcely worth while to make any extended remarks on the pe- culiarities of this Miocene fauna. Dr. Scudder has already called attention to some of the most striking characteristics of beetle 4 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN life on the old lake shore, but it will probably be necessary to: modify his conclusions regarding relative prevalence of certain families. The remarkable preponderance of Rhynchophora which he noted seems well sustained in recent collections, and the de- velopment of the Rhynchitide, a family of this series, is even more pronounced than he had judged. The Rhynchophora were undoubtedly a dominant type of beetle during the Miocene times, None of the other groups approach them in richness of species or individuals. They had already developed specialized rostral and scale structures, as shown by the remains from Florissant. It is interesting to note that the so-called seed weevils, the Bruchidex, had also a strikingly strong representation in this re- gion, seven species being described in the present paper, and an-: other, of a more specialized type, being figured and described in manuscript. These seven species show varying modifications of the antenne and indicate that the femoral dentation so well de- veloped in recent forms had already made some progress in the Tertiary. The wood boring Bostrychids, Protapate and Xylo- biops are also well along in development of the peculiar sculpture of the group to which they belong. I must confess that I have not been able to find the affinities. with the Central American fauna that Dr. Scudder seemed to suspect. Time after time, I have compared the species of certain genera with their Mexican or Central American representatives, but have nearly always found them more closely related to those of the United States. Even the European fauna does not seem to have been any more closely approximated than our own, and when I have been unable to assign a beetle to one of our native senera it has almost always been necessary to erect a new genus for its accommodation. The case of Paussopsis, as showing a pos-- sible striking affinity to the African or European fauna is not so convineing as it might be. I am not at all sure that this beetle belongs to the Paussidw, though for the present I follow Pro- fessor Cockerell in the assumption that it does. Such characters as the expanded tarsi of the males in Cara- bide, Staphylinide and water beetles had already made their appearance in the Tertiary forms. Bizarre structures of any description are somewhat conspicuously lacking. I do not see that there is any well marked difference in the average size of FOSSIL COLEOPTERA 5 the recent beetles of given genera when compared with their pre- sumed relatives of the Miocene rocks, though an occasional speci- men has been assigned to one genus or another as a large or small exponent thereof. No really large family or series of families seems to be entirely wanting, unless it be the Pselaphide or the Histeride, of which latter Dr. Scudder mentions seeing a speci- men though none is described in any of his papers. I have seen nothing that can possibly belong there, in spite of the fact that the genus Saprinus is today a common inhabitant of lake shores and the texture of the exoskeleton is such that there would be no doubt of its preservation as a fossil if deposited in the mud at one of the periods of shale formation. Small coleoptera of all families are extremely few in the collections though this may per- haps mean that they have been overlooked by field investigators, Thus, no Trichopterygide, Pselaphide or Scydmenide have been described, nor have I seen any. In the Clavicorn families now well represented along the forested shores of inland waters nearly all of the smaller forms seem to have been undeveloped or to have been lost after their entombment. All of the drawings are from camera lucida figures by the author, except those of Protapate and Macrodactylus which are free hand. No structures have been ‘‘restored’’ but in case of such sculpturing as lines of fine punctures the courses of these lines have been indicated without attempting to reproduce each individual point. Attention has been called in the text to all such diagramatic representation and it is always accompanied by a detail figure on a larger scale or by a definite verbal descrip- tion. Arranged by families, the species herein reported upon are as follows: CARABIDAL. Trechus fractus n. sp. Amara cockerelli n. sp. Amara dane Scudd. DYTISCIDA. Celambus miocenus n. sp. Agabus charon n. sp. SILPHID2. Miosilpha necrophiloides n. sp. PAUSSIDZ. Paussopsis secunda n. sp. STAPHYLINIDA. Quedius mortuus n. sp. Quedius chamberlini Scudd. Staphylinus lesleyi Scudd. Leptacinus leidyi Scudd. Tachinus sommatus Scudd. Tachyporus nigripennis Secudd. 6 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Boletobius funditus Scudd. Mycetoporus demersus Scudd. Bledius osborni Scudd. Deleaster grandiceps n. sp. COCCINELLID. Adalia subversa Scudd. EROTYLIDA. Tritoma submersa n. sp. Tritoma materna n. sp. COLYDIIDA. Phleonemites miocenus n. sp. DERMESTID. Dermestes tertiarius n. sp. Orphilus dubius n. sp. NITIDULIDA. Amartus petrefactus n. sp. BYRRHIDZ. Nosotetocus vespertinus Scudd. PARNIDA. Dryops tenuior n. sp. Lutrochites lecontei n. sp. BUPRESTID. Anthaxia exhumata Wickh. Melanophila cockerelle n. sp. Melanophila handlirschi n. sp. Acmeodera schaefferi n. sp. Acmeodera abyssa n. sp. LAMPYRIDA. Pyropyga prima n. sp. MALACHIDZ. Eudasytites listriformis n. sp. Trichochrous miocenus n. sp. BOSTRYCHIDA. Protapate contorta n. sp. Xylobiops lacustre n. sp. SCARABAIDA. Atenius patescens Scudd. Aphodius aboriginalis n. sp. Aphodius restructus n. sp. Aphodius shoshonis n. sp. Aphodius laminicola Wickh. Serica antediluviana n. sp. Macrodactylus pluto n. sp. Macrodactylus propheticus n. sp. Diplotaxis simplicipes n. sp. Diplotaxis aurora Wickh. CERAMBYCIDA. Leptura petrorum n. sp. CHRYSOMELIDZ. Donacia primeva n. sp. Crioceridea dubia n. sp. Metachroma florissantensis n. sp. BRUCHIDA. Bruchus henshawi n. sp. Bruchus exhumatus n. sp. Bruchus bowditchi n. sp. Bruchus florissantensis n. sp. Bruchus scudderi n. sp. Bruchus haywardi n. sp. Bruchus osborni n. sp. TENEBRIONIDA. Platydema antiquorum n. sp. MORDELLID2. Mordellistena florissantensis n. sp. MELOIDA. Nemognatha exsecta n. sp. RHYNCHITIDA. Docirhynchus ibis n. sp. CURCULIONID. Pachybaris rudis n. sp. TrecHUS Clairv. T. FRACTUS n. sp. (Plate IIT, Fig. 1.) Form moderately elongate. Head rather large, not constricted posteriorly, mandibles strong, about as long as the rest of the head. Antenne broken, but the few remaining joints rather stout. Prothorax trapeziform, much broader at apex and strongly narrowed to the base, sides almost straight, front coxe narrowly separated by the prosternum. Elytra without humeral angles, broadest a little in front of the middle, apices broken, strie, as shown through the abdomen, fine. Length, 7.00 mm. FOSSIL COLEOPTERA 7 Station number and collector not specified. The type and only known specimen was received directly from Professor Cockerell and is in the Museum of the University of Colorado. This insect has given me a good deal of trouble to place. It reminds one of the slender Platyni of the 7arvalis group, and is _ also similar to some of the European Anophthalmi. The lack of a strongly defined neck has led me to prefer Trechus as a final disposition, in preference to Platynus, but I cannot say that I am very well satisfied with the assignment. AMARA Bonelli. A. COCKERELLI n. sp. (Plate I, Fig. 1.) Intermediate in size between A. powellii, and A. dane, from these shales, but in form more like 4A. re- vocata, A species is indicated in which the prothorax was narrower behind as in the recent subgenus Cyrtonotus, this segment being broadest well in front of the middle, whence the sides are arcuate to the anterior angles, which are not prominent, posteriorly they are nearly straight and only slightly sinuate to the base, thoracic disk without distinct sculpture except a strong median line. Head as broad at base as the prothoracie apex. Eyes rather small and anterior as in all of the specjes described by Dr. Scudder. Elytra with finely impressed narrow striz, apparently impunc- tate and about equally distinct to the lateral margins, scutellar stria free at tip and moderately long. Legs and antenne wanting. Length, 9.25 mm.; of elytron, 5.50 mm. Width of elytra, 3.75 mm. Station number 11 or 12. One specimen, showing obverse and reverse, with the collection numbers 70 and 191. The type is in the Museum of the University of Colorado. It was collected by Professor Cockerell, for whom it is named. This fossil seems undoubtedly distinct from any of Dr. Seud- der’s species and like them is doubtfully a true representative of the genus. Except for the great difference in size, I should have referred it to A. revocata, the figure of which it fairly closely resembles, especially in the form of the prothorax. A. DAN Scupp. Station number 13. A fine paired specimen from this place was collected by S. A. Rohwer. Ca@LamBus Thoms. C. MIOCENUS n. sp. (Plate II, Figs. 1 to 6.) Form scarcely elongate for this genus, tapering towards both ends. Head large, antenne not well pre- served but sufficiently well shown to indicate that they were rather stout. Prothorax possibly not complete at the sides but in general tapering from 8 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN about the base to the apex. Elytra broadest a little in front of the middle, the length of each a little more than twice the breadth. Entire upper surface with a fine alutaceous sculpture, visible only under high magnifica- tion. Under side better preserved than the upper and much more roughly sculptured, the punctuation being strongly pronounced and coarse, the punctures circular and separated generally by much less than their own diameters. In front of the middle coxe, these punctures are compara- tively fine but behind them, on the sternal pieces and especially on the coxal plates they are large, taking into account the size of the insect. The abdomen is about equally coarsely but somewhat less strongly punctured, toward the base, but much more finely on the last two segments. Legs rather slender, the anterior and middle tarsi somewhat dilated. Length, 3.75 mm. Width across both elytra at broadest point, 2.40 mm. Station number 14. One beautiful paired specimen, collected by Geo. N. Rohwer, The type is in the American Museum of Natural History. I refer this insect to Celambus without the least hesitation, the shape, sculpture, and structural features all point to the same conclusion, It seems to have had more lkeness to C. medialis than to any other of our recent North American species, but was more finely punctured above. Acasus Leach. A. CHARON n. sp. (Plate IV, Fig. 1.) Form almost regularly elliptical, broadest about the middle of the body length. Head large, and, as pre- served, longer than the prothorax when viewed from beneath, about equal to it when seen from above, no distinct sculpture aside from a fine alutaceous roughening which also covers the upper surfaces of the prothorax and elytra. Prothorax short, about three times as broad as long in dorsal view, sides nearly straight or slightly arcuate, convergent from base to apex. Elytra at base not quite continuing the prothoracic outline, conjointly near- ly one and one-fourth times as long as broad, without striation or evidence of coarse punctures. Legs rather short. Length from front of head to elytral apex, 8.25 mm.; of elytra, 6.00 mm. Width across both elytra at widest point, about 4.75 mm. Station number 14. One paired specimen, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cock- erell or S. A. Rohwer. The type is in the Museum of the University of Colorado. This insect probably belongs with Agabus, judging from the form, size, short legs, and such of the ventral sclerites as can be made out. It is, of course, possible that it should form a separate genus, but no characters are apparent upon which to base a di- vision. It is readily distinguished from the fossil A. florissan- FOSSIL COLEOPTERA 9 tensis by the much smaller size, which is only about three-fourths that of the latter species. MIOSILPHA n. gen. Form of Silpha, for example S. lapponica, but differs in having the middle cox quite closely approximate or possibly contiguous. The front cox are transverse, the cavities confluent, hind cox also transverse and contiguous. The flanks of the prothorax are inflexed and the elytra have a wide infiexed margin. Antenne apparently ten jointed, with a four jointed club, but it is possible that there were eleven joints. The type and only known species is described below. M. NECROPHILOIDES n. sp. (Plate I, Figs. 4, 5, 6.) Moderately elongate in form. Head short, distinctly and strongly but not especially coarsely punctured above and beneath, closely on the vertex, less so on the occiput, and sparsely on the front. Eye rounded, small as seen from above. Anten- na apparently ten jointed, the first joint long and stout, second small, third as long as the next two, fourth, fifth and sixth subequal, seventh, eighth, ninth, and tenth forming a moderately strong club which is some- what shorter than all the joints from the second to the sixth inclusive. Prothorax distorted but approximately twice as wide as long, upper sur- face distinctly but sparsely punctured, a little more coarsely and closely towards the sides. Scutellum finely punctured, triangular. Elytra nearly parallel sided, not notably differing, in conjoint width, from the pro- thorax, the surface of each with nine sharp, fine, nearly equidistant strie, which nearly attain the elytral apices, their bottoms apparently finely in- distinctly punctate, interstitial spaces broad, a little convex, probably each with a few coarse punctures, though this appearance may perhaps be due to the structure of the stone. Front tibia carinate, the others not distinct. Underside of prothorax moderately finely, quite sparsely punctured, that of the meso and metathorax still more finely; on all of these, and on the ab- domen, the punctuation is coarser at the sides, the middle abdominal region being almost smooth. Length to apex of extended abdomen, 9.00 mm.; of elytra, 3.50 mm. Station number 14. There are two paired specimens, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cockerell. The type is in the Museum of the University of Colorado, the cotype in the American Museum of Natural History. This very interesting insect seems without doubt to be a Silphid. I should place it in the tribe Silphini, with which it agrees in having transverse anterior coxe, with trochantins, the cavities confiuent and open behind, the hind cox simple and contiguous. The exposed abdomen and ten jointed antenne ally it to Necrophorus in which, however, the club is capitate while in Miosilpha it is long and not very compact as in Silpha and 10 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Necrophilus. The contiguous or closely approximate middle coxe separate it at once from Silpha, but in this respect it is similar to Necrophilus, which genus it also closely resembles in sculpture and in the carination of the tibie. It is, in fact, about like a Necrophilus with ten jointed antenne, truncate elytra, and elon- gate abdomen, the last character probably being exaggerated by maceration. If we should attempt to incorporate it in the table of genera in the LeConte and Horn ‘‘Classification’’ it might be placed after Necrophorus from which it differs by the characters already given. It may be worth while to call attention to the fact that it seems an osculant form between Necrophorus and Silpha, two genera which are readily distinguishable at the pres- ent day, and that it combines the coxal structure of the forms with long elytra (represented today by Necrophilus and Pelates) with the short elytra of the two genera mentioned above. Paussopsis Ckll. P. SECUNDA n. sp. (Plate I, Figs. 8, 9.) Form moderately elongate, subparallel. Head longer than the prothorax. Eye large, circular. Anten- ne hardly clavate but thick, basal joint a little longer than the three suc- ceeding, second smallest, those following are subequal among themselves except the last which is larger and apparently rounded at the tip. The vertex and occipital region are closely but finely punctured, the frontal region more finely and less closely. Prothorax shown partly in side view, and, as preserved, much wider than long, distinctly margined behind, the outline regular, surface smooth and shining, (probably polished in life) with extremely fine, microscopic, widely dispersed punctures. LElytra sub- parallel at sides, bluntly pointed at tip, surface scarcely visibly sculptured but with some indications of extremely fine lines of punctures. Length, 6.25 mm. Station number 14. One specimen, collected by Geo. N. Rohwer, The type is in the Museum of the University of Colorado. This seems to be congenerie with P, nearctica Ckll., with which it agrees in most of the specific details as well, but P. secunda is a little larger, the antenne, judging from the figure, less clavate and the head punctured. If Paussopsis really belongs to the Pausside, it must be considered a very generalized form, since neither the antennz, the head, nor the prothorax exhibit any development of the peculiar distortions common among recent species in that family. FOSSIL COLEOPTERA 11 Quepius Steph. Q. MORTUUS n. sp. (Plate I, Fig. 2.) Form elongate, parallel. Head long, rather narrow, tapering behind the eyes which are large but not very prominent. Antenne wanting. Prothorax wider than the head, but about equal in length and breadth, apex narrower than the base which is rounded, sides nearly regularly arcuate. Scutellum large, subtriangular. Elytra conjointly but little wider than the prothorax, sinuately truncate at apices, their combined width slightly exceeding their length. Abdomen nearly as broad as the elytra, strongly margined, only the basal three segments re- maining. Legs wanting. Length of fragment, 11.45 mm.; from front of head to elytral apex, 7.60 mm.; of elytra, 2.80 mm. Width of prothorax, 2.80 mm.; of elytra, about 3.00 mm. Station number 14. Collected by 8S. A. Rohwer. The type and only speci- men is in the American Museum of Natural History. This appears to be a Quedius of the explanatus type and is of similar size. The sculpture of the entire upper surface is very fine and seems scarcely more than an alutaceous roughening of the-integuments. In life, the insect probably reached a length of about 15 mm. Q. CHAMBERLINI Scudd. Station number 17. One paired specimen, col- lected by S..A. Rohwer. STAPHYLINUS Linn. §S. LESLEyI Scudd. Station number 13B. One paired specimen, collected by Geo. N. Rohwer. Leptacinus LFrichs. L. LeEIDyI Scudd. One fine specimen, without citation of station or col- lector. TACHINUS Grav. T. somMatTus Scudd. Station number 14. One specimen. Station num- ber 17. One specimen, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cockerell. TAacHYpPorusS Grav. T. NIGRIPENNIS Scudd. Station number 17. One specimen, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cockerell. 12 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Bouetosius Leach. B. FuNpDiTus Scudd. Station number 17. One specimen, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cockerell. Mycetoporus Mann. M. DEMERSUS Scudd. Station number 14. One specimen, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cockerell. Buepius Leach. B. OSBORNI Scudd. Station number 14, One specimen, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cockerell. DELEASTER Frichs. D. GRANDICEPS n. sp. (Plate I, Fig. 3.) Form similar to that of the recent Colorado species, D. trimaculatus. Head larger than the prothorax, eyes prominent, antenne incrassate distally but with the joints not dis- tinct. Prothorax distorted, narrower than the head and somewhat con- stricted in front of the base which is subequal to the apex, the sides pro- tuberant. Elytra much broader at base than the prothorax, each apparently with a large rounded light spot in front of the middle. The entire upper surface is simply finely scabrous, but traces of punctures show that a better preserved specimen might indicate another type of sculpture. Length of fragment, 7.25 mm. Station number 14. A single specimen, collected by Geo. N. Rohwer. The type is in the Museum of the University of Colorado. This was a larger species than the one with which is has been compared and was probably not strictly congeneric, though of the same general type. In D. trimaculatus the elytra are darker at the apex and in the scutellar region, but have no well defined hght spots. Avauia Mutis. A. SUBVERSA Scudd. A specimen sent directly from Professor Cockerell is referred here. It is of the same size and form as Dr. Seudder’s ex- ample and of a similar light color, preserved in dorsal view, and shows the insect to have been a member of the group Coccinelle to which Adalia belongs. The coxal lines of the first ventral are well exhibited. The an- tenna is moderately long and gradually clavate as in the recent A. bi- punctata. Since Dr. Scudder made his identification practically upon fa- cies alone, it is interesting to have it verified by the discovery of this better specimen. Station number 14. Collector not specified. FOSSIL COLEOPTERA 13 ‘Tritoma Fabr. T. SUBMERSA n. sp. (Plate III, Figs. 2, 3.) Form rather short for this genus. Head large, broader than long, eyes not discernible in their entire outline, but enough shows to indicate that they were of good size. An- tenne mutilated but fragments of both remain, showing the basal joints to have been slender and the club to be composed of three broad joints, Similar among themselves. Prothoracic width equal to double the median length, hind angles a little rounded, anterior angles a little acute, sides margined. The greatest width is slightly in front of the base, whence the sides taper with slight arcuation to the apex. Scutellum small but distinct, triangular. Elytra two and two-thirds times the length of the prothoracic median line, conjointly noticeably broader than the prothorax, pointed at the apex, exterior and sutural margins with a rather fine bead. Legs want- ing. No distinct sculpture can be made out on the specimen, but the elytra show faint signs of strie. Length, 2.50 mm. Station number 14. One specimen, collector not specified. The type is in the Museum of the University of Colorado. Though rather small for this genus, the specimen seems to belong to the Erotylide and appears more closely allied to Tritoma than to any other genus that I know. At any rate there is no basis for generic separation. T. MATERNA n. sp. (Plate II, Figs. 7, 8.) Form rather short, resembling that of the recent T. humeralis. Head comparatively a little larger than that of the species cited, the sculpture, (except a few scattered fine punc- tures), eye and articulations of the antenne effaced. Prothorax short, not much arched in profile. Elytra cuneiform in side view, about three and one-half times as long as the prothorax and a little more than twice as long as high. Legs short, tibiz# expanded towards the tips and flattened. Length, 4.85 mm.; of elytron, 3.55 mm. ‘Station number 14. One fine paired specimen, collected by S. A. Rohwer. The type is in-the Museum of the University of Colorado. This beetle is strikingly like the recent T. humeralis in outline and has the same leg construction as far as can be seen, except that the hind tarsi are perhaps a trifle longer in proportion to their tibiz in the fossil. The sculpture seems to have been finer. the prothorax with very sparse punctuation, the elytra with rows of fine distant punctures. PHLCONEMITES N. gen. This name is proposed for a fossil similar to the recent Phleonemus catenulatus in form, size and elytral sculpture, but differing in having the t4 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN antennal club much more gradually formed and the prothorax without sharp raised lines. The type and only known species is P. miocenus, described below. Nees fa P. MIOCENUS n. sp. (Plate II, Figs. 9, 10, 11.) Form somewhat obscured through the breaking of the margins, but not much more elongate than that of Phleonemus catenulatus. Head narrower than the prothorax, shape destroyed through the obliteration of the margin, vertex strongly and closely punctured. Eyes indistinguishable. Antenne showing only fragmentary portions, the club of one is intact and is formed of two joints, the three preceding joints successively narrower as the head is approached. Protho- rax with the sides damaged, upper surface strongly sculptured with close set circular punctures. Elytra a little over three times as long as the prothorax and conjointly about two-thirds as wide as long, broadest about the middle, not strongly tapering in either direction but becoming somewhat suddenly conjointly rounded at the apex. Sculpture composed of a sutural and submarginal and three deep, smooth, discal grooves, between which are double series of elongate punctures, the punctures of each row separated by a transverse raised line, the lines and punctures of each row of a double series alternating with those of its fellows, as shown in the detail drawing. Length, 4.25 mm. Station number 13. One specimen, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cockerell. The type is in the Museum of the University of Colorado. The specimen is one received directly from Professor Cocker- ell, and I believe it is undoubtedly a reverse, in which case the head and thorax are granulate (a common structure in the Colydiide), the elytra with submarginal, sutural and three discal coste, each elytron with four double series of elongate tubercles as in Phl@onemus catenulatus. The elub of the an- tenna is so gradually formed that it might about as well be called three jointed as two jointed. DERMESTES Linn. D. TERTIARIUS n. sp. (Plate V, Figs. 1, 2.) Form moderately elongate. Head wanting. Prothorax crushed, but the remains show it to have been broader at base than at apex, the base slightly prominent at middle but not lobed, the apex weakly arcuately emarginate. Elytra not striate, sub- parallel to behind the middle, thence tapering to the apices which are bluntly pointed. Abdominal segments subequal, except the first which is longer. The entire surface of the prothorax and elytra is finely, regularly, and rather closely punctured, the punctures bearing moderately long hairs. Length, from front of pronotum to apex of abdomen, 7.50 mm. Station number 14, One paired specimen collected by Mrs. W. P. Cock- erell, The type is in the American Museum of Natural History. FOSSIL COLEOPTERA 15 In the absence of head and legs, the generic assignment is open to some doubt, but what can be seen of the form, sculpture, and vestiture points to the above reference. This insect is much larger than Attagenus sopitus Seudd., the only Dermestide thus far known from the Florissant shales. OrpHiLus Erichs. O. puBIUS n. sp. (Plate I, Fig. 7.) Similar in form to the recent O. ater, and of about the same size. The sculpture is either much finer or else poorly preserved, and the surface of the prothorax and elytra is nearly smooth. The head is not visible, presumably covered by the front margin of the prothorax. Length, 3.00 mm. Width, 2.05 mm. Stations number 14 and 14B. Two specimens, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cockerell. The type is in the Museum of the University of Colorado, the cotype in the American Museum of Natural History. The reference is based on the form and size of the specimen, and must be considered provisional. The appearance is entirely that of Orphilus, with the punctuation slightly developed. Amartus Lec. A. PETREFACTUS n. sp. (Plate II, Figs. 12, 13.) Form a little more elongate than in the recent A. rufipes and A. tinctus. Head, exclusive of the mandibles, as long as the prothorax but much less broad. Eyes not definable. Antenne eleven jointed, first joint large and thick, third long, club gradually formed as usual in the tribe Brachypterini. Prothorax dis- torted but evidently narrowed anteriorly and with rounded sides, about two and two-fifths times as broad as long. Elytra showing only along one edge, not displaying any characters of interest. Abdomen somewhat dis- placed but showing that the segments near the base are short. Length, 3.85 mm. Station number 14. One specimen, collector not specified, which is con- sidered the type and is in the Museum of the University of Colorado. Another example, referred here with little doubt, comes from Station number 17 and was collected by Mrs. Cockerell. This insect goes very well with Amartus, which genus is now represented on our Pacific coast. The formation of the antennal club does not permit of its reference to the Carpophilini, to which it has a superficial resemblance. About the only structural char- acter of importance that can be made out on the underside is the shape of the front coxe which are shown to be transverse and narrowly separated by the prosternum. 16 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Nosotetocus Scudd, N. VESPERTINUS Scudd. Station number 14. One specimen, collected by S. A. Rohwer. This shows the upper surface and indicates that the elytra were punctured in rows as suspected by Dr. Scudder. ‘DEYOrS Oliv. D. TENUIOR n. sp. (Plate III, Fig. 4.) Resembles D. eruptus from the Florissant shales but is smaller and more slender. Head with microscopic scattered’ punctuation. Eye small. Prothorax nearly straight in front, sinuate behind, rather broader proportionately than in the recent D. lithophilus, front angle produced beneath and partly covering the eye as in that species, surface finely, microscopically, sparsely punctured, a little more coarsely than the head. Scutellum small. Elytra mutilated at the tip, sides subparallel, surface marked with rows of indistinct moderate-sized elongate punctures, Legs long, claw-joints swollen. Length, 4.15 mm. Station number 14. One paired specimen, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cock- erell. The type is in the Museum of the University of Colorado. This seems to be a good Dryops by all the visible characters and in any event is closely related to that genus. The sketch shows the outlne and the courses of the elytral rows of punctures as far as they can readily be distinguished. — LUTROCHITES n. gen. This name is proposed for a fossil insect of nearly the shape and size of the recent Lutrochus luteus and of a similar velutine appearance. It differs in the strongly longitudinally striate head and somewhat in the punctuation as well. It is impossible to be sure of the family affinities, but I have placed it here provisionally. The type is L. lecontei, described below. . L, LECONTEI n. sp. (Plate V, Fig. 4.) Form short and broad. Head with the outline somewhat broken and the exterior margins of the eyes damaged, but these organs were large. The vertex has about thirteen strong and nearly equidistant longitudinal strie. Prothorax distinctly broader than long, widest at base, sides more or less arcuate to the apex, surface distinctly punctured, the punctures well separated but not distant, a little stronger near the sides. Elytra about two and two-thirds times-as long as the median prothoracic line, sides subparallel anteriorly, posteriorly arcuately narrowing to the apices which, separately, are acute, conjointly they were perhaps sharply rounding. The elytral sculpture consists of a fine, confused punctuation, but, like the whole upper surface of the body, the wing covers have a velutine appearance. Length, 2.65 mm. Width, 1.75 mm. Station number 14. One specimen, collected by Mrs. W. P. Cockerell. The type is in the American Museum of Natural History. FOSSIL COLEOPTERA 17 This species has been very troublesome to place. It seems best assigned in the position here given and if it should oceur again in collections from these shales will readily be known by the pe- euliar sculpture. ANTHAXIA Esch. A. EXHUMATA Wickh. Station number 14. a ee - ; +" 4 van as Pa es a - j f 4 — “= z . ® 7 . . » | : \ ma a a ~ 7 _ PS —— \e ie | ‘ - io »~ { 7. pea 7 be 5 eg, il by, Oo wm % . a c d a f td ze 7 Q ¢ rT | ; , 4 i os ' | ' {eet a j ye ' i4 | ) : %. a j ' ¥ 6 “ea “pees oe + + ~Z * & ° . \ ‘ “4 i * . . a a + | he Puate II SANT Fossit COLEOPTERA FROM FLORIS Métal CP: ppm TART eS a 7 — PORT, is Lae ae Mie INE AaB ree Fossi COLEOPTERA FROM FLORISSANT PLATE IV / Fossiu COLEOPTERA FROM FLORISSANT PLATE V Foss COLEOPTERA FROM F'LORISSANT y~ ee ” ~ tke ie ie a “ PuaTe VIII Fossiz COLEOPTERA FROM FLORISSANT NOTES ON NEW ENGLAND HYDROIDS. C. McLEAN FRASER The few notes I have to offer on the New England Hydroids would searcely be worth publishing as a separate paper were it not that the district is visited by so many zoologists every sum- mer and any information concerning the fauna should hence be made available for reference as soon as possible. While taking advantage of the privileges offered by the U. S. Bureau of Fisheries at the Woods Hole station, I had a chance to get somewhat acquainted with the hydroid fauna. As the ‘‘Fishhawk’’ was not in commission during the summer, no deep sea dredging was done and hence the collecting had to be restricted to shore, pile and surface collecting, together with some work with the dredge or tangle in shallow waters. Only 47 species were obtained, but among these were five that up to that time had not been reported from this region. These five species were: Eudendrium vaginatum, Campanularia rari- dentata, Lovenella clausa, Filetium expansum and Sertularia stookeyt. One of these, Eudendrium vaginatum has not been reported from the eastern coast of North America hitherto, the other four have been reported from other points along the coast. The gonosome of Filellum expansum, a widely-spread form, was found for the first time. The gonosome of Clytia minuta, a species reported only from Woods Hole, was found for the first time also. The gonosome of Clytia edwardsi, which I found at Departure Bay, Vancouver Island, had not been found at Woods Hole, although the original description was made from specimens obtained here; many colonies with the gonosome present were obtained during the summer, Later in the summer, I visited the laboratory at South Harps- well, Me., for a week. Unfortunately, the weather was stormy for a large portion of the time at my disposal there, so that I had little chance to get acquainted with the region. From the few observations I was able to make, it struck me that the col- onies of the species I did find, appeared to be in such good con- 40 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN dition, and showed the particular characteristics of the species so well. Almost all the colonies seemed to be equally serviceable for examination; one did not have to look over much material to find a specimen for diagnosis. This may be due to the fact that the locality is so close to the deep waters of the ocean and is not befouled as shallow water so often is. I obtained only 14 species, but of these three had not previously been reported from the region. These were Bougainvillia carolinensis, Eudendrium vaginatum and Campanularia calceoiifera. These have all been obtained from the Woods Hole region, but one of them, Eudendrium vaginatum, not until I had collected it a couple of weeks previous. A report on these species from Woods Hole and South Harps- well, with observations on some other forms already reported, make up the material for this paper. Many of the species are described in full in a paper on ‘‘Some Beaufort Hydroids’’, which is being published by the U. 8. Bureau of Fisheries, but the work is not far enough advanced to be able to give any page references. The figures, the drawings for which were made by my wife, show a magnification of about eighteen diameters. I wish to express my obligation to the U. S. Bureau of Fish- eries for the facilities it afforded at Woods Hole and to Pro- fessors Kingsley and Neal for the benefit I derived from my sojourn at the laboratory at South Harpswell. The facilities for the study of hydroids afforded at the State University of Iowa, have made it possible for me to attempt much work this year, but these facilities would lose much of their value were it not for the assistance that Professor C. C. Nutting is always ready and willing to give. I cannot acknowledge too often my obligation to him for the interest he has taken in all this systematic work. JEMMARIA GEMMOSA McCrady. Gemmaria gemmosa was found in abundance at several points, but the most suitable place for collecting it was just outside the entrance to the eel-pond, where masses of serpulid tubes could be picked up readily, over a good sized area, These masses were coated with the brick-red Mem- branipora; over much of this Membranipora, Gemmaria could be found. Reference has been made in my Beaufort paper to the confusion there has been in the synonymy of this species. It has occurred to me that pos- NEW ENGLAND HYDROIDS 41 sibly the specimen referred to by Murbach,1 as being much like G. gemmosa (Cornyitis agassizii), was G. costata Gegenbaur, as this species differs from G. gemmosa in the points that he mentions, Since they are so much alike in their structure and their habitat, it is quite possible that G. costata has traveled north as well as G. gemmosa. BOUGAINVILLIA CAROLINENSIS (MeCrady). Verrill gives the range of this species from Charleston, S. C., to Vineyard Sound and as far as I can make out, no record has since been made of its appearance farther north than this. On the other hand, the range of B. superciliaris is said to extend from Newport, R. L., to the Bay of Fundy and possibly to Greenland. Unless specimens are in good condition, it is difficult to distinguish the one from the other as the tentacles, and in some cases the whole hydranths, disintegrate rapidly. Specimens of Bou- gainvillia were found at Basin Cove, South Harpswell, in which the medusa buds were not far enough developed to use for diagnosis, but all the other characters agree with those given for B. carolinensis, as distinct from B. superciliaris, hence I have little doubt that the specimens belong to the former species. This would extend the range for B. carolinensis to the north of Cape Cod. There is little evidence to show that Cape Cod is a dividing point for hydroid fauna to such an extent as it is said to be in some other groups of marine animals, but I hope to have more to say on that matter at some later date. CALYPTOSPADIX CERULEA Clarke. In a paper written two years ago,2 C. W. Hargitt refers to this species which at that time appeared to be rare. The first Woods Hole specimens were observed on the piles of the U. S. B. F. wharf in 1908, and the following year other specimens were obtained at Wareham by Mr. Vinal Edwards. Mr, Edwards kindly informed me exactly where the Wareham specimens were obtained, and on August 7 I had an opportunity to visit the locality. I had no trouble in finding specimens; in fact they were in such abundance that no one who had ever collected hydroids could fail to observe them. The colonies formed an encircling mass on almost every pile of the bridge over the river where the main current was flowing, for several inches near low tide mark. On that day the tide was particularly favorable, so that in many cases the colonies were exposed. If, as Dr. Hargitt supposes, this hydroid has been recently introduced, the conditions at the Wareham bridge must be particularly favorable, to produce such numerous colonies in such a short time. It may be, however, 1 Hydroids from Woods Hole, Mass. Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, Vol. 42, pt. 3. New Series, 1899, p. 355, footnote. se ? New and little known Hydroids of Woods Hole. Biol. Bull., Vol. XVII, No. 6, p. 371. 42 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN that they are seasonal as many hydroids are, and that his previous col- lecting had never been at a suitable time. The date in which I found these fine colonies was practically the same as the date he mentions (Aug. 10), two years previous. EUDENDRIUM CARNEUM Clarke. This species has been reported from the Woods Hole region several times but all such reports agree in stating that it was rare. Apparently it has now become well established in the region as last season it was quite plen- tiful even on the piles of the U. 8. B. F. wharf, where it appeared in close proximity to specimens of Hudendriwm ramosum, the species of Eu- dendrium that has been predominant for some time. At Beaufort the two species were found growing side by side in many localities in the same way. It will be interesting to find out if they will continue to live side by side, or if the one will crowd the other out. They are both rather lusty species and would appear to have almost equal chances to survive. At Woods Hole evidently EH. carneum is the invader. It remains to be seen how extensive the invasion may he. EUDENDRIUM VAGINATUM Allman.? I believe this species has not been reported from the Atlantic Coast of North America, though it is not unnatural that it should appear, as it has been reported from Europe and from the west coast of North America. Many species that have been so reported are found on the west side of the Atlantic. Fine specimens of male colonies were found at Basin Cove, South Harps- well, at the old tide mill site. Other specimens without gonophores were obtained in some material dredged in Quicks Hole at a depth of about 10 fathoms. The extensive annulation and the characteristic shape of the hydranth were sufficient for identification. TUBULARIA CROCEA (Agassiz). Tubularia crocea is most plentiful at Woods Hole, at Vineyard Haven and at other places in the vicinity, where at the end of June and early in July it is in a flourishing condition, with the actinules still contained in the bud attached to the hydranth body, or already liberated so that the new colony is begun. Soon after this, the ‘‘heads’’ are all lost and nothing remains but the twisted stalks of the colonies, with possibly many young colonies, just starting to grow, attached to various points on the hydrorhiza or even on the lower part of the stems. When I reached South Harpswell, after the middle of August, no such degeneration was apparent in the specimens in that locality. The colonies 3 Budendrium vaginatum Allman. Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 3rd ser. XE 1863, p: 20; NEW ENGLAND HYDROIDS 43 were as fresh as the Woods Hole colonies were in June. I have heard it stated that the Maine forms do not lose their ‘‘heads’’ during the year, or at least that whole colonies do not appear to degenerate at the same time. If this is true, it would be an interesting point to investigate the cause of the difference. CAMPANULARIA ANGULATA Hincks. This species has been reported from Woods Hole and it appears to be widely distributed in the region. No specimens were found that were not attached to eelgrass, but some may be found almost anywhere in the vi- cinity where eelgrass grows. The best specimens found last summer were growing in Little Harbor. These bore gonophores on the stolon, corre- sponding exactly with those described and figured by Hincks.4 Some specimens obtained at Wareham on Aug. 7 were provided with long terminal tendrils, like those figured by Hincks. This is probably a seasonal conditions, as many other species, e.g: Obelia commissuralis, become attenuated and give out tendrils after the generative products have been liberated. The tendrils of C. angulata are broader and more ribbon-like than those of O. commissuralis and other campanularian forms. CAMPANULARIA CALCEOLIFERA Hincks. Specimens of this species were found at Basin Cove, South Harpswell, at the old tide mill site. This is the first time this species has been ob- served or recorded in the Casco Bay region, or at any point north of Cape Cod on the west side of the Atlantic. As it was first described in Britain, it probably came across the ocean by way of the Arctic regions; hence in getting to Woods Hole, where the species is plentiful, it must have passed Casco Bay, but up until this time it has been missed by collectors. The colonies presented no features that are not found in typical forms. 2? CAMPANULARIA RARIDENTATA Alder. Verrill, in his Checklist,5 gives this species with an interrogation mark, but I have not seen any references to it in any other of his papers, or in any other West Atlantic Coast papers, for that matter; at any rate, I think it has not been reported from the Woods Hole region, Some excel- lent specimens, the best I have seen, were obtained by dredging about half way between Knobska Point and Falmouth Heights in five fathoms of water. They were growing on a piece of dead twig. Though I have found several of these specimens on the Pacifie Coast and at Beaufort on the Atlantic Coast, I have not been able to find any gonosome, hence the gen- eric name is still only provisional. 4 British Hydroid Zoophytes, 1868, p. 170, pl. XXXIV, fig. 1. 5 Verrill, A. E. Preliminary checklist of the marine Invertebrates of the Kae Coast, 1879, p. 16. 44 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN CrytTia EpWaRpst (Nutting). In his Woods Hole hydroid paper, Nutting described this species,6 but as he did not find the gonosome, he put it in the genus Campanularia. In material obtained at Departure Bay, Vancouver Island, I found what I took to be the same species with the gonosome present. This I figured and described last year.7 The finding of the gonosome made it necessary to change the species from the genus Campanularia, where it was placed provisionally, to the genus Clytia. Last summer I was fortunate enough to obtain specimens of this species, at Fay’s wharf and off Penzance, that had gonophores perfectly agreeing with the gonophores of the Departure Bay specimens. This corroborates very satisfactorily the diagnosis of the Departure Bay specimens. Cuytia MiInuTA (Nutting). As Campanularia minuta, the trophosome of this species was described by Nutting.s He did not find the gonosome. Many specimens were ob- tained last summer, growing on Eudendrium stems on the piles of the bridge at the entrance to Lagoon Pond, Vineyard Haven, and on Tubularia at Fay’s Wharf, Woods Hole. The finding of the gonosome of the species necessitates the placing of the species in the genus Clytia. | The species has a very characteristic mode of growth. The stems and pedicels are usually very long and slender and as the branches and pedicels leave the stem they turn abruptly upwards side by side with the main stem. Consequently, though the colony may reach a height of 2 em, or more, the spread is insignificant, yet so many colonies grow close together that at first glance one would not observe the extreme slenderness of the colony. Annulation is carried to the extreme in many colonies as there is scarcely any part of the stem, branch or pedicel that is not annulated or at least wavy in outline. In other colonies this is not so marked but even here there are few stretches of any length that are entirely uniform. The hydrotheca reminds one somewhat of that of Clytia johnstoni Alder, or more especially of such specimens as Agassiz has figured as Clytia bicophora,® and in some stages of the growth of the colony it resembles the colony of that species. The hydrotheca, however, is smaller in C. minuta and there are usually but eight teeth present, while C. johnstoni has as many as twelve. The gonangium bears a strong resemblance to the gonangium of C. john- stoni. It grows either from stolon or from the main stem. It is oval or obvate in shape and has corrugations similar to that of C. johnstoni. © Hydroids of the Woods Hole region, 1901, p. 346, fig. 28. 7 Hydroids of the West Coast of North America, 1911, p. 34, pl. IIT, figs. 1, 2. | 8 Hydroids of the Woods Hole Region, 1901, p. 345, fig. 27. * Contributions to the Natural History of U. S., vol. IV, pl. XXIX, fig. 6. NEW ENGLAND HYDROIDS 45 CALYCELLA PYGM2A Hincks, Under the name Calycella nuttingi,o Hargitt has described a small species of Calycella, I have found specimens that answer to his description and measurements but I see no reason for considering them different from Hincks’ Calycella pygmea.11_ Verrill reported C. pygmea from Fishers Island Sound, Conn., and from Casco Bay, Me. This is probably the same species that I have obtained and also that Hargitt has collected. There is a difference of opinion as to whether C. pygme@a can be considered as specifically distinct from C. syringa and it will not help matters to intro- duce into the question still another species that seem to agree in all respects with at least one of these. LOVENELLA CLAUSA (Loven). Two species of Lovenella have been reported from the New England Coast. Verrill reported Lovenella (Calycella) producta (Sars) from deep water off the Maine Coast,12 Nutting reported Lovenella grandisi3 from Newport Harbor, and this was later reported from Woods Hole by Har- gitt.14 Last summer Mr. Vinal Edwards gave me some surface tow to look over, and in some of this marked ‘‘Woods Hole, Feb. 21, 1902,’’ I found a fragment of a colony of Lovenella clausa. I found specimens of this species at Beaufort and in my Beaufort paper have shown that the species which Clarke described as Lovenella gracilis from Chesapeake Bay,15 is the same species Lovenella clausa. The three species are easily dis- tinguished. L. clausa has 8 pieces in the operculum, L. grandis has 10 and L. producta 12 or more. There are other differences in mode of growth, etc., but the opercular character is constant and is readily recognized. FILELLUM EXPANSUM Levinsen. The species, Filellum expansum, is a very cosmopolitan form, being found in many waters of the Northern Hemisphere. Though it has not previously been reported from Woods Hole, it is distributed all along the coast, as I have found it from Canso, N. 8., to Beaufort, N. C. The hydrothece are quite minute and when, as is often the case, they are distributed at rather distant intervals along the stolon, they may easily be overlooked. When one has once recognized them, they are so characteristic that they can 10 New and little known hydroids of Woods Hole. Biol. Bull., vol. XVII, no. 6, 1909, p. 378. 11ef. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 4th ser. XIII, 1874, p. 149, pl. VII, fig. 15. 12 Results of recent dredging expeditions on the Coast of New England. Amer. Jour. of Science and Arts, Vol. VII, 1874, p. 413. 18 Hydroids of the Woods Hole Region, 1901, p. 354. 14 Biol. Bull., No. 2, 1908, p. 112. 18 Hydroids from Chesapeake Bay. Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. III, 1881, p. 139, pl. IX, figs. 25-39. AG NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN never again be passed over unnoticed. Another point regarding the hydrothece may help to account for their being overlooked. This is the fact that instead of being of a colorless transparency as hydrothece usu- ally are, they are of a delicate blue-green color, quite similar in tint to many of the blue-green algae. The gonosome of species of Lafwide is characterized by the massing to- gether of the gonophores with many of the hydrotheew. This mass has been called the ‘‘Coppinia’’ mass so often that the word ‘‘Coppinia’’ has come to have a definite significance although it was first used in error. So much is this the case that it seems as though we might use it regularly now without the quotation marks. Bonnevie has found the coppinia mass of several species and figured them; among them, the species, Filellwm serpens, which is nearly allied to F. expansum, but I believe no one has discovered the coppinia mass of the latter species. I was fortunate enough to obtain some excellent specimens of this species, growing over Huden- drium on the piles of the bridge at the entrance of Lagoon Pond at Vine- yard Haven. Many of the colonies had the gonosome present. The num- ber of the hydrothece in the mass varied from about 20 to 80, arranged so closely that in most cases the stolon could not be seen. Intermingled with these were the much less numerous gonophores of a regular spherical sporosac type; the female with few ova present, four seeming to be the usual number, and the male much smaller than the female. The largest mass was 2 mm. long, and surrounded the Hudendriwm for the whole length. These colonies with the gonosome were obtained on June 26. In a recent paper Kramp has the following paragraph as a footnote:16 ‘*Filellum? expansum Levinsen was set up under the reservation that ‘it is quite possible that they (the tubes) will prove to belong to a species of the genus Folliculina or of a nearly related genus.’ This species is found in great numbers on leaves of Delesseria and such like from the Danmark Expedition. I have often seen it with the two ciliated lobes characteristic of Folliculina stretched out of the tubes, so that the reference to the genus Folliculina is certain. Levinsen has asked me to communicate this here.’’ I cannot reconcile this statement with the facts as I have observed them. It scarcely seems probable that the specimens I have found belong to a different group to those that Levinsen described. The form is so charac- teristic and shows perfect agreement. Yet I have found the coppinia mass, both male and female, entirely agreeing with the nature of the coppinia in the genus Filellwm. Moreover, though in the majority of cases the zooid, if present, is withdrawn into the basal portion of the tube, in some cases it is extended and shows the regular hydranth form. None were extended enough to show plainly the exact number of tentacles. JI have seen nothing of the ‘two ciliated lobes’ nor can I believe they are present in any specimen I have. In fact, there is nothing to indicate that the specimens are hydrozoan but everything to indicate that they are hydroid. 16 Kramp, P. Report on the Hydroids collected by the Danmark Expedition at North- East Greenland, 1911, p. 374. NEW ENGLAND HYDROIDS 47 If the specimens described by Levinsen were bryozoan there must be an instance here of a greater resemblance in the two groups than any yet found. SERTULARIA STOOKEYI Nutting. The species of the genus Sertularia, as this genus is defined by Nutting, in his monograph,17 are confined largely to the tropical seas, The outstand- ing exception along the American shore of the Atlantic is Sertularia pumila Linneus, which is abundant along the New England Coast and the Canadian coasts to the northward. Sertularia cornicina (MeCrady) has been found quite commonly in the Woods Hole region but appears to be more at home farther south. MHargitt has reported. Sertularia versluysi Nutting,18 but it was found on sargassum that may have come in from far south. The stolon-like outgrowths that he mentions were common enough on specimens found at Beaufort, and are probably seasonal as the terminal outgrowths of Obelia commissuralis and Campanularia angulata, previously referred to in the note on C. angulata. Sertularia stookeyi Nutting is a tropical or sub-tropical form and was the commonest species of all the Sertularide in the material obtained at Beaufort. Some specimens were obtained in Vineyard Sound outside of Tarpaulin Cove at a depth of 7 or 8 fathoms. They were growing on fucus and on old stems of Thuiaria argentea, in company with colonies of Sertularia cornicina. Thuwiaria argentea is the common shallow water Thuiaria of the New England coast and is not a Gulf weed form, conse- quently it would appear that this species has become definitely located in the region and is not a transient as Sertularia versluysi may have been. It is the most delicate looking species in the North American waters but it is possible that it has a greater degree of adaptability than some of the more lusty species. 17 American Hydroids, Part II, The Sertularide, 1904, p. 49. 18 Biol. Bull., vol. XIV, no. 2, 1908, p. 112. 48 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Explanation of Plate. Fig. 1. Clytia minuta. Full-grown colony. Figs. 2-5. Young colonies, Figs. 6, 7. Gonophores, Fig. 8. Filellum expansum. evi eS VIS t.0¥ eee ok aS Rew _ndiiel ats. piackece eee * Sen pee “He | if Kniky tt ae hee 9S Seif Pf: d gta EE \e tei le Aire a oA RS ee Se ee. yh ay senfa > ‘ ) . - = 7a ger A fate elk wait <2 fio! @ it Fase ‘alt eras pe evil, @ Pb bel Ro pr, MAE aoe ae weet te st ~~ si : dsneuaat Towne) ye ees. \ 4 ri- 2% Ate ast wixt tre s le Po ae = oe om Chase tees wee'< if hnrad 4 RHA EG : . . by ow 4 i 7 ' nA 7 ¢ - ae Suh - 2 - 74 oF : § ade ea f ak lye: )4s oe wat an 17” ~ % : ‘ bel £ > ; ety. ay , . " ; a , fs P F r \ P 4. Wit ne * “ Nie - BULLETIN OF THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF Tow ‘Bulletin ficat ‘the Leica of Natural History VQEUME, Vi NUMBER 4° CONTENTS : 1. : Fossil Coleoptera from the ‘Wilson ranch near Florissant, Goloraiio.. oi Seca ape ae aes eed | OBE WICKHAM 2. A new Succinea. 8. An artificial prairie, i ors 4, A long-stalked Elodea flower. Std een geen PUBLISHED. BY THE UNIVERSITY ote aoe Towa Crry, IowA ISSUED TWENTY-ONE TIMES DURING THE ACADEMIC YEAR; MONTHLY FROM ~ OCTOBER TO JANUARY, WEEKLY PROM FEBRUARY TO JUNE. ENTERED ; "~ AT THE POST OFFICE IN OWA OITY AS SECOND OLASS MATL MATTER. IN THE SERIES OF RESEARCH BULLETINS OF THE UNIVERSITY BULLETIN FROM THE LABORATORIES OF NATURAL HISTORY OF THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA EDITORIAL STAFF MD ETONEAS Ett NING ENTE of Ba) ots. Aperture, length, ... 01-5 10.5 11.0 10.0'- 10.5* 110° 11.5 11.5 “11.0 Aperture, width, ..... G5. - 608 °6.5 © 6.5” 655°) 6.5) ~ 6.5.) @5°>°65 PCN ENS 3.5. ere ers check 7-0; 516.5, 17.0, 16.5. 16-0) 160 16:0 16.0 25:8 VES Said & Anes © er 0:0). 920 9.0 * TO” £820: 7 SA Se el wpertare: Tasty 7. 211.0) TES. 10.0 11S 2-0 21.0 TO ILO", 100 Aperture, width, ..... GOR 66-0 6.5) 6:07 36:0) 86:00) Stor LO .0 Jaw: Strongly arcuate, the ends rounded and enlarged, the convex margin somewhat wavy, the concave margin with a single blunt central projection. (See fig. IV.) *Preprints of this paper were distributed March 6, 1913. 31 39 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Radula: The radula shows 1 row of central teeth, and 9 rows of lateral and 19 rows of marginal teeth on each side. The outer one of the two side cusps of the laterals is quite uniformly larger. (See fig. V.) Its nearest relative in the upper Mississippi valley is S. avara from which it differs by its larger size, the more flattened body- whorl, the distinct spiral grooves, the blunt and enlarged ends of the jaw, and the nine rows of lateral teeth of the radula, each lateral with the outer side cusp larger. It is nearer S. ovalis in size, but differs in being less inflated, with flattened and spirally marked body-whorl, and with a simpler jaw of the S. avara type. It also equals S. retusa in size but is more oblique, spirally marked, and with a higher spire. The specific name is given in honor of the late Professor F. M. Witter of Muscatine, who devoted many years to the study of Towa mollusks. Distribution and habits: The species has been collected by the writer for many years in the vicinity of Iowa City, Iowa, where it is locally common. Some years ago specimens were sent out under the name of S. avara var. vermeta. The species is gre- garious on muddy borders of the Iowa river. Where the mud has been recently exposed, and is still quite soft, numerous in- dividuals may be found creeping about, sometimes reaching the water’s edge. The types which are figured were selected from two sets: the first six on the plate and in the table of dimensions are from a set which was collected at the town of Coralville, near Iowa City, and the remaining twelve specimens were collected in’ Iowa City,—in both cases along the Iowa river. The jaw and radula were taken from the Coralville specimens. The types are in the writer’s collection, and cotypes have been deposited in the zoological museum of the State University of Iowa, the National Museum, and the Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences. 34 NATURAL. HISTORY BULLETIN EXPLANATION OF PLATE I I. SUCCINEA WITTERI 0. s. Six shells showing three views. Coralville, Iowa. II-III. SvUccineEA WITTERI n. s. Twelve shells showing three views. Jowa City, Iowa. IV. SUCCINEA WITTERI n. s.,—jaw. V. SUCCINEA WITTERI n. s.,—teeth from radula. a. Central. b. First lateral. c. First marginal. The tenth and eleventh rows from the cen- tral, which usually form the first and second rows of marginals, often have some teeth with but one lateral cusp (hence like laterals) and some with two lateral cusps of the usual inner marginal type. d. Seventh marginal, showing three lateral cusps. For comparison the following species of Succinea, occurring in Iowa, are figured on the plate: VI. Succinea ovalis Say. Three views. Jowa City, Iowa. VII. Succinea retusa Lea. Three views. Iowa City, Iowa. VIII. Succinea ovalis Say. Three views of a variety from yellow loess. Towa City, Iowa. IX. Succinea grosvenorii Lea. Three views. Hamburg, Iowa. X. Succinea avara Say. Fossil, from yellow loess. Iowa City, Iowa. XI. Succinea avara Say. Modern, Rock Rapids, Iowa. PLATE I Vill a or or er rk ar) IOWA SPECIES OF SUCCINEA AN ARTIFICIAL PRAIRIE* B. SHIMEK Seven-eighths of the area of the State of Iowa and large por- tions of surrounding states were originally covered with prairie. The greater part of this area has been completely transformed by cultivation and the prairie flora has disappeared excepting along highways and the right of way of railways, and in certain rougher parts of the state which are not cultivated. The original prairie was here with all its peculiarities when the white man came, and it had probably long existed in the condition in which he found it. There is no record of its cause or origin excepting as we find it in the forces and phenomena of the natural world, and these have been so variously interpreted that the origin of the prairies has been ascribed to a variety of causes. t The writer has contended§ that evaporation as influenced by exposure to temperature and wind, and by relative humidity, was the chief and most universal cause of the treelessness of the prairie, the forest plants failing in exposed places because they are mesophytic, while the prairie plants are able to hold their own in such places because they are structurally adapted to ex- istence under conditions which are, at least during a part of the summer, decidedly xerophytic. An interesting bit of evidence supporting this view is fur- nished by a strip of prairie bordering a highway near Home- stead, Iowa, which differs from ordinary prairie in that it has been developed within the memory of men now living and under conditions which make it essentially an artificial, man-made prairie. It is not of great extent, but extent of area does not form a measure of the prairie, the latter being marked by only one consistent feature, the flora. *This paper was presented in substance before the Botanical Society of America at Cleveland, O., December, 1912. 7See the writer’s paper on “The Prairies’ in this volume, pp. 169-240, 1911. §The Prairies, ibid. vi—4—4 35 36 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN The entire area here discussed lies within the holdings of the Amana Community, a religio-communistic society whose settle- ment is popularly known as the ‘‘Colony’’ or ‘‘Colonies’’. Two of the seven towns belonging to the community, namely Home- stead and Amana, are connected by the wagon-road which is here discussed. Homestead lies about one and one-half miles south of the Iowa river. The territory north of the town is more or less broken and the highest parts traversed by the road in question rise to an altitude of about 150 feet above the river. The region between Homestead and the river is densely forested excepting in the immediate vicinity of the town, and the present owners, who were the original settlers and who are practical conservationists, have maintained a large part of the forest in its primitive condition for nearly 60 years. The road was cut through this forest in about the year 1856 for the purpose of connecting Homestead and Amana. It follows a general north- erly course, but like many of the earlier ridge-roads it zigzags more or less, bending somewhat toward the east, with its south- erly part well exposed toward the southwest. For a short dis- tance above Homestead the road is not bordered by woods, but for at least one and one-third miles north of the open part it lies wholly within the forest, which here extends quite to the river. It is to this portion of the road which is closely bordered by a dense forest that attention is specially directed. The altitude of this part of the road varies from about 100 to 150 feet above the river. Its width is 66 feet and it has been kept clear to the full width for many years in a manner very characteristic of the methodical and industrious owners. The flora covering this road-strip was originally the typical flora of the forest such as now appears in the bordering woods, but this has been completely replaced by a typical prairie flora which borders the roadway throughout its length. The bordering prairie strips on either side vary up to 30 feet in width and are illustrated in part by figure 1, plate I. The accompanying list of plants, which were collected on the cleared but otherwise undisturbed portions of the road strip, contains 72 species of flowering plants of which 13 are mono- cotyledonous,—mostly grasses. Of the total number only 6 species (those marked *) also occur less frequently in woods, but usually in rather open places. Four of these species were here AN ARTIFICIAL PRAIRIE 37 found on both the prairie strips and in the bordering forest; the two remaining species, Gentiana flavida and Silene stellata, also occur sometimes in the woods of this general region but were not observed in the vicinity of the road. The greater part of the list, 66 species, is made up of characteristic prairie plants which are wholly wanting in the adjoining forest, and which could not have been a part of the flora which originally covered the road- strip. Very few weeds were introduced with this prairie flora and these are largely restricted to the immediate border of the road-bed. Some years ago small portions of the roadside were not cleared for some time and the forest flora rapidly advanced, producing bordering thickets. The vanguard of such an advance usually consists of Corylus americana, Rhus glabra, Populus tremuloides, Quercus macrocarpa, Crataegus Margaretta, Rubus allegheniensts, and other hardy trees and shrubs, among which the smaller herbs soon appear. Individual specimens of these trees and shrubs are scattered along the prairie border in some places, but they are kept in check by the periodic clearing of the roadside. A comparison of the flora of this prairie strip with that of the adjoining forest brings out in a striking manner the difference between these floras. An examination of the forest list shows 86 species of vascular plants of which 6 are pteridophytes, and 17 monocotyledones. The dicotyledonous plants are almost equally divided between herbs and woody plants. Of this list 9 species (those marked *) also occur on the prairie. Of the latter number 5 were here not found on the prairie border but occur on prairies elsewhere. The greater part of the list, 77 species, is made up of species which are characteristic of the forest and undoubtedly represent the bulk of the flora which originally covered the road- strip. The source of the introduced prairie flora is probably to be sought in the prairie which originally covered the territory south of the forest here discussed, the remnants of the flora of which are still preserved along the Chicago, Rock Island and Pacific Railway, and elsewhere. Another prairie area is located on the bottomlands north of the river, but this probably eon- tributed very little to the introduced flora of the road-strip. The manner of introduction is suggested by a review of the habitual methods of seed dispersal of the introduced species. Of 38 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN these species 32 produce seeds or fruits easily carried by the wind and 33 have seeds or fruits which may be readily driven by wind along the surface of snow, or with sand and dust. Seven species are usually distributed by animals, the fruits of three being used for food, and four producing hooks or spines. Many of the seeds were probably also brought in on wagon-wheels, horses’ hoofs, ete. Once introduced, this flora has been able to hold its own be- cause its members are essentially xerophytes. The larger trees and shrubs which would make possible the advance of the forest have been removed artificially; the smaller forest flora, being mesophytic, can not exist in the strip thus exposed to wind and sun; and the prairie flora has become established simply because its structural adaptations give it greater powers of resistance to fluctuations in the relative humidity of the air. These structural adaptations are of the usual type, but per- haps the most striking are shown in the leaf characters. The leaves of the prairie plants usually have reduced surfaces, being small or frequently variously cut, their texture is more or less coriaceous, and they are frequently covered with hairs, scales or spines. The difference in these characters between prairie and forest plants is often illustrated in species of the same genus, as is shown in figure 2, plate I. This figure illustrates the leaves of species of eight genera. In each case (a) represents a leaf of the forest species and (b) a leaf of the prairie species belonging to the same genus. All but four of the species figured were ob- tained on the prairie border or in the adjoining woods, but these four species are found in nearby territory. Thus Viola pedati- fida, while absent from the prairie border, is abundant on the prairie north of the river. Its place along the road seems to be taken by Viola pedata. Erigeron philadelphicus and Phlox di- varicata were not observed in the woods near the road, but both occur in more remote portions of the same forest. Lobelia syphilitica belongs to the swamp rather than the forest, but it is found in wet places in the surrounding forest and is also introduced for comparison. The leaves of these species differ not only in form and size but also in texture, those of the prairie being harsher and more coriaceous. The usual differences in microscopic structure are also strikingly shown, but these need. not be discussed here. AN ARTIFICIAL PRAIRIE 39 The fact that prairie plants are essentially xerophytes is well established, and explains the possibility of their continued ex- istence in exposed situations. That exposure brought about artificially should result in the development of this xerophytic flora in a narrow strip extending through a deep forest seems especially worthy of note, and further confirms the previous conclusion that exposure is the primary cause of the existence of treeless prairies. So long as this strip is kept clear of shrubs and trees it will continue to produce a prairie flora. If neglected much of it will probably revert to forest, though it is very prob- able that where the prairie turf has become well established it would resist the advance of the forest. The following lists of plants give a comparative view of the floras of the prairie strip and the adjacent forest. The lists are based on many collections made at various times. Prairie Plants Dicotyledones Achillea millefolium L. Ambrosia artemisiifolia L. Amorpha canescens Pursh Anemone cylindrica Gray Antennaria plantaginifolia (L.) Rich. Artemisia caudata Michx. Asclepias syriaca L. Asclepias tuberosa L. Asclepias verticillata L. Aster laevis L. Aster multiflorus exiguus Fern. Baptisia leucantha T. & G. Brauneria pallida (Nutt.) Britt. Cassia chamaecrista L. Ceanothus americanus L. Cirsium discolor (Muhl.) Spreng. Coreopsis palmata Nutt. Desmodium canadense (L.) DC. Erigeron ramosus (Walt.) BSP. Euphorbia corollata L. *Fragaria virginiana Duches. *Gentiana flavida Gray Helianthemum majus BSP. Helianthus scaberrimus Ell. Heuchera hispida Pursh Hypericum cistifolium Lam. Krigia amplexicaulis Nutt. Kuhnia eupatoroides corymbulosa T. & G. Lactuca canadensis L. Lepachys pinnata (Vent.) T. & G. Lespedeza capitata Michx. Liatris pycnostachya Michx. Liatris scariosa Willd. Linum suleatum Rid. _Lithospermum canescens (Michx.) Lam. Lobelia spicata Lam. Monarda mollis L. (Enothera serrulata Nutt. Parthenium integrifolium L. Phlox pilosa L. Physalis pubescens L. *Potentilla canadensis L. Pyenanthemum flexuosum (Walt.) BSP. , *Rhus glabra L. Rudbeckia hirta L. Ruellia ciliosa Pursh 40 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Salix humilis Marsh. Seutellaria parvula Michx. Silene antirrhina L. *Silene stellata (L.) Ait. f. Silphium integrifolium Michx. Siulphium laciniatum L. Solidago canadensis L. Solidago nemoralis Ait. Solidago rigida L. Verbena angustifolia Michx. *Veronica virginica L. Viola pedata L. Zizia aurea (L.) Koch. Monocotyledones Agropyron Smithii Ryd. Andropogon furcatus Muhl. Andropogon scoparius Michx. Elymus canadensis L. Hordeum jubatum L. Hypoxis hirsuta (L.) Coy. Keleria cristata (L.) Pers. Panicum Scribnerianum Nash Panicum virgatum L. Poa pratensis L. Sorghastrum nutans (L.) Nash Stipa spartea Trin. Tradescantia bracteata Small Forest Plants Dicotyledones Herbs Actaea alba (L.) Mill. Actaea rubra (Ait.) Willd. Agrimonia gryposepala Wallr. Agrimonia striata Michx. Anemone quinquefolia L. Anemone virginiana L. Anemonella thalictroides (L.) Spach Aralia racemosa L. Aster Drummondii Lindl. Cireaea lutetiana L. Cryptotaenia canadensis (L.) DC. Desmodium grandiflorum ( Walt.) DC. *Dodecatheon Meadia L. *Fragaria virginiana Duches. Galium aparine L. Galium triflorum Michx. Geranium maculatum L. Geum canadense Jacq. Hepatica acutiloba DC. Hydrophyllum virginianum L. Osmorrhiza longistyla (Torr.) DC. Phryma leptostachya L. Podophyllum peltatum L. Polemonium reptans L. *Potentilla canadensis L. Pyrola elliptica Nutt. Ranunculus abortivus L. Sanguinaria canadensis L. Sanicula marilandica L. Solidago ulmifolia Muhl. Triosteum perfoliatum L. *Veronica virginica L. Viola cucullata Ait. Viola pubescens Ait. Woody Plants Carya ovata (Mill.) K. Koch Celastrus scandens L. Celtis occidentalis L. Cornus paniculata L’Heér. Corylus americana Walt. Crataegus Margaretta Ashe Crataegus mollis (T. & G.) Scheele Menispermum canadense L. Populus tremuloides Michx. Prunus americana Marsh. Prunus serotina Ehrh. Prunus virginiana L. Psedera quinquefolia (L.) Greene Pyrus ioensis (Wood) Britt. Quercus alba L. AN ARTIFICIAL PRAIRIE Quercus macrocarpa Michx. Rubus allegheniensis Porter Quercus rubra L. *Rubus occidentalis L. Quercus velutina Lam. Sambucus canadensis L. Rhamnus lanceolata Pursh Tilia americana L. *Rhus glabra L. Ulmus americana L. *Rhus toxicodendron L. Ulmus fulva Michx. Ribes gracile Michx, Viburnum lentago L. Rosa blanda Ait. *Vitis vulpina L. Monocotyledones 41 Arisaema dracontium (L.) Schott Panicum Porterianum Nash Arisaema triphyllum (L.) Schott Polygonatum commutatum (R. & S.) Carex rosea Schk. Dietr. Cypripedium parviflorum pubescens Smilax ecirrhata (Eng.) Wats. (Willd.) Kn. Smilax herbacea L. Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. Smilax hispida Muhl. Dioscorea villosa L. Smilacina racemosa (L.) Desf. Hystrix patula Moench. *Smilacina stellata (L.) Desf. Liparis lillifolia (L.) Rich. Uvularia grandiflora Sm. Orchis spectabilis L. Pteridophyta Adiantum pedatum L. Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh. Aspleniium filix-foemina (L.) Osmunda Claytoniana L. Bernh. Pteris aquilina L. Botrychium virginianum (L.) Sw. NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Explanation of Plate I Fic. I—A portion of the Homestead road, looking north, showing the prairie border especially well on the east side. Fic. [1—Leaves of prairie and forest plants. 1. Smilacina. a. SS. racemosa (L.) Desf. b. S. stellata (L.) Desf. 2. Solidago. a. S. ulmifolia Muhl. b. S. nemoralis Ait. 3. Panicum. a. P. Porterianum Nash - b. YP. Seribnerianum Nash 4. Viola. a. V. cucullata Ait. b. V. pedatifida G. Don. 5. Aster. a. A. Drummondii Lindl. b. A. multiflorus var. exiguus Fern. 6. Hrigeron. a. E. philadelphicus L. b. E. ramosus (Walt.) BSP. 7. Lobelia. a. L. siphilitica L. b. L. spicata Lam. 8. Phlox. a. P. divariecata L. b. P. pilosa L. PLATE I ‘ FIGURE I HOMESTEAD ROAD WITH PRAIRIE BORDERS FIGURE 2 COMPARISON OF LEAVES OF FOREST AND PRAIRIE PLANTS OF SAME GENUS = = Aa: he on " = > dh A wscat om. fo er. A LONG-STALKED ELODEA FLOWER ROBERT B. WYLIE The submersed seed plants are of peculiar interest to the botanist. Obviously descendants of land plants, they offer many ingenious modifications in relation to their adopted habitat. More remotely they were probably derived from some primitive aquatic stock, but all evidences of such ancestry are lost in the multitudinous structures elsewhere associated with land plants. In the life history of each of these aquatic flowering plants there must have been a terrestrial life of sufficient duration to permit the evolution of a dominant sporophyte, the development of heterospory, and the attainment of the seed habit, together with a relatively high degree of floral development. The possession of such structures and habits in common with land plants would argue that our aquatic phenogams are removed but a little from the land. Most so-called ‘‘water-plants’’ are only nominally aquatic, living merely rooted in shallow water or partly submersed. The marginal vegetation of every lake affords numerous examples. A few plants, on the other hand, have solved the problems of exist- ence entirely beneath the surface of the water and are truly aquatic since they carry out their whole life history while com- pletely submersed. A fine example is seen in Ceratophyllum demersum Li. which is pollinated beneath the surface, so may flourish at considerable depths. In West Okoboji Lake in north- western Iowa this form has been found growing at a depth of nearly thirty feet and is one of the most successful plants in these waters. Zostera and Phyllospadix are marine genera of similar habit. An extensive intermediate group includes seed plants that live beneath the surface of the water, but which must bring their flowers to the air if cross pollination is to be effected. Such plants are truly amphibious, though in the reverse sense of the term, since they vegetate in water and seek the air only for aid in reproduction. Vegetatively they are aquatics, but in their 43 44 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN floral habits are still essentially land plants. It must not be assumed, however, that they have retained unmodified their former habits of pollination. While some of them are possibly anemophilous in the simpler sense of the term, others have specialized flowers and employ the surface film of water in most ingenious ways to aid in the transfer of pollen. Nor should the members of the hydro-anemophilous group be looked upon as transitional to the subsurface habit of pollination. On the con- trary they probably represent a distinct specialization, with structures and habits intimately related to pollination at the surface of the water. Conspicuous examples are seen in Vallis- neria and Elodea, while less highly specialized forms are found in certain species of Myriophyllum and Potamogeton. The submersed plant that brings its flowers to the surface of the water for pollination accomplishes this in one of three ways, or, in the dioecious forms, there may be a combination of two of these methods ;— 1. By elongation of the floral axis. This is the simplest and probably in general the most primitive plan since it might be developed gradually as plants pushed out into deeper water. Examples are seen in Myriophyllum spicatum L., several species of Potamogeton, and in the pistillate flower of Vallisneria spi- ralis Li. 2. By detachment of flowers from the plant. This leaves the flowers free to float to the surface of the water. Obviously this plan may be employed for staminate flowers only, and is there- fore always associated with some other plan for the pistillate flower which must retain connection with the plant until the seeds are matured. Well known examples are the staminate flowers of Elodea and Vallisneria spiralis L. 3. By elongation of the flowers. This plan is the most highly specialized of the three, involving as it does the radical modifica- tion of the floral parts in order to bring the stamens and stigmas to the surface of the water. In Elodea the epigynous pistillate flower may be one thousand times as long as wide. The perfect flowers of Heteranthera dubia (Jacq.) MacM., though hypogyn- ous, attain to a marked degree of elongation in their upward stretch toward the surface of the water. Another alternative suggests itself, namely, self-pollination be- neath the surface of the water, but this seems seldom to occur. A LONG-STALKED ELODEA FLOWER 45 It may be that the wide spread dioecism in aquatic plants, evi- dently recently acquired in some of them, is to avoid this di- lemma. The writer has recently made a careful study of the perfect flowers of Heteranthera dubia (Jacq.) MacM. and finds them to be regularly cleistogamous. Whether deeply submersed, the more favorable condition for vegetative growth, or near enough to the surface to permit the flowers to open in air, fertil- ization seems to take place uniformly before the flowers open. In the genus Elodea the flowers are generally functionally monosporangiate though rudiments of the suppressed parts are regularly present. The pistillate flower reaches the surface of the water, if not too deeply submersed, through the elongation of that portion of the epigynous flower above the ovary,—the ‘‘tubus calicis’’ of the older writers,—i. e., it employs the principle of flower elongation. The staminate flower of our common species of Elodea reaches the surface by detachment. Each remains until fully developed attached to the plant within the globose spathe. At maturity the pedicil weakens and presently the flower is released, rises rapidly the the surface and there sheds its pollen on the water. The sur- face film of water has much to do with the floating of the pollen and the general events of pollination in this plant.* During the summer of 1909, in connection with work at the Maebride Lakeside Laboratory on Lake Okoboji in northwestern Iowa, the writer noted an unusual form of staminate flower on the Elodea plants of that locality. The flowers were in striking contrast to those of the common species in that they were carried to the surface of the water on a long slender axis instead of re- maining sessile and detaching at maturity (Fig. 1). Detachment was subsequent to the shedding of the pollen, and was often long delayed. It was interesting to encounter a pollen bearing flower of Elodea employing the plan of axis elongation instead of de- tachment, and to note within the one genus the occurrence of the three possible modes of surface attainment. The staminate flowers of several South American species of Elodea are reported to behave similarly. Caspary® describes cer- tain species, among these, Elodea chilensis Casp. and E. calli- 1 Wylie, Robert B., The Morphology of Elodea canadensis, Bot. Gazette, 37: 1-22, 1904, pp. 11-13. 2 Caspary, R., Die Hydrillen. Jahrb. f. wiss. Bot., 1: 377-513, 1858, pp. 469-472. 46 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN trichioides Casp., as having a filiform axis to the staminate flow- er, but no similar structures seem to have been noted among our members of this genus. Accordingly the plants above noted were studied with care, and observations were continued through the two succeeding summers. The plants under discussion were large and vigorous, and flourished abundantly in the north end of East Okoboji lake, at times completely dominating certain areas. Every one of the hundreds of staminate flowers examined displayed the same trait, seeming to point to a distinct strain of these plants in that lo- eality. During the summer of 1910 these plants were found in the same place and also at another point in the lake four miles distant. The low water prevailing in these lakes during the summer of 1911 greatly altered the number and distribution of water plants but the form in question was fairly abundant. The associated pistillate plants, whose flowers closely resemble those of the common species, were abundant and set seeds regularly. In all this time the other form, EF. canadensis Michx. was not noted in the waters of these connected lakes. The lower portion of the spathe of these pollen bearing flowers is early constricted (Fig. 3), and might resemble in a superficial way the condition described as ‘‘spathe peduncled’’ by Rydberg* in his deseription of Philotria linearis Rydb. and P. Planchonw (Casp.) Rydb., though the spathe of our form is strictly sessile. The outer end of the spathe expands abruptly into a flattened two-cleft circular portion which loosely invests the body of the flower which is pedicillate within the spathe. At maturity the axis elongates rapidly, pushing the flower out of the spathe (Fig. 2), and outward into the water when its buoyancy carries it upward toward the surface. The degree of elongation of the axis is related in a general way to depth of its insertion. Those borne near the surface may be but two or three centimeters in length, while those in deeper water show extreme elongation. Specimens were measured in 1911 28 em. long and no doubt this did not represent the extreme of elongation. The staminate flower is thus carried up on a slender whitish thread which resembles in a superficial way the ‘‘floral tube’’ of the pistillate flower. In Caspary’s descriptions the same term, “‘tubus ecalicis,’’ is applied to both of these elongated structures. 3 Rydberg, P. A., Flora of North America. A LONG-STALKED ELODEA FLOWER 47 While the habits of these two flowers are biological equivalents, and the parts concerned outwardly similar, they are morpholog- ically unlike and in no sense homologous. The ‘‘tubus calicis’’ of the pistillate flower includes that complex of parts above the ovary of the epigynous flower, while that of the staminate flower is simply the stem or axis. The greater efficiency of the latter is probably due to its stem character and the relative simplicity of stem elongation compared with flower elongation. The rapid elongation of the peduncle of the staminate flower is due to the lengthening of cells previously much contracted. These cells may increase to twenty-five times their former length, —this accompanied by a slight decrease in diameter. Some stalks elongated over 20 em. on plants left over night in a collecting case,—the flowers being pushed out through the tangle of plants in the vasculum. The flower maturing naturally in the water has usually, during the hours of sunshine at least, a bubble tugging at its apex. Frequent experiment failed, however, to dislodge a bubble in such a way as to carry any of the pollen to the surface. It seems that the pollen is shed only when the flower itself reaches the surface of the water. In quiet waters the flowers may remain attached to the plant for some time after the pollen is shed. But in more open waters their release is hastened by wave action, the axis breaking at its most slender part within the spathe at the base. In 1909, when the plants were noted most abundantly, the detached staminate flowers formed extensive windrows at the margins of open water where thousands of them might be seen tangled together by their long trailing stalks. In no case was an unopen flower noted among these and they were free from all except floating pollen. Biologically it is of interest to note the occurrence of the three possible flower-forms within the one genus, and the association of two distinct types of staminate flowers with a pistillate flower that is quite constant throughout the genus. While the pistillate flower might also have developed an elongated scape, as in Vallis- neria, the vegetative habits of the plant have not made this neces- sary. Hlodea plants are small leaved and thrive near the surface of the water,—a habit that is favored through its anchorage by means of long roots. Vallisneria, on the other hand, has long leaves arising from a short stem at the bottom of the pond, and 48 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN may flourish in waters of a yard or more in depth. Its flowers are thus compelled to rise through a considerable distance, re- quiring a scape, while those of Elodea, borne nearer the surface, reach the air by flower elongation. These two types of staminate flowers in the genus Elodea sug- gest independent lines of evolution in the efforts, so to speak, of this plant to overcome the difficulties of cross pollination as a submersed plant. The sessile flower, which comes to nothing unless detached, is probably the simpler and agrees in structure with the pistillate flower which is always sessile. Detachment was made easy through the reduction of mechanical tissues char- acteristic of submersed plants, while buoyancy was secured by means of the air-spaces so freely developed in plants of such habitat. The other, or long peduncled pollen bearing flower, seems here to represent the derived condition, though this habit is certainly primitive in other genera. Its advantages, if any, are not obvious; on the other hand no disadvantages are sug- gested since detachment is possible at any degree of axis-elonga- tion. ) A couple of years ago the writer published‘ a brief description of this form with the suggestion that it be called Elodea iowensis in case it could not well be included in any of the recognized species. Further study of the plant has only made more un- certain any other disposition of it, and accordingly a tentative description is outlined as follows ;— Elodea ioensis nov. sp. (Plates I and IT) Polygamo-dioecious water plant. Stems slender 2-10 dm. long; leaves in 3’s oblong lanceolate to oblong linear, 8-14 mm. long, 2-3.5 mm. broad, abruptly pointed, finely serrate; spathe of staminate flower sessile, con- stricted at base into a tubular stalk-like portion 5-10 mm. long, outer expanded portion 6-8 mm. long, 4 mm. broad, flattened, and two cleft; staminate flower long-pedicelled, the axis at maturity 3-20 em. in length, often detaching after elongation, body oval 3 mm. long; sepals oval, 4 mm. long and strongly recurved in open flower; petals linear-lanceolate, long acuminate, obtuse, 4 mm. wide, abruptly expanded near base, and shorter than the sepals; stamens 9; anthers oblong, 2.5-3 mm. long, subsessile; inner triad of stamens standing much higher than outer; branched rudi- mentary stigma prominent; spathe of pistillate flower linear, 10-15 mm. long; hypanthium-tube slender, 3-15 em. long; sepals oval, 2 mm. long; petals obovate, delicate; stigmas 3, linear, 3 mm. long; staminodia 3, slender. East Okoboji Lake, Dickinson County, Iowa, 1909. 4Wylie, Robert B., The Staminate Flower of Elodea. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci., 18: 80-82, 1911. A LONG-STALKED ELODEA FLOWER 49 It seems to differ markedly from described North American species in the possession of this long peduncled staminate flower. But as this axis does not elongate conspicuously until a few hours before the flower opens, the suggestion naturally arises that it may have been overlooked elsewhere and the description based on immature material. Under this assumption one is lead to com- pare it with Elodea Planchonw Casp. (Philotria Planchonu [Casp.] Rydb.) which is described as having a short pedicelled staminate flower, but a comparison of these forms shows many other points of difference. ELODEA PLANCHONIT CASP. ELODEA IOENSIS Based on description of Philotria Planchonii (Casp.) Rydb. Leaves 7-15x1-2 mm. Leaves 8-14x2-3.5 mm. Staminate flower short-pedicelled. Staminate flowers long-pedicelled. -Pedice] ————————_-. -Pedicel 5-25 em. long. -Spathe peduneled. -Spathe sessile, contracted at base. -Sepals elliptic, 5 mm. long. -Sepals oval, 4 mm. long. -Petals lacking. -Petals present, linear-lanceolate, : long-acuminate, ete. -Anthers 3-4 mm. long. -Anthers, 2.5-3 mm. long. Pistillate flower, tube 3-5 em. long. Pistillate flower, tube 3-15 em. long. -Sepals linear, 3 mm. long. -Sepals oval, 2 mm. long. -Petals linear, 3 mm. long. -Petals obovate, 2 mm. long. -Stamens none. -Sterile stamens, 3. Figs. 5 and 6 illustrate fundamental differences between the staminate flower of this form and that of Elodea canadensis Michx. at corresponding stages of development; at any later stage the contrasts would be more marked. Minor differences in form of petals and sepals for both flowers occur, and of course there can be no agreement with the hermaphrodite form of £. canadensis Michx. Comparison with the South American species credited with long stalked staminate flowers is difficult from the descriptions since the same term ‘‘tubus calicis’’ is applied to the elongated portions of both pistillate and staminate flowers, though it is highly improbable that they are structurally identical. How- ever, in summarizing the characters of Elodea chilensis Casp. Caspary® says, ‘‘Mannliche Bliithe, wie die weibliche mit sehr langer Rohre des Kelches, 8-48’’" lang. Die miannliche Blithe 5 Loc. cit., p. 470. 50 NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN scheint sich nicht lozulosen. Die Spatha der mannlichen Blithe ist lineal-cylindrisch.’’ The slender spathe would seem to be a point in evidence also of the homology of these structures,—in which case there can be no agreement with our form. But as- suming the term ‘‘tubus ealicis’’ of these descriptions relates to the peduncle of the staminate flower there are many points of difference between any of them and the Okoboji plant. In addi- tion, the wide geographical separation,—in opposite hemispheres, —would suggest caution in correlating these forms, though Caspary® refers to at least three species that are dioecious and may have peduncled staminate flowers (Hlodea chilensis Casp., Elodea callitrichiodes Casp., and Elodea Najas Casp.) that offer similarities to the form in question. The occurrence of the plant under discussion in the waters of the Okoboji lakes suggests two alternatives;—Hither, (1) that it is a form of local development, with perhaps a limited range, or, (2) that it belongs to a species of possibly wide distribution to the west and northwest of the Mississippi basin which has not yet been clearly identified nor fully described. . Favoring the former view is the considerable depth of these Okoboji lakes (over 100 feet in places), thus pointing to a prob- ably constant body of water since the last glacial invasion,— the lakes having been formed in part at least by the Wisconsin ice-sheet. These quiet waters, through thousands of years, hav- ing at all times shallower margins favoring the growth of such plants, would have made ready the stage for possible mutations. Favoring the latter alternative, which to the writer seems probable, is the relative inconspicuousness of. the flowers sug- gesting that this form might easily have escaped the casual observer. tn its younger stages it is not strikingly different from the common species, while in its maturity the flower resembles the pistillate flower in a general way. Of course no skilled col- lector would be deceived, but when one recalls the relative in- accessibility of these plants to the pedestrian collectors, and the greater interest of most pioneer workers in the more conspicuous land plants, one is inclined to the view that this form may be found more generally in the lakes to the west and northwest as these are studied more thoroughly. ® Loe. cit., 469-477. OO Y) NATURAL HISTORY BULLETIN Explanation of Plates The abbreviations employed in describing figures are as follows: stg, stigma; st, stamen; sp, spathe; p, petal, and s, sepal. Hig, ie Fig. 2. Fig. 3. Fig. 4. Fig. 0. Fig. 6. Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Fig. 9 PLATE I Open staminate flower attached to plant. _ Mature staminate flower enclosed within the spathe. Staminate flower emerging from spathe. Detached and empty staminate flower floating on water with elongated axis trailing. PuaTE IT Median longitudinal section through mature staminate flower of Elodea ioensis still enclosed by spathe. A similar section through staminate flower of Elodea canadensis Michx. at a stage of development corresponding to that shown in Fig. 5. Open flower of Hlodea ioensis. Leaf of Hlodea ioensis. Petal of staminate flower, Hlodea ioensis. Sepal of staminate flower, Hlodea ioensis. PLATE I WYLIE ON ELODEA PLATE II 00 M09.906 ODO 8s WYLIE ON ELODEA P 4 1) ae Li } ; allee AU: et Wir, “ r reat Toy Po New York Botanical Garden Li i A Yoee 22 at ‘a